礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
律藏· 《心义灯》复注(第二部分)巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Vinayapiṭake · Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā (dutiyo bhāgo)
1. 巴拉基格篇复注巴利 1. Pārājikakaṇḍaṃ
全篇 1114 段
1. 第一巴拉基格巴利
1. Paṭhamapārājikaṃ
善生诵分的注释巴利
Sudinnabhāṇavāravaṇṇanā
24 逐词解释,就是按照每一个词来解释,或者按照词的顺序来解释。这里说的“以物品交易、取回、提醒等事务”:物品交易是指把要卖的东西卖出去;取回是指在约定的日子前去拿回来;提醒是指让人想起“应该在某天交付”。所谓四种,是指按照刹帝利、婆罗门、居士、沙门分为四种,或者按照比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女分为四种。“见后,他心生此念”——这里的“见已”一词表示原因,主语和主句不同,就像“喝了酥油后有力气,看见狮子后生起恐惧”一样。确实是因为看见了,才产生了这样的思惟。虽然这里说的是“贤善家子”,但即使是具足亲依止的像阿阇世王那样的人也会出现障碍;据说这位长老也是因为对过去所造恶业的追悔,而在证得道果时出现了障碍。巴利
24.Anupadavaṇṇananti padaṃ padaṃ paṭivaṇṇanaṃ, padānukkamena vaṇṇanaṃ vā. Bhaṇḍappayojanauddhārasāraṇādinā kiccenāti ettha vikkāyikabhaṇḍassa vikkiṇanaṃ bhaṇḍappayojanaṃ, dātuṃ saṅketite divase gantvā gahaṇaṃ uddhāro, ‘‘asukasmiṃ divase dātabba’’nti satuppādanaṃ sāraṇaṃ. Catubbidhāyāti khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇānaṃ vasena catubbidhāya, bhikkhubhikkhunīupāsakaupāsikānaṃ vasena vā. Disvānassa etadahosīti hetuattho ayaṃ disvāna-saddo asamānakattuko yathā ‘‘ghataṃ pivitvā balaṃ hoti, sīhaṃ disvā bhayaṃ hotī’’ti. Dassanakāraṇā hi evaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi. Kiñcāpi ettha ‘‘bhabbakulaputtassā’’ti vuttaṃ, tathāpi upanissayasampannassapi ajātasattuno viya antarāyo bhavissatīti imassa therassapi katapāpakammamūlavippaṭisāravasena adhigamantarāyo ahosīti vadanti.
那么,那些有资格证得道果的人,即使佛陀就在面前,他们也会有障碍吗?是的,会有。但这并不是因为佛陀。佛陀为了让他人证得道果,总是积极努力,在这件事上从不间断、一直精勤用功,所以障碍不是因佛陀而起。实际上,障碍是因为修行退失或者因为结交恶友。修行退失,有时是因为说法者,有时是因为那个人自己缺乏相应的精勤,这一点应当了解。这里就说法者来说,退失只应理解为声闻弟子的情况,不是佛陀的情况。比如,如果法将舍利弗了解了特南迦尼婆罗门的根性而为他说法,那位婆罗门本来可以成为入流者。这样,就是因为说法者的修行退失而产生了障碍。再比如,驯象师之子贝萨在世尊面前听法时,如果稍微多坐一会儿,当世尊为他详细分析四种人、讲到自苦自励者时,他本来可以证得入流果。这样,就是因为个人的修行退失而产生了障碍。这位近事男就是因为修行退失,在说法还没结束时便起身离开了。如果阿阇世王不听提婆达多的话,不犯弑父之业,那么在说《沙门果经》那天,他本来可以成为入流者,但他听了提婆达多的话、犯了弑父之业,所以没有证得。这样,就是因为恶友而产生了障碍。苏丁那也应当看作是因为恶友而产生了障碍。如果他听从父母的话,不与前妻行淫,就不会因此生起追悔,也就不会在证得道果上产生障碍。巴利
Kiṃ pana yesaṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo atthi, buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāvepi tesaṃ antarāyo hotīti? Āma hoti, na pana buddhe paṭicca. Buddhā hi paresaṃ maggaphalādhigamāya ussāhajātā tattha nirantaraṃ yuttapayuttā eva honti, tasmā te paṭicca tesaṃ antarāyo na hoti, atha kho kiriyāparihāniyā vā pāpamittatāya vā hoti, kiriyāparihāni ca desakassa tasseva vā puggalassa tajjapayogābhāvato veditabbā, desakavasena panettha parihāni sāvakānaṃ vaseneva veditabbā, na buddhānaṃ vasena. Tathā hi sace dhammasenāpati dhanañjāniyassa brāhmaṇassa āsayaṃ ñatvā dhammaṃ desayissa, brāhmaṇo sotāpanno abhavissa. Evaṃ tāva desakassa vasena kiriyāparihāniyā antarāyo hoti. Sace pesso hatthārohaputto bhagavato sammukhā dhammaṃ suṇanto muhuttaṃ nisīdeyya, yāva tassa bhagavā attantapādike cattāro puggale vitthārena vibhajitvā deseti, sotāpattiphalena saṃyutto abhavissa. Evaṃ puggalassa vasena kiriyāparihāniyā antarāyo hoti nāma. Imassa hi upāsakassa kiriyāparihāni jātā apariniṭṭhitāya desanāya uṭṭhahitvā pakkantattā. Sace ajātasattu devadattassa vacanaṃ gahetvā pitughātakammaṃ nākarissa, sāmaññaphalasuttakathitadivase sotāpanno abhavissa, tassa vacanaṃ gahetvā pitughātakammassa katattā pana nāhosi. Evaṃ pāpamittatāya antarāyo hoti. Sudinnassapi pāpamittavasena antarāyo ahosīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yadi hi tena mātāpitūnaṃ vacanaṃ gahetvā purāṇadutiyikāya methunadhammo paṭisevito nābhavissa, na taṃmūlavippaṭisāravasena adhigamantarāyo abhavissa.
“yannūna”是表示思惟的不变词,所以注释说“这是显示思惟”。“听法”是用动词表达的意思,而用“yannūna”这个不变词把它点明。连接起来就是:“我何不听闻法?”“yannūna”的意思是“如果那样的话”。“如果那样的话”和它也是同一个意思。“他所听闻的法”是关联。高贵大众,是指刹帝利大户等高贵大众聚集。如果他先于别人来到,适合走近世尊坐下,所以说“后来者”。与三学相应,就是与增上戒、增上心、增上慧这三学相应。听了少许法教之后,生起这个念头,这是关联。这里“听了”一词也应看作表示原因,也就是说,因为听闻的缘故,才生起这个念头。如果是这样,那为什么又说“退坐一面……心生此念”?所以接着说“然而,他因为……”等。其中,“彼”指那个思惟。巴利
Yannūnāti parivitakkanatthe nipātoti āha ‘‘parivitakkadassanameta’’nti. ‘‘Dhammaṃ suṇeyya’’nti kiriyāpadena vuccamāno eva hi attho ‘‘yannūnā’’ti nipātapadena jotīyati. Ahaṃ yannūna dhammaṃ suṇeyyanti yojanā. Yannūnāti ca yadi panāti attho. Yadi panāti idampi hi tena samānatthameva. Yaṃ dhammaṃ suṇātīti sambandho. Uḷāruḷārajanāti khattiyamahāsālādiuḷāruḷārajanākiṇṇā . Sace ayampi paṭhamaṃ āgaccheyya, bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā nisīdituṃ araharūpoti āha ‘‘pacchā āgatenā’’ti. Sikkhattayūpasaṃhitanti adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāsaṅkhātasikkhattayayuttaṃ. Thokaṃ dhammakathaṃ sutvā ahosīti sambandho. Idhāpi sutvā-saddo hetuatthoti daṭṭhabbo, savanakāraṇā etadahosīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yadi evaṃ atha kasmā ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisinnassa…pe… etadahosī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘taṃ panassa yasmā’’tiādi. Tattha tanti parivitakkanaṃ.
“略说”是指不逐词拆开解释,而是总体概括地说明含义。“以种种方式”就是通过种种途径。“当我以彼彼方式审察时”意思是:世尊以种种方式教导了阐明诸欲的过患、卑劣与杂染,以及与此相反的出离的功德与利益之法,比如“这些欲是无常、苦、变易法,如骸骨喻”等;我以种种方式对这些法审察、探究时,我心里便这样想、这样现起。“三学梵行”是指包含增上戒学等三学的殊胜行。“即使一日”是指哪怕仅仅一天。“无有毁坏”是指连微细的恶作都不犯,从而不令毁坏,或者通过成就无毁坏、无穿孔等状态而无有毁坏。这其实是对“无毁坏”这一特征的解说。“临终心”指死心。“绝对圆满”是指不遗留任何一部分,完全地圆满。“不为烦恼垢所染”是指不被渴爱杂染等染污,连一念杂染垢都不令生起。“绝对清净”是指必须保持完全清净。正因如此,就像螺贝被刻画一样,所以称为“螺贝刻画”。因此说“如刻画之螺贝”。以洁白清净之义,如同已刻画并洗净的螺贝,所以说“如洗净螺贝之色”。“居住”一词的用法中,“在家”是处格,因此说“在家之中”。胡须也连同髭一起包括在“须”里,所以只说“须”,意思是上唇和下唇的须。“以染料染成红色”即“袈裟色”,所以说“因染料汁所染”。“穿上”是指下裙和上衣都穿好。“家的利益”是指在家生活,由复合词后分省略而“家”表在家生活,即能带来家的增长的利益,也就是家的利益。巴利
Saṅkhepakathāti visuṃ visuṃ paduddhāraṃ akatvā samāsato atthavaṇṇanā. Yena yena ākārenāti yena yena pakārena. Tena tena me upaparikkhatoti ‘‘kāmā nāmete aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.234; 2.42; pāci. 417; mahāni. 3; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 147) ca ādinā yena yena ākārena kāmesu ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ, tabbipariyāyato nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ guṇaṃ pakāsentaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi avabujjhāmi, tena tena pakārena upaparikkhato vīmaṃsantassa mayhaṃ evaṃ hoti evaṃ upaṭṭhāti. Sikkhattayabrahmacariyanti adhisīlasikkhādisikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ seṭṭhacariyaṃ. Ekampi divasanti ekadivasamattampi. Akhaṇḍaṃ katvāti dukkaṭamattassapi anāpajjanena akhaṇḍitaṃ katvā, akhaṇḍaacchiddādibhāvāpādanena vā. Akhaṇḍalakkhaṇavacanañhetaṃ. Carimakacittanti cuticittaṃ. Kiñcipi ekadesaṃ asesetvā ekanteneva paripūretabbatāya ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ. Kilesamalena amalīnaṃ katvāti taṇhāsaṃkilesādinā asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ katvā, cittuppādamattampi saṃkilesamalaṃ anuppādetvā. Accantameva visuddhaṃ katvā pariharitabbatāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ. Tato eva saṅkhaṃ viya likhitanti saṅkhalikhitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘likhitasaṅkhasadisa’’nti. Pariyodātaṭṭhena nimmalabhāvena saṅkhaṃ viya likhitaṃ dhotanti saṅkhalikhitanti āha ‘‘dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāga’’nti. ‘‘Ajjhāvasatā’’ti padappayogena agāranti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘agāramajjhe’’ti. Dāṭhikāpi massuggahaṇeneva gahetvā ‘‘massu’’tveva vuttaṃ, uttarādharamassunti attho. Kasāyena rattānīti kāsāyānīti āha ‘‘kasāyarasapītatāyā’’ti. Paridahitvāti nivāsetvā ceva pārupitvā ca. Agārassa hitanti agāravāso agāraṃ uttarapadalopena, tassa vaḍḍhiāvahaṃ agārassa hitaṃ.
25 25. 在“亲戚、血亲”等词中:知道“这是内在的”,或被知晓,故称“亲戚”;由血缘相连接的是“血亲”。父方的亲属是“亲戚”,母方的亲属是“血亲”。母方或父方的亲属是“亲戚”,公婆方的亲属是“血亲”。以友爱相待的是“朋友”,或者能把一切秘密都纳入内部的人是“朋友”。在应做之事上以共处之义而成为“同僚”。执取“我”的是母亲,被视为可爱的是父亲。“以身体事务为借口”指以大小便等身体事务为借口。不允许未获父母许可的儿子出家,是为了“不让父母和世间大众心生变异”而不允许。也正因如此,苏托达那大王得到了那样的恩许。巴利
25.Ñātisālohitātiādīsu ‘‘ayaṃ ajjhattiko’’ti jānanti, ñāyanti vāti ñātī, lohitena sambandhāti sālohitā. Pitupakkhikā ñātī, mātupakkhikā sālohitā. Mātupakkhikā pitupakkhikā vā ñātī , sassusasurapakkhikā sālohitā. Mittāyantīti mittā, minanti vā sabbaguyhesu anto pakkhipantīti mittā. Kiccakaraṇīyesu sahabhāvaṭṭhena amā hontīti amaccā. Mamāyatīti mātā, piyāyatīti pitā. Sarīrakiccalesenāti uccārapassāvādisarīrakiccalesena. Ananuññātaṃ puttaṃ na pabbājetīti ‘‘mātāpitūnaṃ lokiyamahājanassa ca cittaññathattaṃ mā hotū’’ti na pabbājeti. Tatoyeva ca suddhodanamahārājassa tathā varo dinno.
26 以卸下重担来说,是指在货物用途等方面卸下重担。因此说“确实不……”等。“应被喜爱者”就是可爱,所以说“能生喜悦者”。“令意满足者”就是可意,所以说“能令意增长者”。在幼年时期以安乐养育,此后又以酥、乳等美味可意的饮食等丰足供给而安乐养护。或者,以坚固忠诚的仆从等眷属的圆满以及领土的圆满,并以殊胜妙乐的资具供给而安乐养育;以毫不费力地消除苦因而安乐养护。或者,以内在支分的圆满而安乐养育,以外在支分的圆满而安乐养护。巴利
26.Dhuranikkhepenāti bhaṇḍappayojanādīsu dhuranikkhepena. Tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Piyāyitabboti piyoti āha ‘‘pītijananako’’ti. Manassa appāyanato manāpoti āha ‘‘manavaḍḍhanako’’ti. Sukhedhito taruṇadārakakāle, tato parañca sappikhīrādisādurasamanuññabhojanādiāhārasampattiyā sukhaparihato. Atha vā daḷhabhattikadhātijanādiparijanasampattiyā ceva paricchedasampattiyā ca uḷārapaṇītasukhapaccayūpahārehi ca sukhedhito, akiccheneva dukkhapaccayavinodanena sukhaparihato. Ajjhattikaṅgasampattiyā vā sukhedhito, bāhiraṅgasampattiyā sukhaparihato.
“些许”这个词的解释是“哪怕极少的一点点”。当“知道”这个词并不表示觉知的意思时,在它的用法中——比如“知道酥、知道蜜”这类说法——语法学者认为属格在这里表达工具义,所以说“不以任何苦而觉受”。因此说“工具义用属格,而‘知道’用于觉受义”。这里“不以任何苦而觉受”应当理解为:不以任何作为工具的苦去经历所缘对象。因为在“些许”这个词里,工具义的属格也被省略了。正因如此,后面会说“在两种解释中,前词与后词相同格省略”。然而,当“知道”这个词表示忆念义时,在表示忆念义的诸界词的用法中——比如“忆念母亲、忆念父亲、知道兄弟”这类说法——语法学者说属格在这里表达宾语义,所以说“或者,‘些许苦你忘记’是这个意思”。由于未曾感受任何苦,即使寻求自己曾感受过的哪怕极少的一点苦,也因它不存在的缘故而忘记,这就是意思。这里“在两种解释中”指依觉受义和忆念义所说的第二、第三种解释。“前词”指“些许”一词,“后词”指“苦”一词,“相同格省略”指与后词相同的属格省略。在应当说“任何苦”之处,在两种解释中也把前词的属格省略,而说成“些许苦”。这里“不欲者”就是不愿意者。如此则:难道我们在苏丁那等事上,以任何方法、不可补救、不可挽回,甚至以死,也非你所愿地与你分离,如此存在吗?“由何”即由何原因。“然而何”在这里显示“何”在工具义中用别格,所以说“由何原因”。巴利
Kiñcīti etassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘appamattakampi kalabhāga’’nti. Yadā jānāti-saddo bodhanattho na hoti, tadā tassa payoge ‘‘sappino jānāti, madhuno jānātī’’tiādīsu viya karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ saddatthavidū icchantīti āha ‘‘kiñci dukkhena nānubhosī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, anubhavanatthe ca jānanā’’ti. Ettha ca kiñci dukkhena nānubhosīti kenaci dukkhena karaṇabhūtena visayaṃ nānubhosīti evamattho veditabbo. ‘‘Kiñcī’’ti etthāpi hi karaṇatthe sāmivacanassa lopo kato. Teneva ca vakkhati ‘‘vikappadvayepi purimapadassa uttarapadena samānavibhattilopo daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Yadā pana jānāti-saddo saraṇattho hoti, tadā saraṇatthānaṃ dhātusaddānaṃ payoge ‘‘mātu sarati, pitu sarati, bhātu jānātī’’tiādīsu viya upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ saddasatthavidū vadantīti āha ‘‘atha vā kiñci dukkhaṃ nassarasīti attho’’ti, kassaci dukkhassa ananubhūtattā attanā anubhūtaṃ appamattakampi dukkhaṃ pariyesamānopi abhāvatoyeva nassarasīti attho . Vikappadvayepīti anubhavanasaraṇatthavasena vutte dutiyatatiyavikappadvaye. Purimapadassāti ‘‘kiñcī’’ti padassa. Uttarapadenāti ‘‘dukkhassā’’ti padena. Samānavibhattilopoti uttarapadena samānassa sāmivacanassa lopo. ‘‘Kassaci dukkhassā’’ti vattabbe vikappadvayepi purimapade sāmivacanassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘kiñci dukkhassā’’ti niddeso kato. Anicchakāti anicchantā. Evaṃ santeti nanu mayaṃ sudinna sāmādīsu kenacipi upāyena appaṭisādhanena appaṭikārena maraṇenapi tayā akāmakāpi vinā bhavissāma, evaṃ sati. Yenāti yena kāraṇena. Kiṃ panāti ettha kinti karaṇatthe paccattavacananti dassento āha ‘‘kena pana kāraṇenā’’ti.
28 28. “乾闼婆、舞者、剧者等”:这里,“乾闼婆”指唱歌的人,“舞者”指在舞台上表演的人,“剧者”指跳跃杂耍等艺人。“以诸侍奉”:这里的意思是“在四周各处,按照各自的对象而活动”,所以说“调御诸根”等。或者,“以诸侍奉”是指用安乐资具来侍奉自己,让自己得到侍奉。由于处于这种状态就是在嬉戏、游乐,所以说“嬉戏”等。因为应当受用、应当享用,五种欲乐特别称为财物,所以说“享用财物”。“施与、特施”:这里,经常性的布施叫“施”,在伍波萨他日等日子应当布施的额外布施叫“特施”。或者,为了守护传统而布施的叫“施”,自己首先设立之后而布施的叫“特施”。或者,众人共同享有、不是极其丰厚的布施叫“施”,不与他人共有、极其丰厚的布施叫“特施”。用“等”字包含持戒等。没有所谓言语问答的交谈,所以是“无交谈”。巴利
28.Gandhabbanaṭanāṭakādīnīti ettha gandhabbā nāma gāyanakā, naṭā nāma raṅganaṭā, nāṭakā laṅghanakādayo. Paricārehīti ettha parito tattha tattha yathāsakaṃ visayesu cārehīti atthoti āha ‘‘indriyāni cārehī’’tiādi. Paricārehīti vā sukhūpakaraṇehi attānaṃ paricārehi attano paricaraṇaṃ kārehi. Tathābhūto ca yasmā laḷanto kīḷanto nāma hoti, tasmā ‘‘laḷā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhuñjitabbato paribhuñjitabbato visesato pañca kāmaguṇā bhogā nāmāti āha ‘‘bhoge bhuñjanto’’ti. Dānappadānānīti ettha niccadānaṃ dānaṃ nāma, uposathadivasādīsu dātabbaṃ atirekadānaṃ padānaṃ nāma. Paveṇīrakkhaṇavasena vā dīyamānaṃ dānaṃ nāma, attanāva paṭṭhapetvā dīyamānaṃ padānaṃ nāma. Pacurajanasādhāraṇaṃ vā nātiuḷāraṃ dānaṃ nāma, anaññasādhāraṇaṃ atiuḷāraṃ padānaṃ nāma. Ādi-saddena sīlādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Natthi etassa vacanappaṭivacanasaṅkhāto ālāpasallāpoti nirālāpasallāpo.
30 把“执取力量”这句话里说的执取力量,就是指产生身体的力量,所以注释里说“产生身体的力量”。“泪面”是指脸上有泪水,也就是泪流满面,意思是脸被泪水打湿。村庄本身就是属于村庄范围的住处,因为它包含在村庄里,所以叫“村庄范围的住处”。“以拒绝额外所得”是指:拒绝了“依靠团食”这种比丘食物所得之外的额外所得,也就是僧团食等额外所得,拒绝这些的意思。因此说“拒绝了十四种食”。僧团食、指定食、邀请食、筹食、半月食、伍波萨他食、月朔食、来客食、去客食、病者食、病者侍者食、寺院食、常设食、轮值食,这就是十四种食。其中,应当施给全体僧团的食物是僧团食。指定几位比丘而施的食物是指定食。在半个月中的某一天应当施的食物是半月食。在伍波萨他日应当施的食物是伍波萨他食。在月朔日应当施的食物是月朔食。为了寺院而施的食物是寺院食。放在固定人家里应当施的食物是常设食。由村民等轮流施与的食物是轮值食。巴利
30.Balaṃ gāhetvāti ettha balaggahaṇaṃ nāma kāyabalassa uppādanamevāti āha ‘‘kāyabalaṃ janetvā’’ti. Assumukhanti assūni mukhe etassāti assumukho, taṃ assumukhaṃ, assukilinnamukhanti attho. Gāmoyeva gāmantasenāsanaṃ gāmapariyāpannattā gāmantasenāsanassa. Atirekalābhapaṭikkhepenāti ‘‘piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāyā’’ti (mahāva. 128) evaṃ vuttabhikkhāhāralābhato adhikalābho saṅghabhattādiatirekalābho, tassa paṭikkhepenāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘cuddasabhattāni paṭikkhipitvā’’ti. Saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ nimantanabhattaṃ salākabhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ uposathikaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ āgantukabhattaṃ gamikabhattaṃ gilānabhattaṃ gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṃ vihārabhattaṃ dhurabhattaṃ vārabhattanti imāni cuddasa bhattāni. Tattha sakalassa saṅghassa dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ saṅghabhattaṃ. Katipaye bhikkhū uddisitvā dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ. Ekasmiṃ pakkhe ekadivasaṃ dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ. Uposathe dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ uposathikaṃ. Pāṭipadadivase dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ. Vihāraṃ uddissa dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ vihārabhattaṃ. Dhurageheyeva ṭhapetvā dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ dhurabhattaṃ. Gāmavāsīādīhi vārena dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ vārabhattaṃ.
那么,为什么说“拒绝了居士衣”呢?因为如果曾经接受过,拒绝才说得通;可是在最初成道时,并没有允许接受居士衣,后来在吉瓦咖的故事里才允许。正因如此,后面在吉瓦咖的故事中会说:“从世尊成佛开始,直到这件衣为止,在这中间二十年里,没有人接受过居士衣,所有人都是粪扫衣者。”而苏丁那正是在最初成道时就出家了。正因如此,后面会说:“苏丁那在世尊成佛第十二年出家,第二十年时进入亲族家乞食,那时他出家已经八年。”所以,为什么说“拒绝了居士衣”呢?回答说:即使当时还没有允许居士衣,但依受持粪扫衣支来说,也就叫作拒绝了居士衣,因此说“拒绝了居士衣”。巴利
Atha ‘‘gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipitvā’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ. Gahaṇe hi sati paṭikkhepo yujjeyya, na ca paṭhamabodhiyaṃ gahapaticīvarassa paṭiggahaṇaṃ anuññātaṃ parato jīvakavatthusmiṃ anuññātattā. Teneva vakkhati jīvakavatthusmiṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 337) ‘‘bhagavato hi buddhabhāvappattito paṭṭhāya yāva idaṃ vatthaṃ, etthantare vīsati vassāni na koci gahapaticīvaraṃ sādiyi, sabbe paṃsukūlikāva ahesu’’nti. Sudinno ca paṭhamabodhiyaṃyeva pabbajito. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘sudinno hi bhagavato dvādasame vasse pabbajito, vīsatime vasse ñātikulaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho, sayaṃ pabbajjāya aṭṭhavassiko hutvā’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipitvā’’ti kasmā vuttanti? Vuccate – ananuññātepi gahapaticīvare paṃsukūlikaṅgasamādānavasena gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhittaṃ nāma hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipitvā’’ti.
拒绝贪行:因为以猛烈抢夺善法财物的含义,贪称为渴爱;依贪而行,就是贪行,也就是依着渴爱越过一家一家次第去乞食;拒绝这种行为,就是这句话的意思。因此说“挨家挨户次第入村乞食”。这里还应知道,依阿兰若支等头陀支的摄持,其余头陀支也都已经包含在内了。跋耆人:这是针对国王而用的属格形式,意思是跋耆诸王。由于“地方”一词也用于指住在那里的居民,所以“于跋耆人中”是依地方而用的位格,意思是在名为跋耆的地方。巴利
Loluppacāraṃ paṭikkhipitvāti kusalabhaṇḍassa bhusaṃ vilumpanaṭṭhena loluppaṃ vuccati taṇhā, loluppena caraṇaṃ loluppacāro, taṇhāvasena gharapaṭipāṭiṃ atikkamitvā bhikkhāya caraṇaṃ, taṃ paṭikkhipitvāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘gharapaṭipāṭiyā bhikkhāya pavisatī’’ti. Ettha ca āraññikaṅgādipadhānaṅgavasena sesadhutaṅgānipi gahitāneva hontīti veditabbaṃ. Vajjīnanti rājāno apekkhitvā sāmivacanaṃ kataṃ, vajjīrājūnanti attho. Janapada-saddassa taṃnivāsīsupi pavattanato ‘‘vajjīsū’’ti janapadāpekkhaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, vajjināmake janapadeti attho.
所谓受用和受用资具都很广大,是指五种欲乐所包括的受用,以及象、马、车、女人等受用资具的广大。这里说的资具,其实就是受用资具。所以经文说:他们的受用和受用资具都广大。也有人这样说:受用是象、马、车、女人等,受用资具则是这些人的金器等器具。坚实,就是像坚实之物那样。储藏,就是收藏起来,也就是做成储备的意思。以每天消耗所摄财物的广大,是指每天每天应当受用的财物广大。以金、银的丰足,是指按块状的金银,以及按金钱、银钱等而说的金、银的丰足。财富,就是满足、喜悦;财富的资具就是财富资具,具足丰足种种庄严之物的财富资具,这些人就是具足丰足财富资具。因此经文说:庄严之物的……等。以交易来说,是指以经商、以放贷等来说。以财谷的丰足,即七宝所摄之财,及包含一切初熟、后熟谷物的丰足。其中,他们说:金、银、宝珠、珍珠、琉璃、金刚石、珊瑚为七宝。稻、麦等为初熟,以谷物果实等为先,反之,绿豆、豆类等为后熟,应当如此理解。最上常乞食者支,是指具足由其余头陀支所围绕的最上常乞食头陀支。因此经文说:想要行次第乞食。巴利
Upabhogaparibhogūpakaraṇamahantatāyāti pañcakāmaguṇasaṅkhātānaṃ upabhogānañceva hatthiassarathaitthiyādiupabhogūpakaraṇānañca mahantatāya. Upabhogūpakaraṇāneva hi idha paribhogūpakaraṇasaddena vuttāni. Tenevāha ‘‘ye hi tesaṃ upabhogā, yāni ca upabhogūpakaraṇāni, tāni mahantānī’’ti. ‘‘Upabhogā hatthiassarathaitthīādayo, upabhogūpakaraṇāni tesameva suvaṇṇādiupakaraṇānī’’tipi vadanti. Sārakānīti sārabhūtāni. Nidhetvāti nidahitvā, nidhānaṃ katvāti attho. Divasaparibbayasaṅkhātabhogamahantatāyāti divase divase paribhuñjitabbasaṅkhātabhogānaṃ mahantatāya. Jātarūparajatasseva pahūtatāyāti piṇḍapiṇḍavasena ceva suvaṇṇamāsakarajatamāsakādivasena ca jātarūparajatasseva pahūtatāya. Vittīti tuṭṭhi, vittiyā upakaraṇaṃ vittūpakaraṇaṃ, pahūtaṃ nānāvidhālaṅkārabhūtaṃ vittūpakaraṇametesanti pahūtavittūpakaraṇā. Tenāha ‘‘alaṅkārabhūtassā’’tiādi. Vohāravasenāti vaṇijjāvasena vaḍḍhikatādivasena. Dhanadhaññassa pahūtatāyāti sattaratanasaṅkhātassa dhanassa sabbapubbaṇṇāparaṇṇasaṅgahitassa dhaññassa ca pahūtatāyāti attho. Tattha ‘‘suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimuttāveḷuriyavajirapavāḷāni satta ratanānī’’ti vadanti. Sālivīhiādi pubbaṇṇaṃ purakkhataṃ sassaphalanti katvā, tabbipariyāyato muggamāsādi aparaṇṇanti veditabbaṃ. Ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātikattāti sesadhutaṅgaparivāritena ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātadhutaṅgena samannāgatattā. Tenāha ‘‘sapadānacāraṃ caritukāmo’’ti.
31 31. 或者,因为生在家里而像亲属,所以叫亲属女仆。又或者,只以腐坏这一点作为可识别的过失,就叫隔夜食;或者已经过了夜、到了凌晨时分才拿到,也就是已经超过时限,所以叫隔夜食。因此说“已过一夜者”等等。因为已经腐坏,所以不适合受用,就是不堪受用者。即使已经确定是要丢弃的东西,在询问的时候,仍然可以按照世俗中带有疑惑的说法来问,所以说“假如”。以圣者的说法,就是依照圣者惯用的表达方式。因为圣者们称呼女人为“姊妹”。已舍断的执取物,就是已经放弃执著的东西。巴利
31. Antojātatāya vā ñātisadisī dāsīti ñātidāsī. Pūtibhāveneva lakkhitabbadoso vā ābhidosiko, abhidosaṃ vā paccūsakālaṃ gato patto atikkantoti ābhidosiko. Tenāha ‘‘ekarattātikkantassa vā’’tiādi. Pūtibhūtabhāvena paribhogaṃ nārahatīti aparibhogāraho. Chaḍḍanīyasabhāve nicchitepi pucchākāle sandehavohāravaseneva pucchituṃ yuttanti āha ‘‘sace’’ti. Ariyavohārenāti ariyasamudācārena. Ariyā hi mātugāmaṃ bhaginivādena samudācaranti. Nissaṭṭhapariggahanti pariccattālayaṃ.
因为前面说“Ākirā”,所以这里说“或者属于表”;又因为没有放弃“如果那是应当丢弃的法”这个同义说法,所以说“或者属于已发之语”;和因缘相关的话语,就是已发之语。说“可以讲述”,是从无所牵挂的状态来说的;但在这里,特别是因为物品已经不堪受用才这样说。最上的圣传承者,就是在圆满圣传承修行的人当中最上、最高的人。被标记、被认知,就是相;按照所辨识的样貌,所以说“在家时曾经辨识过的样貌”。她看着手背等地方,心里想:“这些手脚背,像我家少爷苏丁那的金龟壳背一样;手指圆润,像雌黄粉条;声音甜美。”她就这样执取、认知、辨识了在家时曾经辨识过的样貌。那为什么那位亲属女仆一见之下却认不出来呢?所以说“因为苏丁那……”等。以已出家者,就是已经进入出家的人,也就是比丘。进入屋内,就是进入女主人应当坐的地方,也就是内室。Yagghe 的意思是“我告知”,所以说这是“表告知义的不变词”。也有人说它的意思是“Yagghe jāneyyāsi,也就是好好知道”。在称呼中,就是对女仆的称呼。因此说“如此……”等。巴利
‘‘Ākirā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘viññatti vā’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘sace taṃ chaḍḍanīyadhamma’’nti pariyāyaṃ amuñcitvā vuttattā ‘‘payuttavācā vā’’ti vuttaṃ, paccayapaṭisaṃyuttā vācā payuttavācā. Vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti nirapekkhabhāvato vuttaṃ , idha pana visesato aparibhogārahattāva vatthuno. Aggaariyavaṃsikoti ariyavaṃsapaṭipattipūrakānaṃ aggo uttamo. Nimīyati saññāyatīti nimittaṃ, yathāsallakkhito ākāroti āha ‘‘gihikāle sallakkhitapubbaṃ ākāra’’nti. Hatthapiṭṭhiādīni olokayamānā ‘‘sāmiputtassa me sudinnassa viya suvaṇṇakacchapapiṭṭhisadisā imā hatthapādapiṭṭhiyo, haritālavaṭṭiyo viya suvaṭṭitā aṅguliyo, madhuro saro’’ti gihikāle sallakkhitapubbaṃ ākāraṃ aggahesi sañjāni sallakkhesi. Kasmā pana sā ñātidāsī disvāva na sañjānīti āha ‘‘sudinno hī’’tiādi. Pabbajjupagatenāti pabbajjaṃ upagatena, pabbajitenāti attho. Gharaṃ pavisitvāti gehasāminiyā nisīditabbaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ antogehaṃ pavisitvā. Yaggheti imassa ārocayāmīti ayamatthoti āha ‘‘ārocanatthe nipāto’’ti. ‘‘Yagghe jāneyyāsīti suṭṭhu jāneyyāsī’’tipi atthaṃ vadanti. Ālapaneti dāsijanassa ālapane. Tenāha ‘‘evañhī’’tiādi.
32 32. 家中有厅堂,是说在家的某一侧有吃饭的厅堂,四周有围墙环绕,门窗安置妥当,沙地庭院打扫干净。水和粥,就是水和酸粥。那么,为什么偏偏在这样一处厅堂里说“某个墙根”呢?这个意思已经说过了,所以接着说“因为出家者……”等等。在不合适的地方,就是对比丘来说不适宜的地方。“Atthi nu kho”里,nu 这个词表示疑问,kho 这个词是为了让语句顺畅才用的。或者 nukho 是一个表示疑问的固定词组。由此显示 nāma 这个词有疑问的用法。“Yesaṃ no tvaṃ”就是“你是我们谁的儿子”。在这样的地方,他虽然知道那地方对比丘来说并无不妥,但还是想:“像我这样大富人家出身的孩子,坐在别人家的客堂里吃饭,实在不成体统。”所以他说:“亲爱的苏丁那,回自己家去,难道不好吗?”又以另一种方式显示 nāma 这个词只有疑问的用法,所以说“同样,有没有,诸位……”等等。“同样”是表示总括的意思。现在为了显示 nāma 这个词有思量的用法,所以说“同样,我想是有的……”等等。巴利
32.Gharesu sālā hontīti gharesu ekamante bhojanasālā honti pākāraparikkhittā susaṃvihitadvārabandhā susammaṭṭhavālikaṅgaṇā. Udakakañjiyanti udakañca kañjiyañca. Kasmā pana īdisāyameva sālāya aññataraṃ kuṭṭamūlanti ayamattho vuttoti āha ‘‘na hi pabbajitā’’tiādi. Asāruppe ṭhāneti bhikkhūnaṃ ananucchavike padese. Atthi nu khoti nu-saddo pucchanatthe, kho-saddo vacanasiliṭṭhatāya vutto. Nukhoti vā nipātasamudāyo pucchanattho. Tena nāma-saddassa pucchanatthataṃ dasseti. Yesaṃ no tvanti yesaṃ no putto tvaṃ. Īdise ṭhāneti kiñcāpi taṃ ṭhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ananurūpaṃ na hoti, tathāpi mādisānaṃ mahābhogakulānaṃ puttassa parakule āsanasālāyaṃ nisīditvā bhojanaṃ nāma ayuttarūpanti maññamāno āha. Tenevāha ‘‘nanu nāma, tāta sudinna, sakaṃ gehaṃ gantabba’’nti. Aññenapi pakārena nāmasaddassa pucchanatthatameva dassento āha ‘‘tathā atthi nu kho tātā’’tiādi. Tathāti samuccayattho. Idāni nāmasaddassa maññanatthataṃ dassento āha ‘‘tathā atthi maññe’’tiādi.
被苦所逼恼,是指被心理上的苦压迫。这里说的意思,就是像“亲爱的苏丁那,我们家里有没有财富”等话所表达的那样。依不信受和不能忍耐的含义,这里的anokappana是不信受,amarisana是不能忍耐。“未来说的话”虽然用了未来时的说法,但意思其实是现在时。因此说“现前也”。不能忍耐,就是无法承受。说那是不好的,是针对“tadāya”这个读法说的。够了,居士,我今天已经吃过饭了——长老因为坚持最严格的一坐食而拒绝,这样说。所谓“因为坚持最严格的一坐食”,这是按事实陈述的方式说的,为的是说明长老有那样的状态。因为即使是柔和的一坐食者,只要以任何坐姿吃了哪怕一点点食物,以戒律的名义从那里起来后,也不能再吃。因此帝毕塔咖秋喇阿跋亚长老说:“应守护座,或守护食。”即使是最上的常乞食者,此处也仅是举其一例,长老在次第乞食者中也是最上的。因为最上的次第乞食者,即使有人从前面或后面拿来食物,也不接受,只是站在家门口放下钵而已,所以长老因为是最上的次第乞食者,也不接受明天的施食。那么,为什么说“接受了”呢?他说“即使是一食我也不接受”等。因为智者不会忽视对父母、老师、戒师的应作资助,而成为头陀支清净者。巴利
Dukkhābhitunnatāyāti mānasikena dukkhena abhipīḷitattā. Etamatthanti ‘‘atthi nu kho, tāta sudinna, amhākaṃ dhana’’ntiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ. Anokappanāmarisanatthavasenāti ettha anokappanaṃ asaddahanaṃ. Amarisanaṃ asahanaṃ. Anāgatavacanaṃ anāgatasaddappayogo, attho pana vattamānakālikova. Tenāha ‘‘paccakkhampī’’ti. Na marisayāmīti na visahāmi. Taṃ na sundaranti ‘‘tadāya’’nti pāṭhaṃ sandhāyāha. Alaṃ, gahapati, kataṃ me ajja bhattakiccanti thero ukkaṭṭhaekāsanikatāya paṭikkhipanto evamāha. Ukkaṭṭhaekāsanikatāyāti ca idaṃ bhūtakathanavasena vuttaṃ therassa tathābhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Mudukassapi hi ekāsanikassa yāya nisajjāya kiñcimattampi bhojanaṃ bhuttaṃ, vattasīsenapi tato vuṭṭhitassa puna bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati. Tenāha tipiṭakacūḷābhayatthero ‘‘āsanaṃ vā rakkheyya bhojanaṃ vā’’ti. Ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātikopi samānoti nidassanamattamidaṃ, thero sapadānacārikesupi ukkaṭṭhoyeva. Ukkaṭṭhasapadānacārikopi hi purato ca pacchato ca āhaṭabhikkhampi aggahetvāva gharadvāre ṭhatvā pattavissajjanameva karoti, tasmā thero ukkaṭṭhasapadānacārikattāpi svātanāya bhikkhaṃ nādhivāseti. Atha kasmā ‘‘adhivāsesī’’ti āha ‘‘sace ekabhattampi na gahessāmī’’tiādi. Paṇḍitā hi mātāpitūnaṃ ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ vā kātabbaṃ anuggahaṃ ajjhupekkhitvā dhutaṅgavisuddhikā na bhavanti.
33 33.“中等尺寸”是指身高四肘的人,就是中等尺寸。也有人说“六肘”。人们用它来遮挡,所以叫“遮挡物”——这个“tirokaraṇī”一词指的是布幔、围墙之类,因此说“tirokaraṇiyanti,是在作格的意义上用作处格”。本来应该说“tirokaraṇiyā”,却说成“tirokaraṇiya”,这是把作格的意义用处格来说了。又或者,为了说明“tirokaraṇīya”这个词就是布幔、围墙的同义词,所以说了“或者”等话。把它围起来,就是从四周把它抛掷、环绕绑起来,这就是所说的意思。因此说“从四周而作”。有些词虽然看起来像有语尾变化,实际上是不变词,所以说“tena 这个也是或者”等话。巴利
33.Majjhimappamāṇoti catuhattho puriso majjhimappamāṇo. ‘‘Chahattho’’tipi keci. Tiro karonti etāyāti tirokaraṇīti sāṇipākāravacano ayaṃ tirokaraṇī-saddoti āha ‘‘tirokaraṇiyanti karaṇatthe bhumma’’nti. ‘‘Tirokaraṇiyā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘tirokaraṇiya’’nti karaṇatthe bhummaṃ vuttaṃ. Tirokaraṇīya-saddo vā ayaṃ sāṇipākārapariyāyoti dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Taṃ parikkhipitvāti taṃ samantato khipitvā, parito bandhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘samantato katvā’’ti. Vibhattipatirūpakopi nipāto hotīti āha ‘‘tenāti ayampi vā’’tiādi.
34 那时,具寿苏丁那的父亲在自己家里,让人准备好各种美味的嚼食和啖食,然后通知具寿苏丁那到时候了:“到时候了,亲爱的苏丁那,饭食已经准备好了。”因为巴利圣典里没有收录这种通知时辰的内容,所以说“虽然在圣典中没有提到通知时辰”。所谓“在通知的时候”,就是指在通知“到时候了,亲爱的苏丁那,饭食已经准备好了”的时候。“两堆”,是指一堆铜币和一堆黄金。巴利
34. ‘‘Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa pitā sake nivesane paṇītaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ paṭiyādāpetvā āyasmato sudinnassa kālaṃ ārocesi – ‘kālo, tāta sudinna, niṭṭhitaṃ bhatta’nti’’ evaṃ kālārocanassa pāḷiyaṃ anāruḷhattā āha – ‘‘kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ kālārocanaṃ na vutta’’nti. Ārociteyeva kāleti ‘‘kālo, tāta sudinna, niṭṭhitaṃ bhatta’’nti kāle ārociteyeva. Dve puñjeti kahāpaṇapuñjañca suvaṇṇapuñjañca.
“Pettika”是指从父亲那里得来的、属于父亲的。“Nihita”是指埋在地下的。“Payutta”是指通过增值来使用的。应当知道,这里是省略了派生词缀的说法;就像别处所说的“得到祖父的财富后,桑迦亚快乐地生活”那样,应当看作省略了派生词缀的说法。从祖父那里得来、或者属于祖父的,就叫“petāmaha”(祖父的)。“Pabbajitaliṅga”(出家相)是指沙门装束。“Na rājabhīto”(不因国王而恐惧)是指没有犯罪,所以不害怕王族。那些财产被人拿走的人,就是“iṇāyika”(欠债者)。“Palibuddho”(被障碍的)是指被压迫、被困扰。巴利
Pettikanti pitito āgataṃ pettikaṃ. Nihitanti bhūmigataṃ. Payuttanti vaḍḍhivasena payojitaṃ. Taddhitalopaṃ katvā veditabbanti yathā aññatthāpi ‘‘pitāmahaṃ dhanaṃ laddhā, sukhaṃ jīvati sañjayo’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ taddhitalopaṃ katvā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pitāmahato āgataṃ, pitāmahassa vā idaṃ petāmahaṃ. Pabbajitaliṅganti samaṇavesaṃ. Na rājabhītoti aparādhakāraṇā na rājakulā bhīto. Yesaṃ santakaṃ dhanaṃ gahitaṃ, te iṇāyikā. Palibuddho pīḷito.
“Vibhattipatirūpaka”(像分别的)是针对“tena”这个词说的。“Taṃnidāna”是说那笔财产是它的因、它的缘由,所以叫“以此为因”。“Assa”是主格,或者指那个词。“Bhaya”(恐惧)指的是心以惊恐的状态生起的恐惧,不是指智上的恐惧,也不是指“因它而恐惧”那样说的所缘恐惧,所以说“意思是心的惊恐”。“Chambhitatta”(战栗)就是由那心的惊恐恐惧而导致全身战栗的状态。特别是心脏肌肉的颤动,所以说“身体颤抖、心脏肌肉颤动”。“Lomahaṃsa”(身毛竖立)就是因那恐惧、那战栗而导致全身毛发竖立的状态,而那是指毛发像墙上的钉子一样朝上竖立,所以说“毛发的竖立、向上竖立的状态”。巴利
Vibhattipatirūpakoti ‘‘tenā’’ti padaṃ sandhāyāha. Taṃnidānanti taṃ dhanaṃ nidānaṃ kāraṇamassāti taṃnidānaṃ. Assāti paccattavacanassa, padassa vā. Bhayanti cittassa utrastākārena pavattabhayaṃ adhippetaṃ, na ñāṇabhayaṃ, nāpi ‘‘bhāyati etasmā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ ārammaṇabhayanti āha ‘‘cittutrāsoti attho’’ti. Chambhitattanti teneva cittutrāsabhayena sakalasarīrassa chambhitabhāvo. Visesato pana hadayamaṃsacalananti āha ‘‘kāyakampo hadayamaṃsacalana’’nti. Lomahaṃsoti tena bhayena tena chambhitattena sakalasarīralomānaṃ haṭṭhabhāvo, so pana nesaṃ bhittiyaṃ nāgadantānaṃ viya uddhaṃmukhatāti āha ‘‘lomānaṃ haṃsanaṃ uddhaggabhāvo’’ti.
35 “Attanā”是表示行为主体的工具格,意思是“自己”。“Devaccharānaṃ”(天女)指的是非跳舞者。“Devanāṭakānaṃ”(天舞者)就是舞女,或者这也是天女的另一种说法。“生起了强烈的忧悲之后”:这世间的人习惯只想着自己,所以她也只想着自己:“如今我成了无依无靠的人。”她心里想着“他今天会来,今天会来”,就这样八年没有出门。因为这件事,她连孩子也没能得到——本来可以依靠他的威德活下去,如今却失去了他,从别处也得不到,因此生起了强烈的忧悲。在建立家族传承这件事上,能延续家族血脉的儿子被比作种子,所以说“一个作为家族传承种子的儿子”。“Saṃ”就是财富,拥有它的人叫“saṃpati”,也就是富有、具足资财的人。因为它能带来现世和来世的利益,所以它是他的利益,也就是“sāpateyya”(财产),也就是财富、资财,因此说:“这份财产,我们如此巨大的资财。”巴利
35.Attanāti paccatte karaṇavacanaṃ, sayanti attho. Devaccharānanti anaccantiyo sandhāyāha. Devanāṭakānanti naccantiyo, pariyāyavacanaṃ vā etaṃ devakaññānaṃ. Samuppannabalavasokā hutvāti ayaṃ loko nāma attānaṃva cinteti, tasmā sāpi ‘‘idāni ahaṃ anāthā jātā’’ti attānaṃva cintayamānā ‘‘ayaṃ ajja āgamissati, ajja āgamissatī’’ti aṭṭha vassāni bahi na nikkhantā etaṃ nissāya mayā dārakopi na laddho, yassa ānubhāvena jīveyyāmi, ito cāmhi parihīnā aññato cāti samuppannabalavasokā hutvā. Kularukkhapatiṭṭhāpane bījasadisattā kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpako putto idha bījakoti adhippetoti āha ‘‘kulavaṃsabījakaṃekaṃ putta’’nti. Saṃ nāma dhanaṃ, tassa patīti saṃpati, dhanavā vibhavasampanno. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikahitāvahattā tassa hitanti sāpateyyaṃ, tadeva dhanaṃ vibhavoti āha – ‘‘imaṃ sāpateyyaṃ evaṃ mahantaṃ amhākaṃ vibhava’’nti.
36 女人从进入少女阶段开始,直到晚年之前,如果没有阻塞,每隔八周,在称为子宫的第三处转折中,会有少量血滴凝结起来,还没被取着就破裂了,然后血液流出来。对此有“经期”和“花”两种通称,所以说“花是经期所生之血的名称”。在胚胎着床之处:就是孩子投生的那个地方、那个部位。凝结起来之后:就是产生之后。破裂:还没被取着就破裂了,因为这正是她们的生理特性。由病素:指由于血液的污秽。在清净的基处:因为血液已经流出、已经没有病,从沐浴后的第四天起,在清净的子宫中。而在清净的基处,当父母一次交会时,最多七天,仅仅是田地而已,因为存在着胚胎凝结所需的微量血液涂层。不过有些人说:“乃至半个月也仅仅是田地。”在手臂上:这是处格,所以说“在前妻的手臂上,就在那里抓住他”。用作受格的处格也说得通,比如“抓住苏丁那的双足”。巴利
36. Itthīnaṃ kumārībhāvappattito paṭṭhāya pacchimavayato oraṃ asati vibandhe aṭṭhame aṭṭhame sattāhe gabbhāsayasaññite tatiye āvatte katipayā lohitapīḷakā saṇṭhahitvā aggahitapubbā eva bhijjanti, tato lohitaṃ paggharati, tattha utusamaññā pupphasamaññā cāti āha – ‘‘pupphanti utukāle uppannalohitassa nāma’’nti. Gabbhapatiṭṭhānaṭṭhāneti yasmiṃ okāse dārako nibbattati, tasmiṃ padese. Saṇṭhahitvāti nibbattitvā. Bhijjantīti aggahitapubbā eva bhijjanti. Ayañhi tāsaṃ sabhāvo. Dosenāti lohitamalena. Suddhe vatthumhīti paggharitalohitattā anāmayattā ca nahānato paraṃ catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya suddhe gabbhāsaye. Suddhe pana vatthumhi mātāpitūsu ekavāraṃ sannipatitesu yāva satta divasāni khettameva hoti gabbhasaṇṭhahanassa parittassa lohitalepassa vijjamānattā. Keci pana ‘‘aḍḍhamāsamattampi khettamevā’’ti vadanti. Bāhāyanti adhikaraṇe bhummanti āha ‘‘purāṇadutiyikāya yā bāhā, tatra naṃ gahetvā’’ti. Upayogatthe bhummavacanampi yujjatiyeva yathā ‘‘sudinnassa pādesu gahetvā’’ti.
即使在之前已经制定学处的情况下,由于这些学处本身是真实存在的,所以“在学处尚未制定时”这句话是针对巴拉基格罪而说的,因此说“在第一巴拉基格学处尚未制定时”。为了阐明已经说过的含义,又说“据说世尊在初成道时”等等。“如是”是指与巴拉基格的制定相应。这只是一个举例,他们也没有犯下与桑喀地谢思制定相应的不当行为。因此说“其余的五种小罪,他只是制定”。这是就土喇咤亚等五种轻罪本身的存在而言,并不是说五种罪全部都已制定。应当知道,在初成道时,五种轻罪存在这一说法,正是法将舍利弗请求制定学处、特别是请求制定重罪并诵出巴帝摩卡的原因。然而有些人说:“在第十二年于毘兰阇雨安居之后,世尊从此以后在八年内所制定的学处,就是针对‘在种种事缘中,只是制定了其余五种小罪’这句话而说的。”这种说法不妥,因为在此之前也有学处的制定存在。正因如此,在毘兰阇品中才有“纵使一位比丘,也没有造成隔夜中断,或‘我们将在后安居时于此入雨安居’的雨安居中断”以及“自己煮食,既不符合沙门的身份,也不被允许”这样的说法。“令欢喜”就是他们摄受了心,满足了意愿,实践了能抓住内心的修行,这就是其含义。“一时”就是在某一个时候,意思是初成道时。巴利
Pubbepi paññattasikkhāpadānaṃ sabbhāvato apaññatte sikkhāpadeti pārājikaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha – ‘‘paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpade aṭṭhapite’’ti. Vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento āha – ‘‘bhagavato kira paṭhamabodhiya’’ntiādi. Evarūpanti pārājikapaññattiyā anurūpaṃ. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ, saṅghādisesapaññattiyā anurūpampi ajjhācāraṃ nākaṃsuyeva. Tenevāha – ‘‘avasese pañca khuddakāpattikkhandhe eva paññapesī’’ti. Idañca thullaccayādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ lahukāpattikkhandhānaṃ sabbhāvamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pañcāpattikkhandhānaṃ anavasesato paññattattāva. Paṭhamabodhiyaṃ pañcannaṃ lahukāpattīnaṃ sabbhāvavacaneneva dhammasenāpatissa sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanā visesato garukāpattipaññattiyā pātimokkhuddesassa ca hetubhūtāti daṭṭhabbā. Keci pana ‘‘tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pana vatthusmiṃ avasesapañcakhuddakāpattikkhandhe eva paññapesīti idaṃ dvādasame vasse verañjāyaṃ vutthavassena bhagavatā tato paṭṭhāya aṭṭhavassabbhantare paññattasikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ tato pubbepi sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sabbhāvato. Teneva verañjakaṇḍe ‘‘ekabhikkhunāpi ratticchedo vā pacchimikāya tattha vassaṃ upagacchāmāti vassacchedo vā na kato’’ti ca ‘‘sāmampi pacanaṃ samaṇasāruppaṃ na hoti, na ca vaṭṭatī’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Ārādhayiṃsūti cittaṃ gaṇhiṃsu, ajjhāsayaṃ pūrayiṃsu, hadayagāhiniṃ paṭipattiṃ paṭipajjiṃsūti attho. Ekaṃ samayanti ekasmiṃ samaye, paṭhamabodhiyanti attho.
“Yaṃ ādīnavan”和下文是关联的。“制定学处”指制定第一条巴拉基格学处。“将显示过患”意思是,他将通过“愚人,宁可把你的男根塞进剧毒蝮蛇的口中,也绝不能把男根塞进女人的女根”等话,来显示过患。“Abhiviññāpesi”在这里的意思是“使生起”,为了说明这个意思是怎么来的,就说了“因为即使生起……”等话。“以身表而动”指以身表的方式生起动摇。那么,他明明对淫欲法没有欲求,为什么还三次使之生起呢?为了回答这个,就说了“而这三次令生起……”等话。其中,“三次令生起”是指在三次机会中,为了达到释放的目的而使淫欲法生起。巴利
Yaṃ ādīnavanti sambandho. Sikkhāpadaṃ paññapentoti paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadaṃ paññapento. Ādīnavaṃ dassessatīti ‘‘varaṃ te, moghapurisa, āsīvisassa ghoravisassa mukhe aṅgajātaṃ pakkhittaṃ, na tveva mātugāmassa aṅgajāte aṅgajātaṃ pakkhitta’’ntiādinā yaṃ ādīnavaṃ dassessati. Abhiviññāpesīti imassa ‘‘pavattesī’’ti ayamattho kathaṃ laddhoti āha ‘‘pavattanāpi hī’’tiādi. Kāyaviññatticopanatoti kāyaviññattivasena pavattacalanato. Kasmā panesa methunadhammena anatthikopi samāno tikkhattuṃ abhiviññāpesīti āha – ‘‘tikkhattuṃ abhiviññāpanañcesā’’tiādi. Tattha tikkhattuṃ abhiviññāpananti muttipāpanavasena tīsu vāresu methunadhammassa pavattanaṃ.
一切词本身就带有决定的作用,所以即使没有“eva”这个词,也能知道是限定的意思,因此说“正是由于那种邪行”。因为成胎有八种原因。确实是这样说的:巴利
Sabbesampi padānaṃ avadhāraṇaphalattā vināpi evakāraṃ avadhāraṇattho viññāyatīti āha ‘‘teneva ajjhācārenā’’ti. Aṭṭha hi gabbhakāraṇāni. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“ 男女交合、执取衣布,身相触、抚摩脐处;
饮、见、闻、嗅——凡此八者,皆为受胎之因。”巴利
‘‘Methunacoḷaggahaṇaṃ, tanusaṃsaggo ca nābhiāmasanaṃ; Pānaṃ dassanasavanaṃ, ghāyanamiti gabbhahetavo aṭṭhā’’ti.
现在,为了通过限定来说明已经被排除的含义,他说:“那么,还有别的方式也能成胎吗?”等等。难道触碰肚脐不也是身触吗?为什么把它单独提出来说呢?应该这样理解:身触是就双方都有欲贪而说的,触碰肚脐则是就女人有欲贪而说的,或者也可以从事相上把它单独提出来。那么,怎样通过身触而成胎?其中又怎样有精血产生呢?为此他说“因为女人……”等。意思是:由于欲贪生起,女人身上的精分被搅动,这也成为成胎的一个条件。因为即使在女人的相续中,也确实有味等七界。因此说:“即使只是享受抚摸肢节,也会成胎。”不过在《结节疏》等书中则说:“以身触等七种方式成胎时,如果没有父精,仅仅由母亲欲贪所变异的血,就能成为成胎的条件。”他们说:“如果因为享受抚摸肢节,母亲怀上了儿子,而这个儿子后来诸根成熟,杀害了那样的人类父亲,他就是杀父者。”巴利
Idāni avadhāraṇena nivattitamatthaṃ dassetukāmo āha – ‘‘kiṃ pana aññathāpi gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Nanu ca nābhiparāmasanampi kāyasaṃsaggoyeva, kasmā naṃ visuṃ vuttanti? Ubhayesaṃ chandarāgavasena kāyasaṃsaggo vutto, itthiyā chandarāgavasena nābhiparāmasanaṃ, vatthuvasena vā taṃ visuṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kathaṃ pana kāyasaṃsaggena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti, kathañca tattha sukkasoṇitassa sambhavoti āha ‘‘itthiyo hī’’tiādi . Chandarāguppattivasena itthiyā sukkakoṭṭhāso calito hoti, sopi gabbhasaṇṭhānassa paccayo hotīti adhippāyo. Itthisantānepi hi rasādisattadhātuyo labbhantiyeva. Tenāha – ‘‘aṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanaṃ sādiyantiyopi gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī’’ti. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggādinā sattappakārena gabbhaggahaṇe pitu sukkakoṭṭhāsaṃ vinā chandarāgavasena mātu vikārappattaṃ lohitameva gabbhasaṇṭhānassa paccayo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yassa aṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanaṃ sādiyitvā mātā puttaṃ paṭilabhati, sace so aparena samayena paripuṇṇindriyo hutvā tādisaṃ pitaraṃ manussajātikaṃ jīvitā voropeti, pitughātakova hotī’’ti vadanti.
她用嘴取了那部分不净物。意思是:她在洗旧衣时,看到那里有不净物,就把那部分不净物喝了。有人问“你们行淫可以吗?”她为了表明“不管可以不可以,我们都不要那个”,就说“我们不要那个”。虽然触碰肚脐时并没有淫欲,但还是应该理解成:在触碰肚脐的那一刻,因为贪著触感,她生起了一点享受,否则就不会成胎。因为有个相信吉兆的女人触碰肚脐,曼达亚就出生了;灯光王的母亲肚脐被蝎子爬过,灯光王因此出生,所以说“依这个道理”等等。“凝视男子”,是指透过窗户等看见,或者凝视以前见过的男子。“像王宫里的女人一样”,据说在锡兰岛有个女人曾这样,所以才这么说。巴利
Taṃasuciṃ ekadesaṃ mukhena aggahesīti purāṇacīvaraṃ dhovantī tattha yaṃ asuciṃ addasa, taṃ asuciṃ ekadesaṃ pivi. ‘‘Vaṭṭati tumhākaṃ methunadhammo’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘kappatu vā mā vā kappatu, mayaṃ tena anatthikā’’ti dassento āha ‘‘anatthikā mayaṃ etenā’’ti. Kiñcāpi nābhiparāmasane methunarāgo natthi, tathāpi nābhiparāmasanakāle phassasādiyanavasena assādamattaṃ tassā ahosīti gahetabbaṃ, aññathā gabbhasaṇṭhahanaṃ na siyā. Diṭṭhamaṅgalikāya nābhiparāmasanena maṇḍabyassa nibbatti ahosi, caṇḍapajjotamātu nābhiyaṃ vicchikā pharitvā gatā, tena caṇḍapajjotassa nibbatti ahosīti āha ‘‘eteneva nayenā’’tiādi. Purisaṃ upanijjhāyatīti vātapānādinā disvā vā diṭṭhapubbaṃ vā purisaṃ upanijjhāyati. Rājorodhā viyāti sīhaḷadīpe kira ekissā itthiyā tathā ahosi, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ.
这里“此处”是指在这一点上。“她”是指苏丁那的前妻。“针对什么”是指针对哪一种邪行。说“父母聚集”是针对精而言;说“母亲正当经期”是针对血而言。其中,“聚集”是指以不合正法的方式在同一处会合、结合。“母亲正当经期”是就经期这个时段说的,并不是指世俗通称的经血附着那一天。“乾闼婆”是指将投生到那里的有情,也就是“应当前往”的意思。应当知道,这里的 ta 音变成了 dha 音。或者也可以说,由于以香为名,即通过生起趣相的显现来暗示、表明而运作,所以被称为“香”的趣向业,因此叫“乾闼婆”,也就是在那里出生的有情。“现前”是指已经来到近处。这里的意思并不是说有一个有情站在旁边看着父母和合,而是说一个被业力所驱使的有情,在那一处受生,其实在前世中就已经站在那里,以趣相等等为所缘,面向投生。巴利
Idhāti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ. Ayanti sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ ajjhācāraṃ sandhāya. Sukkaṃ sandhāya ‘‘mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā hontī’’ti vuttaṃ, mātā ca utunī hotīti lohitaṃ sandhāya. Tattha sannipatitā hontīti asaddhammavasena ekasmiṃ ṭhāne samāgatā saṅgatā honti. Mātā ca utunī hotīti idaṃ utusamayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na lokasamaññākarajassa lagganadivasamattaṃ. Gandhabboti tatrūpagasatto, gantabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Ta-kārassa dha-kāro katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā gandhanato uppajjanagatiyā nimittupaṭṭhānena sūcanato dīpanato gandhoti laddhanāmena bhavagāmikammunā abbati pavattatīti gandhabbo, tattha uppajjanakasatto. Paccupaṭṭhito hotīti upagato hoti. Ettha ca na mātāpitūnaṃ sannipātaṃ olokayamāno samīpe ṭhito nāma hoti, kammayantayantito pana eko satto tasmiṃ okāse nibbattanako purimajātiyaṃ ṭhitoyeva gatinimittādiārammaṇakaraṇavasena upapattābhimukho hotīti adhippāyo.
“和合”是指结合、聚集。“胎”是指在胎中出生的有情。因为在胎中出生的有情也被称为“胎”。正如经中所说:“阿难,就像有些女人怀胎九个月或十个月,然后分娩。”(中部3.205)不过在有些地方,“胎”指的是母胎。正如经中所说:巴利
Sannipātāti samodhānena samāgamena. Gabbhassāti gabbhe nibbattanakasattassa. Gabbhe nibbattanakasattopi hi gabbhoti vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘yathā kho panānanda, aññā itthikā nava vā dasa vā māse gabbhaṃ kucchinā pariharitvā vijāyantī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.205). Katthaci pana gabbhoti mātukucchi vutto. Yathāha –
初宿母胎第一夜,此儿便已登程去;
既已上路不复返。巴利
‘‘Yamekarattiṃ paṭhamaṃ, gabbhe vasati māṇavo; Abbhuṭṭhitova so yāti, sa gacchaṃ na nivattatī’’ti. (jā. 1.15.363); –
在这里,“胎”是指以自体生命的形式持续存在,所以叫“胎”,也就是从凝滑等阶段开始的名色相续。不过,因为有情相续依止于它,所以有情相续也被称为“胎”,就像说“床在高声喧哗”一样。由于它是所依止之处,所以母胎应当理解为“胎”。或者说,就像“胎”一样。正如众生的住处因为是居住之处而被称为“胎”,同样,对于胎生的众生来说,直到出生为止,母胎因为是居住之处,所以被称为“胎”,应当这样理解。所谓“入胎”,就是出生。巴利
Ettha ca gabbhati attabhāvabhāvena pavattatīti gabbho, kalalādiavattho dhammappabandho, taṃnissitattā pana sattasantāno ‘‘gabbho’’ti vutto yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. Taṃnissayabhāvato mātukucchi ‘‘gabbho’’ti veditabbo. Gabbho viyāti vā. Yathā hi nivāsaṭṭhānatāya sattānaṃ ovarako ‘‘gabbho’’ti vuccati, evaṃ gabbhaseyyakānaṃ sattānaṃ yāva abhijāti nivāsaṭṭhānatāya mātukucchi ‘‘gabbho’’ti vuttoti veditabbo. Avakkanti hotīti nibbatti hoti.
“守护天神”是指为了守护他而安住的天神。应当这样连接:他对这件事的越轨行为。“同样发出”是指发出那样巨大的声音。虽然在这段巴利原文里,空居天并没有单独出现,但为了说明声音传报的次第,所以把四天王天分成两类,而把空居天单独列出来。因此,这里因为单独提到了空居天,四天王天就应当理解为住在栏楯山的天神。“Itihā”是一个语词组合,应当理解为与“evaṃ”(如此)同义,所以注释说“正是如此”。“刹那、须臾”这一对词因为互为同义词,所以应当理解为意义相同。“唯有一片喧哗”是指在 天界、梵天界中唯有一片喧哗。虽然那声音确实上达梵天界,但它并不是人类的境域,就像他们的色法一样,因此比丘们才问:“朋友苏丁那,你该不会是不满吧?”巴利
Ārakkhadevatāti tassa ārakkhatthāya ṭhitā devatā. Assa taṃ ajjhācāranti sambandho. Tathā nicchāresunti tathā mahantaṃ saddaṃ katvā nicchāresuṃ. Kiñcāpi idha pāḷiyaṃ ākāsaṭṭhadevatā visuṃ na āgatā, tathāpi saddassa anussāvane ayamanukkamoti dassetuṃ cātumahārājikadevatāyo dvidhā katvā ākāsaṭṭhadevatā visuṃ vuttā. Tenettha ākāsaṭṭhakānaṃ visuṃ gahitattā cātumahārājikāti paribhaṇḍapabbataṭṭhakā veditabbā. Itihāti nipātasamudāyo evaṃsaddassa atthe daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘eva’’nti. Khaṇena muhuttenāti padadvayaṃ vevacanabhāvato samānatthamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekakolāhalamahosīti devabrahmalokesu ekakolāhalamahosi. Kiñcāpi hi so saddo yāva brahmalokā abbhuggacchi, tathāpi na so manussānaṃ visayo tesaṃ rūpaṃ viya, teneva bhikkhū pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kacci no tvaṃ, āvuso sudinna, anabhirato’’ti.
37 37. “这样一来,母子二人的出家都结出了果实,但父亲却被追悔压倒而住。”从这句话可以知道,苏丁那在那一生中并没有证得阿拉汉果。不过有些人说:“因为被过去所修福德催促的这位堪能良家子苏丁那,消除了那份追悔而证得阿拉汉果,因此出家才得到允许。”这种说法与巴利原文和注疏都不相符。因为过去所修福德并不是决定性的,即使是这样的人,也可能由于中间所造恶业的力量而障碍证悟,就像阿阇世王那样。这里所说的追悔,是以对已作未作之忧悔为特征,所以说“由犯戒所生的事后追悔”。由于对已作的犯戒之事追悔而思虑,以忧悔的方式颠倒思惟,这就是追悔,所以说“追悔也是它的名字”。卑劣所作之行即是卑作,卑作本身就是追悔,所以说“因为是卑劣行为的状态,所以是追悔”。肉血耗尽,即肉血完全耗尽。不作用,即在诵出等中无所作为,意为不参与。负重断裂,即断负,意为因负重而肩断。他种种思虑,即“如果我未造那恶业,便会如同这些比丘一样戒行圆满”等,他如此种种思虑。巴利
37.‘‘Evaṃ mātāputtānaṃ pabbajjā saphalā ahosi, pitā pana vippaṭisārābhibhūto vihāsī’’ti vacanato sudinnassa tasmiṃ attabhāve arahattādhigamo nāhosīti viññāyati. Keci pana ‘‘pubbekatapuññatāya codiyamānassa bhabbakulaputtassāti vuttattā sudinno taṃ kukkuccaṃ vinodetvā arahattaṃ sacchākāsi, teneva pabbajjā anuññātā’’ti vadanti. Taṃ pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca na sameti. Pubbekatapuññatā ca appamāṇaṃ tādisassapi antarākatapāpakammassa vasena ajātasattuno viya adhigamantarāyadassanato. Katākatānusocanalakkhaṇaṃ kukkuccaṃ idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘ajjhācārahetuko pacchānutāpo’’ti. Kataṃ ajjhācāraṃ paṭicca anusocanavasena virūpaṃ saraṇaṃ cintanaṃ vippaṭisāroti āha ‘‘vippaṭisārotipi tasseva nāma’’nti. Kucchitaṃ kataṃ kiriyāti kukataṃ, kukatameva kukkuccanti āha ‘‘kucchitakiriyābhāvato kukkucca’’nti. Pariyādinnamaṃsalohitattāti parikkhīṇamaṃsalohitattā. Avipphārikoti uddesādīsu byāpārarahito, abyāvaṭoti attho. Vahacchinnoti chinnavaho, bhāravahanena chinnakkhandhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ taṃ cintayīti ‘‘yadi ahaṃ taṃ pāpaṃ na karissaṃ, ime bhikkhū viya paripuṇṇasīlo assa’’ntiādinā taṃ taṃ cintayi.
38 “成为这样”是指达到消瘦、粗糙等状态。“以众人聚集的戏论”:在人群聚会中聚集就是众人聚集,众人聚集本身就是戏论,所以叫众人聚集的戏论,以它为因。“那些”是指那些比丘。“谈话安乐”:因为彼此信任,所以谈话时感到舒适,能轻松地交谈,意思是容易交谈。“净信的量度,从来没有对任何人过多或不足”,所以说“因为净信安立之处圆满”。“现在”这个词在此处有“如今”的意思,所以说“现在是个语助词”。“no”这个词也和“nu”一样有询问的意思,所以说“你是否”。“正是那不满”是指那些比丘所问的、正是那种期待在家生活的不满。为了显示用“正是那”这个限定所排除的含义,而说“更善的法”等。更善的法是指止、观等。“存在”是就作为所缘在心中生起而言,不是就恶行正在发生而言,意思是作为所缘在心中生起。因此说:“恒常如同现前一样立在我面前。”巴利
38.Evaṃbhūtanti kisalūkhādibhāvappattaṃ. Gaṇasaṅgaṇikāpapañcenāti gaṇe janasamāgame sannipatanaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikā, gaṇasaṅgaṇikāyeva papañco gaṇasaṅgaṇikāpapañco, tena. Yassāti ye assa. Kathāphāsukāti vissāsikabhāveneva kathākaraṇe phāsukā, sukhena vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyā, sukhasambhāsāti attho. Pasādassa pamāṇato ūnādhikattaṃ sabbadā sabbesaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘pasādapatiṭṭhānokāsassa sampuṇṇattā’’ti. Dānīti imasmiṃ atthe etarahi-saddo atthīti āha ‘‘dānīti nipāto’’ti. No-saddopi nu-saddo viya pucchanatthoti āha ‘‘kaccinu tva’’nti. Tameva anabhiratinti tehi bhikkhūhi pucchitaṃ tameva gihibhāvapatthanākāraṃ anabhiratiṃ. ‘‘Tamevā’’ti avadhāraṇena nivattitamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘adhikusalāna’’ntiādi. Adhikusalā dhammā samathavipassanādayo. Atthīti visayabhāvena citte parivattanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pāpassa vattamānataṃ sandhāya, atthi visayabhāvena citte parivattatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘niccakālaṃ abhimukhaṃ viya me tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
这里,“yaṃ tvaṃ”中的“yaṃ”是表示原因的虚词,或者表示具格、与主语同格的词,所以说“以那恶”。“以种种方式”中的“方式”一词是表示原因的词,所以说“以种种原因”。“为了离欲”就是为了在有和享乐上离染。“不是为了以贪染着”就是为了不在有和享乐上以贪染着。因此说“因为世尊”等。“这个道理在一切句中”,就是在一切句中,只以意趣而通达显示。不过这里说“这只是同义语”,是就“为了离系”等一切句中,以“为了从烦恼离系”等显示词义的方式所说的同义语而言。“不是为了系缚”就是不是为了以烦恼系缚。“为了不执取”就是为了不执取烦恼,或者为了不以渴爱、邪见执取有和享乐。“不是为了摄受”中,也应以同样的道理了知意义。巴利
Yaṃ tvanti ettha yanti hetuatthe nipāto, karaṇatthe vā paccattavacananti āha ‘‘yena pāpenā’’ti. Anekapariyāyenāti ettha pariyāya-saddo kāraṇavacanoti āha ‘‘anekakāraṇenā’’ti. Virāgatthāyāti bhavabhogesu virajjanatthāya. No rāgena rajjanatthāyāti bhavabhogesuyeva rāgena arañjanatthāya. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavatā hī’’tiādi. Esa nayo sabbapadesūti adhippāyikamattaṃ sabbapadesu atidissati. Idaṃ panettha pariyāyavacanamattanti ‘‘visaṃyogāyā’’tiādīsu sabbapadesu ‘‘kilesehi visaṃyujjanatthāyā’’tiādinā padatthavibhāvanavasena vuttapariyāyavacanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Na saṃyujjanatthāyāti kilesehi na saṃyujjanatthāya. Aggahaṇatthāyāti kilese aggahaṇatthāya, bhavabhoge vā taṇhādiṭṭhivasena aggahaṇatthāya. Na saṅgahaṇatthāyāti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
从诸行中出离、远离,并且因为超越世间,所以称为出世间涅槃——这涅槃本身就是所生起的出世间涅槃。在“为了摧破骄慢等”这一句中,应当这样理解:以表示未说尽之集合义的“vā”字,或以表示起始义的“iti”字,把“为了消除渴爱”等一切都统摄在内了。以涅槃为所缘而生起的圣道所断除的贪、慢、骄等,到达涅槃即被称为被断除,所以说“然而因为到达彼”等。其中,“到达彼”是指依止、缘于涅槃,以圣道的所缘缘状态为因。“慢骄、人骄等”中,依于出身等,对胜过自己的人产生“我胜过他”之类的慢,这慢本身因为能生起骄,所以称为骄,即慢骄。“人骄”就是人慢,是产生“我是人”的慢。有些人说:依于有能力亲近非法的慢,或者贪本身就是人骄。以“等”字统摄了力骄、青春骄等。不过在《大结节》和《中结节》中说“人骄名为生起”,这在这里看来并不恰当,因为不能说“世尊为了摧毁生起而说法”。“无骄”就是远离骄的状态。正是为了显示这个意思,才说“无骄”。“诸骄于此被摧破”是说在这里,诸骄达到无骄的状态、灭尽,所以叫“摧破骄慢”。这个道理在其余各句中也同样适用。巴利
Nibbattitalokuttaranibbānamevāti saṅkhārehi nikkhantaṃ vivittaṃ, tatoyeva lokato uttiṇṇattā lokuttaraṃ nibbānaṃ. Madanimmadanāyāti vāti ettha avuttasamuccayatthena vā-saddena ādiatthena iti-saddena vā ‘‘pipāsavinayāyā’’tiādi sabbaṃ saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānena ariyamaggena pahīyamānā rāgamānamadādayo taṃ patvā pahīyanti nāmāti āha ‘‘yasmā pana taṃ āgammā’’tiādi. Tattha taṃ āgammāti nibbānaṃ āgamma paṭicca ariyamaggassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvahetu. Mānamadapurisamadādayoti ettha jātiādiṃ nissāya seyyassa ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā uppajjanakamānoyeva madajananaṭṭhena madoti mānamado. Purisamado vuccati purisamāno, ‘‘ahaṃ puriso’’ti uppajjanakamāno. ‘‘Asaddhammasevanasamatthataṃ nissāya pavatto māno, rāgo eva vā purisamado’’ti keci. Ādi-saddena balamadayobbanamadādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti . Mahāgaṇṭhipade pana majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca ‘‘purisamado nāma sambhavo’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ idha yuttaṃ viya na dissati. Na hi ‘‘bhagavatā sambhavassa vināsāya dhammo desito’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Nimmadāti vigatamadabhāvā. Imameva hi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘amadā’’ti vuttaṃ. Madā nimmadīyanti ettha amadabhāvaṃ vināsaṃ gacchantīti madanimmadano. Esa nayo sesapadesupi.
“欲渴”是指对诸欲的希求,也就是欲渴爱。“所依”是指以值得享乐的方式被依止、被亲近,所以五种欲乐被称为“五种欲乐所依”,因此说“五种欲乐所依”。因为在五种欲乐上断除了欲贪,五种欲乐也就被称为已断除,所以经中说:“比丘们,对色有欲贪……”等等。或者说,五种欲乐所依就是对五种欲乐的依止、附着,以享乐的方式依止、亲近,这就是对渴爱活动的称呼。“三地轮转”是指在三地中,业、烦恼、果报以轮转的方式而称为轮转。“离染”就是坏灭。甘提巴达中说:“‘离染’说的是欲的灭尽,‘寂灭’说的是一次断除就灭尽。”在“离染即寂灭”这一普遍教示中,因为“渴爱灭尽”更为殊胜,所以说的就是渴爱的离染与寂灭。巴利
Kāmapipāsāti kāmānaṃ pātukamyatā, kāmataṇhāti attho. Ālīyanti abhiramitabbaṭṭhena sevīyantīti ālayā, pañca kāmaguṇāti āha ‘‘pañca kāmaguṇālayā’’ti. Pañcasu hi kāmaguṇesu chandarāgappahāneneva pañca kāmaguṇāpi pahīnā nāma honti, teneva ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, rūpesu chandarāgo’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.323) vuttaṃ. Pañcakāmaguṇesu vā ālayā pañcakāmaguṇālayā. Ālīyanti allīyanti abhiramanavasena sevantīti ālayāti hi taṇhāvicaritānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tebhūmakavaṭṭanti tīsu bhūmīsu kammakilesavipākā vaṭṭanaṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ. Virajjatīti palujjati. ‘‘Virajjatīti kāmavināso vutto, nirujjhatīti ekappahārena vināso’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Virāgo nirodhoti sāmaññacodanāyapi ‘‘taṇhākkhayo’’ti adhikatattā taṇhāya eva virajjanaṃ nirujjhanañca vuttaṃ.
“四生”里的“生”,在这里既可以指蕴的类别,也可以指原因,还可以指产道。在“四种龙生、四种金翅鸟生”里,指的是蕴的类别,也就是种类。在“布米迦,这生正是证得果报的原因”里,指的是原因。在“我不称由母胎出生者为婆罗门”里,指的是产道。而在这里,应当理解为蕴的类别。所谓“生”,是说众生虽然各自不同,但因为同一种类而归为一类。从意义上说,它指的是诸蕴按类别生起的一种特殊方式,这种方式因卵生等出生处的不同而有所区别,共有四种:卵生、胎生、湿生、化生。正如经中所说:“舍利弗,有这四种生。哪四种?卵生、胎生、湿生、化生。”巴利
Catasso yoniyoti ettha yonīti khandhakoṭṭhāsassapi kāraṇassapi passāvamaggassapi nāmaṃ. ‘‘Catasso nāgayoniyo (saṃ. ni. 3.342-343) catasso supaṇṇayoniyo’’ti ettha hi khandhakoṭṭhāso yoni nāma. ‘‘Yoni hesā bhūmija phalassa adhigamāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.226) ettha kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Na cāhaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ brūmi, yonijaṃ mattisambhava’’nti (ma. ni. 2.457; dha. pa. 396) ettha passāvamaggo. Idha pana khandhakoṭṭhāso ‘‘yonī’’ti adhippeto. Yavanti tāya sattā amissitāpi samānajātitāya missitā hontīti yoni. Sā pana atthato aṇḍādiuppattiṭṭhānavisiṭṭho khandhānaṃ bhāgaso pavattiviseso, sā ca aṇḍajajalābujasaṃsedajaopapātikavasena catubbidhā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘catasso kho imā, sāriputta, yoniyo. Katamā catasso? Aṇḍajā yoni jalābujā yoni saṃsedajā yoni opapātikā yonī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.152).
其中,在卵中出生的,是卵生;在湿处出生的,是湿生;在母胎中出生的,是胎生;不依靠这些条件,像是突然出现一样出生的,是化生。在这里,饿鬼道、畜生道和人道中,卵生等四种生都可能有。不过在人当中,只有某些是化生,比如玛哈巴杜玛王子等;卵生的也只有某些,比如孔塔子、二老比丘等;胎生的也只有某些,比如在莲花胎中出生的波拘萨提婆罗门、莲华妃等,而大多数人都是湿生。在饿鬼当中,被烧渴折磨的饿鬼因为长期被痛苦逼迫,没有欲望享受,所以他们没有胎生。又因为他们身上有火焰,胎儿无法在腹中安住,所以他们只有化生,胎生也不可能;其余的饿鬼则四种生都有。就像饿鬼一样,夜叉以及所有四足类、鸟类、长身类等,也都是四种生都有。所有地狱众生,以及从四大王天往上的天众,都只有化生;而地居天则四种生都有。在这里,天和人类中的胎生与化生有这样的差别:胎生者出生时弱小幼稚,化生者则像十六岁的样子出生。巴利
Tattha aṇḍe jātā aṇḍajā. Jalābumhi jātā jalābujā. Saṃsede jātā saṃsedajā. Vinā etehi kāraṇehi uppatitvā viya nibbattāti opapātikā. Ettha ca petaloke tiracchāne manussesu ca aṇḍajādayo catassopi yoniyo sambhavanti, manussesu panettha kecideva opapātikā honti mahāpadumakumārādayo viya. Aṇḍajāpi kontaputtā dvebhātiyatherā viya, saṃsedajāpi padumagabbhe nibbattapokkharasātibrāhmaṇapadumavatīdevīādayo viya kecideva honti, yebhuyyena pana manussā jalābujāva. Petesupi nijjhāmataṇhikapetānaṃ niccadukkhāturatāya kāmasevanā natthi, tasmā te gabbhaseyyakā na honti. Jālāvantatāya na tāsaṃ kucchiyaṃ gabbho saṇṭhāti, tasmā te opapātikāyeva saṃsedajatāyapi asambhavato, avasesapetā pana catuyonikāpi honti. Yathā ca te, evaṃ yakkhāpi sabbacatuppadapakkhijātidīghajātiādayopi sabbe catuyonikāyeva. Sabbe nerayikā ca catumahārājikato paṭṭhāya uparidevā ca opapātikāyeva, bhummadevā pana catuyonikāva honti. Tattha devamanussesu saṃsedajaopapātikānaṃ ayaṃ viseso – saṃsedajā mandā daharā hutvā nibbattanti, opapātikā soḷasavassuddesikā hutvā.
“五趣”在这里是指:由于善业和恶业,应当去往、应当投生的地方,就叫作“趣”。就像“业有”虽然在究竟意义上并没有一个作者,但依靠各种条件和合而成立,然后被说成是具有相续特征的众生所做的;同样,具有投生体性特征的诸趣,虽然在究竟意义上并没有一个去者,但依照各自的业,被说成是那些业的所有者应当去的地方。另外,趣有很多种:去趣、生趣、意乐趣、灭趣、成就趣。其中,“我死后去往那个趣”以及“诸天神、乾闼婆、人不知道他的趣”,这是去趣。“比丘们,我不知道这些具戒比丘的来处或去处”,这是生趣。“梵天神,我这样了知你的意乐趣,也了知你的死处”,这是意乐趣。“诸法的灭是趣,阿拉汉的趣是涅槃”,这是灭趣。“只有两种趣生起,没有别的”,这是成就趣。在这些当中,这里指的是去趣。这个去趣又依地狱、畜生、饿鬼、人、天而分为五种。正如所说:“舍利弗,有这五种趣。哪五种?地狱、畜生、饿鬼、人、天。”巴利
Pañca gatiyoti ettha sukatadukkaṭakammavasena gantabbā upapajjitabbāti gatiyo. Yathā hi kammabhavo paramatthato asatipi kārake paccayasāmaggiyā siddho, taṃsamaṅginā santānalakkhaṇena sattena katoti voharīyati, evaṃ upapattibhavalakkhaṇagatiyo paramatthato asatipi gamake taṃtaṃkammavasena yesaṃ tāni kammāni tehi gantabbāti voharīyanti. Apica gatigati nibbattigati ajjhāsayagati vibhavagati nipphattigatīti bahuvidhā gati nāma. Tattha ‘‘taṃ gatiṃ pecca gacchāmī’’ti (a. ni. 4.184) ca ‘‘yassa gatiṃ na jānanti, devā gandhabbamānusā’’ti (dha. pa. 420; su. ni. 649) ca ayaṃ gatigati nāma. ‘‘Imesaṃ kho panāhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sīlavantānaṃ neva jānāmi āgatiṃ vā gatiṃ vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.508) ayaṃ nibbattigati nāma. ‘‘Evampi kho te ahaṃ brahme gatiñca pajānāmi cutiñca pajānāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.503) ayaṃ ajjhāsayagati nāma. ‘‘Vibhavo gati dhammānaṃ, nibbānaṃ arahato gatī’’ti (pari. 339) ayaṃ vibhavagati nāma. ‘‘Dveyeva gatiyo sambhavanti anaññā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.258; 2.34; 3.200) ayaṃ nipphattigati nāma. Tāsu idha gatigati adhippetā, sā pana nirayatiracchānayonipettivisayamanaussadevānaṃ vasena pañcavidhā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘pañca kho imā, sāriputta, gatiyo. Katamā pañca? Nirayo tiracchānayoni pettivisayo manussā devā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.153).
在这里,所谓“铁”(ayo),是指它生起时就只是不断增长地生起,也就是乐。这里没有这种铁,所以叫“无铁”(nirayo,地狱);正因为在那里没有可欢喜、可享受的东西,所以从“无欢喜”和“无滋味”这两层意思,称为地狱(nirayo)。横着伸展的,叫畜生(tiracchāna):不像天、人那样向上直长,而是横向生长,这就是它的意思。从殊胜之乐的离去、消逝,是死后状态(peccabhāva);到达这种死后状态者的境界,所以叫饿鬼境(pettivisayo),也就是饿鬼生(petayoni)。由于心的增盛而称为人(manussā):因为具足念、勇猛、堪能修梵行等功德,心得以累积增盛,由于具有殊胜功德的心,所以称为人,这就是所说的意思;不过这个含义从严格意义上说,应当依住在赡部洲的人来理解。正如所说:“比丘们,赡部洲的人以三点胜过北俱卢洲的人和三十三天诸天神。哪三点?勇猛、具念、在这里修梵行。”(增支部9.21)同样,诸佛世尊、独觉佛、上首弟子、大弟子、转轮王以及其他有大威力的众生,都是在那里出生的;然而,由于与他们容貌等相同,连同周边小洲的居民一起,其他大洲的居民也被认为就是人。巴利
Tattha yassa uppajjati, taṃ brūhentoyeva uppajjatīti ayo, sukhaṃ. Natthi ettha ayoti nirayo, tato eva ramitabbaṃ assādetabbaṃ tattha natthīti niratiatthena nirassādaṭṭhena ca nirayoti vuccati. Tiriyaṃ añcitāti tiracchānā, devamanussādayo viya uddhaṃ dīghā ahutvā tiriyaṃ dīghāti attho. Pakaṭṭhato sukhato ayanaṃ apagamo peccabhāvo, taṃ peccabhāvaṃ pattānaṃ visayoti pettivisayo, petayoni. Manassa ussannatāya manussā, satisūrabhāvabrahmacariyayogyatādiguṇavasena upacitamānasatāya ukkaṭṭhaguṇacittatāya manussāti vuttaṃ hoti, ayaṃ panattho nippariyāyato jambudīpavāsīvasena veditabbo. Yathāha – ‘‘tīhi, bhikkhave, ṭhānehi jambudīpakā manussā uttarakuruke ca manusse adhiggaṇhanti deve ca tāvatiṃse. Katamehi tīhi? Sūrā satimanto idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti (a. ni. 9.21). Tathā hi buddhā ca bhagavanto paccekabuddhā aggasāvakā mahāsāvakā cakkavattino aññe ca mahānubhāvā sattā tattheva uppajjanti, tehi samānarūpāditāya pana saddhiṃ parittadīpavāsīhi itaramahādīpavāsinopi manussātveva paññāyiṃsu.
另有一些人说:因为与贪等以及无贪等相伴的心增盛,所以是人。凡是属于人这一类的众生,在他们当中,贪等和无贪等特别增盛。他们因为贪等增盛,就圆满恶趣之道;因为无贪等增盛,就圆满善趣之道以及趣向涅槃之道。因此,由于与贪等、无贪等相伴的心增盛,小洲居民和四大洲居民中这些殊胜的众生,就被称为人。可是世间人却说:因为是玛奴的后代,所以是人。名叫玛奴的,是劫初时最早的人,是世间规范的创始者,为众生安排有利和不利,依照该做和不该做而处在父亲的位置上,他在教法里被称为大选出,就是我们的菩萨。那些直接或间接遵循他的教诫而安住的众生,因为像他的儿子一样,所以被称为人、人类。正因如此,他们也被称作玛奴之子、人生者。巴利
Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘lobhādīhi alobhādīhi ca sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā. Ye hi sattā manussajātikā, tesu visesato lobhādayo alobhādayo ca ussannā. Te lobhādiussannatāya apāyamaggaṃ, alobhādiussannatāya sugatimaggaṃ nibbānagāmimaggañca paripūrenti, tasmā lobhādīhi alobhādīhi ca sahitassa manassa ussannatāya parittadīpavāsīhi saddhiṃ catumahādīpavāsino sattavisesā manussāti vuccantī’’ti. Lokiyā pana ‘‘manuno apaccabhāvena manussā’’ti vadanti. Manu nāma paṭhamakappiko lokamariyādāya ādibhūto sattānaṃ hitāhitavidhāyako kattabbākattabbatāvasena pituṭṭhāniyo, yo sāsane mahāsammatoti vuccati amhākaṃ bodhisatto, paccakkhato paramparāya ca tassa ovādānusāsaniyaṃ ṭhitā sattā puttasadisatāya ‘‘manussā, mānusā’’ti ca vuccanti. Tato eva hi te ‘‘mānavā manujā’’ti ca voharīyanti.
天人之所以叫“天”,是因为他们以五种欲乐功德,以及各自天威神力所成的神通殊胜,而嬉戏、游乐、欢舞、闪耀。其中,欲界天既以欲乐功德、也以神通殊胜而嬉戏,其余的天则只以神通殊胜而嬉戏,应当这样理解。或者说,可皈依、可被称扬赞叹的,就是天。这里,蕴是连同地狱趣、天趣、人趣的处所一起说的。而畜生界和饿鬼境,应当知道只是取蕴,因为它们没有那样确定的处所。又或者,他们在森林、大海、山脚等处有固定的住处,那就按那样的处所来理解。七识住和九有情居,前面已经解释过了。为种种不同的状态,就是从一种生起状态到另一种生起状态。系缚就是打结,缝合就是缝纫。从渴爱出离者,因为在彼处渴爱全然不存在,而他的出离正是与渴爱脱离,所以说离系。巴利
Pañcahi kāmaguṇehi attano attano devānubhāvasaṅkhātehi iddhivisesehi ca dibbanti kīḷanti laḷanti jotantīti devā. Tattha kāmadevā kāmaguṇehi ceva iddhivisesehi ca, itare iddhiviseseheva dibbantīti veditabbā. Saraṇanti vā gamiyanti abhitthavīyantīti vā devā. Ettha ca nirayagatidevagatimanussagatīhi saddhiṃ okāsena khandhā vuttā. Tiracchānayonipettivisayaggahaṇena khandhānaṃ eva gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ tesaṃ tādisassa paricchinnassa okāsassa abhāvato. Yattha yattha vā te araññasamuddapabbatapādādike nibaddhavāsaṃ vasanti, tādisassa ṭhānassa vasena okāsopi gahetabbo. Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nava sattāvāsā ca heṭṭhā saṃvaṇṇitanayā eva. Aparāparabhāvāyāti aparāparaṃ yoniādito yoniādibhāvāya. Ābandhanaṃ gaṇṭhikaraṇaṃ, saṃsibbanaṃ tunnakaraṇaṃ. Taṇhāya nikkhantaṃ tattha tassā sabbaso abhāvato, nikkhamanañcassa taṇhāya visaṃyogo evāti āha ‘‘visaṃyutta’’nti.
“断除诸欲”这句话里,用“欲”这个说法,既包括“被欲求的,就叫欲”,也包括“能欲求的,就叫欲”,所以两种欲都收摄在内,因此说“断除事欲和烦恼欲”。这里所说的断除事欲,应当理解为通过断除对那些事欲的欲贪而达成。诸欲想,就是在诸欲上的想,或者与欲相应的想。遍知,这里指的是三种遍知,所以说“知遍知、度遍知、断遍知这三种遍知”。其中什么是知遍知?就是对一切三地所摄的名色,按照“这是色,色只有这么多,不会超出这个范围;这是名,名只有这么多,不会超出这个范围”,把色按四大种及所造色来区分,把名按触等来区分,从相、作用、现起、近因来界定,并且把握它的业、无明等缘,这就是知遍知。巴利
Kāmānaṃ pahānanti ettha kāmaggahaṇena kāmīyatīti kāmo, kāmetīti kāmoti duvidhassapi kāmassa saṅgaho katoti āha ‘‘vatthukāmānaṃ kilesakāmānañca pahāna’’nti. Vatthukāmappahānañcettha tesu chandarāgappahānenāti veditabbaṃ. Kāmasaññānanti kāmesu, kāmasahagatānaṃ vā saññānaṃ. Pariññāti tividhāpi pariññā idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘ñātatīraṇapahānavasena tividhā pariññā’’ti. Tattha katamā ñātapariññā? Sabbaṃ tebhūmakaṃ nāmarūpaṃ ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito bhiyyo, idaṃ nāmaṃ, ettakaṃ nāmaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti bhūtupādāyabhedaṃ rūpaṃ phassādibhedaṃ nāmañca lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānato vavatthapeti, kammāvijjādikañcassa paccayaṃ pariggaṇhāti, ayaṃ ñātapariññā.
什么是审察遍知?像这样已经了知之后,再以无常、苦、病等四十二种行相去审察那一切,这就叫审察遍知。什么是断遍知?像这样审察之后,用最上之道舍断对一切事物的欲贪,这就是断遍知。或者,见清净和度疑清净是知遍知;道非道智见清净等,或者从聚的观照等一直到随顺智为终点的慧,是审察遍知;在圣道上的智,究竟来说就是断遍知。不过在这里,对于诸欲想,依通达自相以及无常等共相而现起的知遍知和审察遍知,它们作用的完成也是唯靠道才得以成就,所以是就道的那一刹那来说三种遍知。因此才说:“在这五处当中,所说的就是能灭尽诸漏的出世间道。”巴利
Katamā tīraṇapariññā? Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā taṃ sabbaṃ tīreti aniccato dukkhato rogatoti dvācattālīsāya ākārehi, ayaṃ tīraṇapariññā nāma. Katamā pahānapariññā? Evaṃ tīrayitvā aggamaggena sabbasmiṃ chandarāgaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ pahānapariññā. Diṭṭhivisuddhikaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhiyo vā ñātapariññā, maggāmaggapaṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiādayo, kalāpasammasanādianulomapariyosānā vā paññā tīraṇapariññā, ariyamagge ñāṇaṃ nippariyāyena pahānapariññā. Idha pana kāmasaññānaṃ sabhāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhavasena aniccādisāmaññalakkhaṇavasena ca pavattamānānaṃ ñātatīraṇapariññānampi kiccanipphattiyā maggeneva ijjhanato maggakkhaṇaṃyeva sandhāya tividhāpi pariññā vuttā. Teneva ‘‘imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu kilesakkhayakaro lokuttaramaggova kathito’’ti vuttaṃ.
在诸欲中想喝,或者对诸欲想喝,这就是“欲渴”,所以经文说“对诸欲有饮求,或者对诸欲想喝”。这里说的“五处”,是指前面“宣说了诸欲的断除”等语所说的五个方面。这里说的“三处”,是指“法是为离欲而说的,不是为有欲而说的;是为离系而说的,不是为有系而说的;是为无取着而说的,不是为有取着而说的”这样所说的三个方面。“生起追悔”,就是让那个恶业生起这样的追悔。生起什么样的追悔呢?所以说“竟然有这样的……”等等。巴利
Kāmesu, kāme vā pātumicchā kāmapipāsāti āha – ‘‘kāmesu pātabyatānaṃ, kāme vā pātumicchāna’’nti. Imesu pañcasu ṭhānesūti ‘‘kāmānaṃ pahānaṃ akkhāta’’ntiādinā vuttesu pañcasu ṭhānesu. Tīsu ṭhānesūti ‘‘virāgāya dhammo desito, no sarāgāya, visaṃyogāya dhammo desito, no saṃyogāya, anupādānāya dhammo desito, no saupādānāyā’’ti evaṃ vuttesu ṭhānesu. Vippaṭisāraṃ karotīti evaṃ taṃ pāpaṃ vippaṭisāraṃ uppādeti. Kīdisaṃ vippaṭisāraṃ karotīti āha ‘‘īdisepi nāmā’’tiādi.
39 不是出于喜爱欲:是指对自己导师没有喜爱之情的欲望。不是以分裂为先导:是指那位比丘不是以制造分裂的意图为先导来对待导师。不是为施加过失:不是为施加过失。“卡利”是愤怒的别称,依于愤怒而说的指责过失,就叫“卡利教说”。“维拉”指学处的界限,“马里亚达”是它的同义词。因为学处不可逾越,所以也称为“界限、界限”。巴利
39.Nevapiyakamyatāyāti attani satthu neva piyabhāvakāmatāya. Na bhedapurekkhāratāyāti na satthu tena bhikkhunā bhedanādhippāyapurekkhāratāya. Na kalisāsanāropanatthāyāti na dosāropanatthāya. Kalīti kodhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tassa sāsanaṃ kalisāsanaṃ, kodhavasena vuccamāno garahadoso. Velanti sikkhāpadavelaṃ. Mariyādanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Sikkhāpadañhi anatikkamanīyaṭṭhena ‘‘velā, mariyādā’’ti ca vuccati.
行邪淫的违犯,就是以淫欲的方式发生的、被称为行邪淫的违犯。在“pakaraṇa”这个词里,“pa”这个前缀是表示开始的意思,所以注释说“开始做”。在某些情况下,前缀只表达词根本身的意思,并不表示额外的特殊含义,所以注释又说“或者只是做”。“以出身”,是指刹帝利等出身。“以姓氏”,是指乔达摩、迦叶等姓氏。“以望族子弟身份”,是指在刹帝利等出身当中,作为释迦族、须陀夷族等殊胜家族的子弟。“有名望”,是指拥有众多随从。“可爱”,是指有可爱的戒行。“以不动摇”,是指不被嗔恚和贪爱所动摇。如果某人在那一生中没有能生起道果的因缘,诸佛就说他是“无用之人”,比如阿利塔、喇伦达义等人。即使有因缘,但如果在那一刻没有证得道或果,也仍然说他是“无用之人”,比如达尼耶、优波斯那长老等人。然而苏丁那在那一生中证得道果的因缘已经完全断绝,因此称他为“无用之人”。巴利
Ajjhācāravītikkamoti methunavasena pavattaajjhācārasaṅkhāto vītikkamo. Pakaraṇeti ettha pa-saddo ārambhavacanoti āha ‘‘kattuṃ ārabhatī’’ti. Katthaci upasaggo dhātuatthameva vadati, na visesatthajotakoti āha ‘‘karotiyeva vā’’ti. Jātiyāti khattiyādijātiyā. Gottenāti gotamakassapādigottena. Kolaputtiyenāti khattiyādijātīsuyeva sakkakulasotthiyakulādivisiṭṭhakulānaṃ puttabhāvena. Yasassīti mahāparivāro. Pesalanti piyasīlaṃ. Avikampamānenāti paṭighānunayehi akampamānena. Yassa tasmiṃ attabhāve uppajjanārahānaṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthi, taṃ buddhā ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti vadanti ariṭṭhalāḷudāyīādike viya. Upanissaye satipi tasmiṃ khaṇe magge vā phale vā asati ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti vadantiyeva dhaniyaupasenattherādike viya. Sudinnassa pana tasmiṃ attabhāve maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo samucchinnoyeva, tena naṃ ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti āha.
“沙门所应作之法”指的是惭、愧等。由于通过道、果、涅槃来把握,便已把握了证悟之教,因此应当知道,“诸教”此处涵盖了行道之教与教理之教。“皮肤”是指使他们变得光洁亮泽的皮肤。“是什么”是在说“光泽”,意思是照亮他们的光明。“是什么”是在说“美好状态”。“随顺皮肤”就是合适。“恰当的”等词中,也要把“他们的”带进来连接。沙门的业就是沙门业,不是沙门的业就是非沙门业。与“如何”一词搭配,使“你将不能”成为将来时的说法。也有人说,这是与“名为”一词搭配。巴利
Samaṇakaraṇānaṃ dhammānanti hirottappādīnaṃ. Maggaphalanibbānaggahaṇena paṭivedhasāsanassa gahitattā sāsanānanti paṭipattipariyattisāsanānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Chavinti tesaṃ pabhassarakaraṇaṃ chaviṃ. Kiṃ tanti āha ‘‘chāya’’nti, tesaṃ pakāsakaṃ obhāsanti attho. Kiṃ tanti āha ‘‘sundarabhāva’’nti. Chavimanugataṃ anucchavikaṃ. Patirūpantiādīsupi ‘‘tesa’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Samaṇānaṃ kammaṃ sāmaṇakaṃ, na sāmaṇakaṃ assāmaṇakaṃ. Kathaṃ-saddayogena ‘‘na sakkhissasī’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ. ‘‘Nāma-saddayogenā’’ti ca vadanti.
“具悲悯者”是指心怀同情。“斥责”是指责备。为了依词源说明“āsīvisa(毒蛇)”这个词的含义,说了“迅速”等话。这是指毒蛇的(毒)。所谓“到来”,是说被它咬到的人,毒就会向那人袭来。“注入毒者”也是毒蛇,意思是毒仿佛灌注到全身,又能注入他人身体。“食毒者”也是毒蛇:凡是被它吃下、享用的东西,都会变成毒,所以本该说“所食为毒者”,却依词源说成“āsīvisa”。“有剑般毒者”也是毒蛇,意思是它的毒如剑般锋利,能断他人要害,所以称为āsīvisa。或者说“āsī”是牙的意思,毒藏在牙中,所以就是毒蛇。在其余蛇中,因为黑蛇毒大,所以在毒蛇之后紧接着说黑蛇。蛇头也如炭火坑一样可怕,不是生起不善的处所,因此为了说明防止不善业、即使破戒也不如住于纯净戒中而死,说了“宁将男根置于毒蛇、黑蛇口中”。因为出家者所作恶业是违越世尊教诫,由于事大,所以有大罪过。“kāsu”也指坑,也指堆。巴利
Dayālukenāti anukampāya sahitena. Paribhāsantoti garahanto. Niruttinayena āsīvisa-saddassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘āsu sīgha’’ntiādi. Etassāti āsīvisassa. Āgacchatīti yo tena daṭṭho, taṃ patiāgacchati. Āsittavisotipi āsīviso, sakalakāye āsiñcitvā viya ṭhapitaviso parassa ca sarīre āsiñcanavisoti attho. Asitavisotipi āsīviso. Yaṃ yañhi etena asitaṃ hoti paribhuttaṃ, taṃ visameva sampajjati, tasmā asitaṃ visaṃ etassāti asitavisoti vattabbe ‘‘āsīviso’’ti niruttinayena vuttaṃ. Asisadisavisotipi āsīviso, asi viya tikhiṇaṃ parassa mammacchedanasamatthaṃ visaṃ etassāti āsīvisoti vuttaṃ hoti. Āsīti vā dāṭhā vuccati, tattha sannihitavisoti āsīviso. Sesasappehi kaṇhasappassa mahāvisattā āsīvisassānantaraṃ kaṇhasappo vutto. Sappamukhampi aṅgārakāsu viya bhayāvahattā akusaluppattiyā ṭhānaṃ na hotīti akusalakammato nivāraṇādhippāyena sīlabhedatopi suddhasīle ṭhitassa maraṇameva varataranti dassetuṃ ‘‘āsīvisassa kaṇhasappassa mukhe aṅgajātaṃ pakkhittaṃ vara’’nti vuttaṃ. Pabbajitena hi katapāpakammaṃ bhagavato āṇātikkamanato vatthumahantatāya mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kāsunti āvāṭopi vuccati rāsipi.
“ 御者啊,你为什么这么急急忙忙地挖坑?
朋友,是我在问你,请你告诉我,你拿这个坑要做什么?”巴利
‘‘Kinnu santaramānova, kāsuṃ khaṇasi sārathi; Puṭṭho me samma akkhāhi, kiṃ kāsuyā karissasī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.3) –
在这里,āvāṭa 叫什么?巴利
Ettha hi āvāṭo kāsu nāma.
“ 另一些人掉进炭火坑,人们哭喊着,身体被烧焦。”巴利
‘‘Aṅgārakāsuṃ apare phuṇanti, narā rudantā paridaḍḍhagattā’’ti (jā. 2.22.462) –
这里说的是“堆”。不过在这个语境里,两者都包括在内,所以经文说“在装满炭火的坑里,或者在炭火堆里”。“kāsu”是被挖出来的意思,也就是坑;也是被堆积起来的意思,也就是堆。“padittāya”是正在燃烧。“saṃ”这个字在这里是“周遍”的同义词,所以说“从四面八方都燃烧着”。巴利
Ettha rāsi. Idha pana ubhayampi adhippetanti āha ‘‘aṅgārapuṇṇakūpe aṅgārarāsimhi vā’’ti. Kassati khaṇīyatīti kāsu, āvāṭo. Kasīyati cīyatīti kāsu, rāsi. Padittāyāti dippamānāya. Saṃ-saddo ettha samantapariyāyoti āha ‘‘samantato pajjalitāyā’’ti.
把男根插入女根,这就是女人堕入地狱的因缘和原因,所以说“以此为缘”;这个词也是中性名词。这里用“to”代替了体格语尾,而且在复合词中也不省略这个“to”。其中,“tattha nāma tvanti”这个地方,“tvaṃ”这个词因为和“samāpajjissasi”(你将进入)产生关联而有意义,所以说“tvaṃ是那个词的同义词”。至于“yaṃ taṃ”的读法,在难点释中说“这是更合理的文句”。“yaṃ taṃ”并不是一般的列举解说,而应该像世间说“不管什么、随便什么”那样,是一种轻蔑的说法,所以说“即表达了不管什么、随便什么,都是被轻贱、被蔑视的意思”。“nīcajanānaṃ”指德行低劣的众生。在“gāmadhamma”这个词中,用“gāma”一词通过无差别的转喻来指称住在村里的人,所以说“村里居住的人”。“kilesapaggharaṇakaṃ dhammaṃ”指贪等烦恼流漏之法,因为淫法确实使贪欲流漏。由于淫法有大罪过、粗显,所以说“非微细”。“anipuṇaṃ”是它的同义词。“udake bhavaṃ odakaṃ”,那是什么?就是水的功用,所以说“水的功用就是它的尽头、它的终点”。“samāpajjissati”是将来时的表达,因与“nāma”一词结合而成,所以说“samāpajjissati……应当与nāma一词连接理解”。在世间,淫法是最初的行为,所以有所谓最初劫的人,但这里说的不是那个,所以说“这是针对教法而说的”。“bahūnanti”是就人而言,不是就不善法而言,所以说“许多人的”。巴利
Idaṃ mātugāmassa aṅgajāte aṅgajātapakkhipanaṃ nidānaṃ kāraṇamassa nirayupapajjanassāti itonidānaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ. Paccattavacanassa to-ādeso kato, tassa ca samāsepi alopo. Tattha nāma tvanti ettha tvaṃ-saddo ‘‘samāpajjissasī’’ti iminā sambandhamupagacchamāno atthīti āha ‘‘tvanti taṃsaddassa vevacana’’nti. ‘‘Yaṃ tanti pana pāṭho yuttarūpo’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Yaṃ tanti nāyaṃ uddesaniddeso, yathā loke yaṃ vā taṃ vāti avaññātavacanaṃ, evaṃ daṭṭhabbanti āha – ‘‘yaṃ vā taṃ vā hīḷitaṃ avaññātanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Nīcajanānanti nihīnaguṇānaṃ sattānaṃ. Gāmadhammanti ettha gāma-saddena gāmavāsino vuttā abhedūpacārenāti āha ‘‘gāmavāsikamanussāna’’nti. Kilesapaggharaṇakaṃ dhammanti rāgādikilesavissandanakadhammaṃ . Methunadhammo hi rāgaṃ paggharati. Methunadhammassa mahāsāvajjatāya oḷārikattā vuttaṃ ‘‘asukhuma’’nti. Anipuṇanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Udake bhavaṃ odakaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Udakakiccanti āha – ‘‘udakakiccaṃ antikaṃ avasānaṃ assā’’ti. Samāpajjissatīti anāgatavacanaṃ nāma-saddayogena katanti āha – ‘‘samāpajjissatīti…pe… nāma-saddenayojetabba’’nti. Loke methunadhammassa ādikattā koci paṭhamakappiko, na panāyanti āha – ‘‘sāsanaṃ sandhāya vadatī’’ti. Bahūnanti puggalāpekkhaṃ, na pana akusalāpekkhanti āha ‘‘bahūnaṃ puggalāna’’nti.
由于不守护,才导致难养、难护等结果。这里用“难养”等词来说不守护,是以结果来指代原因,所以说“作为难养等事由的不守护”。“作为事由”就是作为原因。因为结果依赖它才能生起,所以原因就叫作事由。“自己”指心和身体,或者单指心。所谓“成就难养与难护”,意思是无论自己还是施主,都难以供养、难以照料。安住于不守护的人,有的人是自己难养、难护,有的人则是让侍者难养、难护。怎么说呢?有人得到酸味等食物后,又去找不是酸味的食物;在一家得到食物,却拿到另一家去丢弃,走遍整个村子后,空着钵回到精舍躺下,这种人就是自己难养。又有人即使别人把满满一钵米饭、肉食等送上来,他还是摆出不高兴的脸色和不满的表情,或者当着施主的面贬低那钵食物说“你们给了什么”,然后把食物转给沙弥、在家众等人,这种人就是让侍者难养。人们看到这种情况,就会远远避开,说:“这个比丘难养,没法供养。”巴利
Yaṃ asaṃvaraṃ paṭicca dubbharatādupposatādi hoti, so asaṃvaro dubbharatādi-saddena vutto kāraṇe phalūpacārenāti āha – ‘‘dubbharatādīnaṃ vatthubhūtassa asaṃvarassā’’ti. Vatthubhūtassāti kāraṇabhūtassa. Vasati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti hi kāraṇaṃ vatthu. Attāti cittaṃ sarīrañca, cittameva vā. Dubbharatañceva dupposatañca āpajjatīti attanā paccayadāyakehi ca dukkhena bharitabbataṃ posetabbatañca āpajjati. Asaṃvare ṭhito hi ekacco attanopi dubbharo hoti dupposo, ekacco upaṭṭhākānampi. Kathaṃ? Yo hi ambilādīni laddhā anambilādīni pariyesati, aññassa ghare laddhaṃ aññassa ghare chaḍḍento sabbaṃ gāmaṃ caritvā rittapattova vihāraṃ pavisitvā nipajjati, ayaṃ attano dubbharo. Yo pana sālimaṃsodanādīnaṃ patte pūretvā dinnepi dummukhabhāvaṃ anattamanabhāvameva dasseti, tesaṃ vā sammukhāva taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ‘‘kiṃ tumhehi dinna’’nti apasādento sāmaṇeragahaṭṭhādīnaṃ deti, ayaṃ upaṭṭhākānaṃ dubbharo. Etaṃ disvā manussā dūratova parivajjenti ‘‘dubbharo bhikkhu na sakkā posetu’’nti.
“大欲”在这里是指:想要得到殊胜的东西,或者他的欲望很大,所以叫“大欲者”;这种状态就是“大欲”,表现为炫耀自己的功德,以及接受供养时不知节制。大欲者站在贪欲的行为上,炫耀自己具有戒律、头陀支等功德,而且在接受供养时也不知节制。针对这一点,有人说:“炫耀自己的功德,接受供养时又不知节制,这就是大欲的特征。”而这种大欲,正如经中所说:“这里有人本来是有信仰的,却希望别人知道‘我是有信仰的人’;本来是持戒的,却希望别人知道‘我是持戒的人’。”按这种方式可知,具有这种大欲的人,很难被满足,连亲生母亲也无法掌握他的心。因此这样说:巴利
Mahicchatanti ettha mahantāni vatthūni icchati, mahatī vā panassa icchāti mahiccho, tassa bhāvo mahicchatā, santaguṇavibhāvanatā paṭiggahaṇe amattaññutā ca. Mahiccho hi icchācāre ṭhatvā attani vijjamānasīladhutadhammādiguṇe vibhāveti, tādisassa paṭiggahaṇe amattaññutāpi hoti. Yaṃ sandhāya vadanti ‘‘santaguṇasambhāvanatā paṭiggahaṇe ca amattaññutā, etaṃ mahicchatālakkhaṇa’’nti. Sā panesā mahicchatā ‘‘idhekacco saddho samāno ‘saddhoti maṃ jano jānātū’ti icchati, sīlavā samāno ‘sīlavāti maṃ jano jānātū’ti’’ iminā nayena āgatāyeva, tāya samannāgato puggalo dussantappiyo hoti, vijātamātāpissa cittaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“ 大火堆、大海,还有贪欲很大的人;
就算用车子装满生活用品送给他们,这三者也不会满足。”巴利
‘‘Aggikkhandho samuddo ca, mahiccho cāpi puggalo; Sakaṭena paccayaṃ dentu, tayopete atappiyā’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.252; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.63; vibha. aṭṭha. 850; udā. aṭṭha. 31; mahāni. aṭṭha. 85);
与众生和烦恼的聚集、结合,就叫“众处”,所以说“与众处和烦恼处”。又说“为懈怠所随逐”,意思是被懈怠的状态所随逐,懈怠者的状态就是懈怠。在“八懈怠事之圆满”中,这里“懈怠者”是指卑劣地沉没的人,是把da变成了ta。由于某种法而使人被称为“懈怠者”,这个懈怠的状态在这里就用“懈怠”这个词来表达。即使没有直接表示状态的词,状态的含义也能被理解,就像说“布的白”一样。所以意思是“懈怠状态之事”,也就是懈怠的原因。正如:巴利
Sattehi kilesehi ca saṅgaṇanaṃ samodhānaṃ saṅgaṇikāti āha – ‘‘gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya ceva kilesasaṅgaṇikāya cā’’ti. Kosajjānugato ca hotīti kusītabhāvena anugato hoti, kusītassa bhāvo kosajjaṃ. Aṭṭhakusītavatthupāripūriyāti ettha kucchitaṃ sīdatīti kusīto da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Yassa dhammassa vasena puggalo ‘‘kusīto’’ti vuccati, so kusītabhāvo idha kusīta-saddena vutto. Vināpi hi bhāvajotanasaddaṃ bhāvattho viññāyati yathā ‘‘paṭassa sukka’’nti, tasmā kusītabhāvavatthūnīti attho, kosajjakāraṇānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi –
我心里想:我有事情要做,可做这件事的时候身体会累,那我还是躺下吧。于是他就躺下了,不肯为了还没得到的能得、还没证到的能证、还没实现的能实现而发起精进努力。这是第一种懈怠事。
我心里想:我已经做完了事情,可做这件事的时候身体已经累了,那我还是躺下吧。……我心里想:我有路要走,可走路的时候身体会累,那我还是躺下吧。……我心里想:我已经走完了路,可走路的时候身体已经累了,那我还是躺下吧。……我心里想:我到村子或城镇去托钵,没有得到足够多的粗劣或精美食物,身体又累又不好使,那我还是躺下吧。……我心里想:我到村子或城镇去托钵,得到了足够多的粗劣或精美食物,身体又沉重又不好使,就像堆满了豆子一样,那我还是躺下吧。……我心里想:我生了这点小病,正好有理由躺下,那我还是躺下吧。……我心里想:我病刚好,才从病中恢复不久,身体虚弱又不好使,那我还是躺下吧。于是他就躺下了,不肯为了还没得到的能得、还没证到的能证、还没实现的能实现而发起精进努力。这是第八种懈怠事。巴利
‘‘Kammaṃ kho me kattabbaṃ bhavissati, kammaṃ kho pana me karontassa kāyo kilamissati, handāhaṃ nipajjāmīti so nipajjati, na vīriyaṃ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ kusītavatthu. Ahaṃ kho kammaṃ akāsiṃ, kammaṃ kho pana me karontassa kāyo kilanto, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, maggaṃ kho pana me gacchantassa kāyo kilamissati, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho maggaṃ agamāsiṃ, maggaṃ kho pana me gacchantassa kāyo kilanto, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya caranto nālatthaṃ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṃ pāripūriṃ, tassa me kāyo kilanto akammañño, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya caranto alatthaṃ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṃ pāripūriṃ, tassa me kāyo garuko akammañño māsācitaṃ maññe, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… uppanno kho me ayaṃ appamattako ābādho, atthi kappo nipajjituṃ, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā, tassa me kāyo dubbalo akammañño, handāhaṃ nipajjāmīti so nipajjati, na vīriyaṃ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Idaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ kusītavatthu’’nti (dī. ni. 3.334; a. ni. 8.80) –
像这样生起的沉滞——“那我就躺下吧”——由于它们层层递进地成为懈怠之因,所以称为八种懈怠事。这句话的意思是:它导致这八种懈怠事的圆满。巴利
Evamāgatāni ‘‘handāhaṃ nipajjāmī’’ti evaṃ pavattaosīdanāni uparūpari kosajjakāraṇattā aṭṭha kusītavatthūni nāma, tesaṃ pāripūriyā saṃvattatīti attho.
“易养”和“易供”的意思是:自己容易被侍者以安乐来奉养、供给。安住在防护中的人,有些自己易养易供,有些则连侍者也容易奉养他。怎么讲呢?无论得到粗劣的还是精美的食物,他都心满意足地吃完,然后回到精舍去做自己的事,这就是自己易养。对于别人布施的少或多、粗或妙,他不轻视,心满意足、面容清净,当着他们的面受用之后离去,这就是让侍者容易奉养。人们看到这一点,就生起极大的信任,说:“我们的尊者易养,一点点就满足,我们自己将供养他。”这样立下承诺后便供养他。“少欲”是指远离贪欲。在这里,文句似乎有所保留,而含义则是无保留的。此中的“少”一词是“无有”之义,如“我知无病”等语中那样可以理解。因此他说“无渴爱”。巴利
Subharo hoti suposoti attano upaṭṭhākehi ca sukhena bharitabbo posetabboti attho. Saṃvare ṭhito hi ekacco attanopi subharo hoti suposo, ekacco upaṭṭhākānampi. Kathaṃ? Yo hi yaṃ kiñci lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā laddhā tuṭṭhacittova bhuñjitvā vihāraṃ gantvā attano kammaṃ karoti, ayaṃ attano subharo. Yo pana paresampi appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā dānaṃ ahīḷetvā attamano vippasannamukho hutvā etesaṃ sammukhāva paribhuñjitvā yāti, ayaṃ upaṭṭhākānaṃ subharo. Etaṃ disvā manussā ativiya vissatthā honti, ‘‘amhākaṃ bhadanto subharo, thokathokenapi tussati, mayameva naṃ posessāmā’’ti paṭiññaṃ katvā posenti. Appicchatanti icchāvirahitattaṃ. Ettha hi byañjanaṃ sāvasesaṃ viya, attho pana niravaseso. Appa-saddo hettha abhāvatthoti sakkā viññātuṃ ‘‘appābādhatañca sañjānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.225) viya. Tenevāha ‘‘nittaṇhabhāva’’nti.
“三种差别”的知足,是就“依所得知足”等共通说法而说的;但在四种资具中,各有三种知足,所以共有十二种知足。怎么算呢?对衣服来说,有依所得知足、依体力知足、依适宜知足三种;对饮食、床座、医药等也是这样。关于它的差别,解释如下(《中部注》1.252;《相应部注》2.2.144;《增支部注》1.1.65):这里,比丘得到衣服,不管好看不好看,他就靠这件衣服过活,不希求别的,即使再得到别的也不拿。这就是他对衣服的依所得知足。如果他本来体弱,或者被疾病、衰老所压倒,穿厚重的衣服会觉得疲惫,那么他跟同类比丘交换,用轻便的衣服维持生活,也仍然是知足。这就是他对衣服的依体力知足。因为对本来体弱等人来说,厚重的衣服不会带来舒适,反而会造成身体疲劳;所以出于实际需要、出于不贪等理由,交换之后使用轻便衣服,并不违背知足。另一种情况是,有人得到上等资具,他得到细布等某一种贵重衣服,或者得到很多件衣服,心里想:“这件适合长老、久出家的人,这件适合多闻的人,这件适合病人,这件适合少有所得的人。”把这些送出去之后,他拿他们换下来的旧衣服,或者从垃圾堆等处捡来破布,拼成桑喀帝穿着,也仍然是知足。这就是他对衣服的依适宜知足。因为即使得到贵重衣服或很多衣服,也能把它们舍出去而拿别的,这是站在依适宜的原则上,所以不违背知足。巴利
Tippabhedāya santuṭṭhiyāti yathālābhādisantosasāmaññena vuttaṃ, catūsu pana paccayesu tayo tayo santosāti dvādasavidho hoti santoso. Kathaṃ? Cīvare yathālābhasantoso yathābalasantoso yathāsāruppasantosoti tividho hoti santoso. Evaṃ piṇḍapātādīsu. Tassāyaṃ pabhedasaṃvaṇṇanā (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.252; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.144; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.65) – idha bhikkhu cīvaraṃ labhati sundaraṃ vā asundaraṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti. Ayamassa cīvare yathālābhasantoso. Atha pana pakatidubbalo vā hoti ābādhajarābhibhūto vā, garucīvaraṃ pārupanto kilamati, so sabhāgena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ taṃ parivattetvā lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhoyeva hoti. Ayamassa cīvare yathābalasantoso. Pakatidubbalādīnañhi garucīvarāni na phāsubhāvāvahāni sarīrakhedāvahāni ca hontīti payojanavasena anatricchatādivasena tāni parivattetvā lahukacīvaraparibhogo na santosavirodhīti. Aparo paṇītapaccayalābhī hoti, so paṭṭacīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ mahagghacīvaraṃ bahūni vā pana cīvarāni labhitvā ‘‘idaṃ therānaṃ cirapabbajitānaṃ, idaṃ bahussutānaṃ anurūpaṃ, idaṃ gilānānaṃ, idaṃ appalābhānaṃ hotū’’ti datvā tesaṃ purāṇacīvaraṃ vā saṅkārakūṭādito vā nantakāni uccinitvā tehi saṅghāṭiṃ katvā dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa cīvare yathāsāruppasantoso. Mahagghañhi cīvaraṃ bahūni vā cīvarāni labhitvāpi tāni vissajjetvā tadaññassa gahaṇaṃ yathāsāruppanaye ṭhitattā na santosavirodhīti.
在这里,比丘得到食物,不管是粗劣的还是精美的,他只靠这些维持生活,不希求别的;即使得到别的,也不接受。这是他对食物的“随所得知足”。如果比丘得到与自己的体质不合、或与病情不合的食物,吃了以后感到不舒服,他就把那些食物给同分的比丘,再从对方手里接过适合自己吃的食物来吃,继续修行沙门法,也仍然是知足。这是他对食物的“随体力知足”。还有一种情况:比丘得到很多精美的食物,他就像处理衣服那样,把这些食物布施给久出家的人、多闻的人、少有所得的人、生病的人,然后自己吃他们剩下的,或者自己出去托钵,吃混合在一起的食物,也仍然是知足。这是他对食物的“随适合知足”。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu piṇḍapātaṃ labhati lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, yenassa paribhuttena aphāsu hoti, so sabhāgassa bhikkhuno taṃ datvā tassa hatthato sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathābalasantoso. Aparo bahuṃ paṇītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, so taṃ cīvaraṃ viya cirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhagilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ vā sesakaṃ piṇḍāya vā caritvā missakāhāraṃ bhuñjantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,比丘得到住处,不论合意还是不合意,他对它既不生起欢喜,也不生起嗔恨,哪怕只有一堆草铺在地上,他也随所得而满足。这是他对住处的随得满足。如果比丘得到与自己的体质不合或与病情不合的住处,住在那里感到不舒服,他就把那个住处让给同分的比丘,自己住在那位比丘所有的适宜住处,也依然满足。这是他对住处的随力满足。另有一种有大福德的人,得到岩洞、殿堂、楼阁等许多精美的住处,他把这些像衣服等物品一样,布施给久出家的人、多闻的人、少有所得的人、生病的人,然后无论住在哪里,也依然满足。这是他对住处的随宜满足。又有比丘这样思惟:所谓最上的住处,正是让人放逸的地方,坐在那里昏沉睡眠就会袭来,被睡眠压倒后,再醒来时恶念就会现起。因此,即使得到了那样的住处也不接受;他拒绝之后,即使住在露天、树下等处,也依然满足。这也是他对住处的随宜满足。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu senāsanaṃ labhati manāpaṃ vā amanāpaṃ vā, so tena neva somanassaṃ, na paṭighaṃ uppādeti, antamaso tiṇasantharakenapi yathāladdheneva tussati. Ayamassa senāsane yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā senāsanaṃ labhati, yatthassa vasato aphāsu hoti, so taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa santake sappāyasenāsane vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa senāsane yathābalasantoso. Aparo mahāpuñño leṇamaṇḍapakūṭāgārādīni bahūni paṇītasenāsanāni labhati, so tāni cīvarādīni viya cirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhagilānānaṃ datvā yattha katthaci vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso. Yopi ‘‘uttamasenāsanaṃ nāma pamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tattha nisinnassa thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, niddābhibhūtassa puna paṭibujjhato pāpavitakkā pātubhavantī’’ti paṭisañcikkhitvā tādisaṃ senāsanaṃ pattampi na sampaṭicchati, so taṃ paṭikkhipitvā abbhokāsarukkhamūlādīsu vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayampissa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,比丘得到药,不论是粗劣的还是精美的,他对自己所得到的就感到满足,不再希求别的,即使能得到更好的也不接受。这是他对病缘资具的随得满足。
如果一位比丘需要油,却得到了糖蜜,他就把糖蜜给一位相应的比丘,从那位比丘手里拿到油,或者另外去找药来配制,也照样感到满足。这是他对病缘资具的随力满足。
另一位有大福德的人,得到许多油、蜜、糖蜜等精美药品,他就像对待衣服那样,把这些布施给出家已久的人、多闻的人、所得微少的人、生病的人,然后靠他们拿来的不管什么药维持下去,也照样感到满足。
又有人在一个容器里放了牛尿诃子,在另一个容器里放了四蜜药,别人对他说“尊者,您想要哪个就拿哪个”,如果他的病靠其中任何一种都能平息,他就会想“牛尿诃子可是诸佛等所赞叹的”,于是拒绝四蜜药,只用牛尿诃子来治病,成为最上的满足者。这是他对病缘资具的随适合满足。
应当知道,这样按随得等来分,满足有三种差别;按四种资具来分,则共有十二种。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu bhesajjaṃ labhati lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so yaṃ labhati, teneva tussati aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana telena atthiko phāṇitaṃ labhati, so taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa hatthato telaṃ gahetvā aññadeva vā pariyesitvā bhesajjaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathābalasantoso. Aparo mahāpuñño bahuṃ telamadhuphāṇitādipaṇītabhesajjaṃ labhati, so taṃ cīvaraṃ viya cirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhagilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ ābhatena yena kenaci yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Yo pana ekasmiṃ bhājane muttaharītakaṃ ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ catumadhuraṃ ‘‘gaṇha, bhante, yadicchasī’’ti vuccamāno sacassa tesu aññatarenapi rogo vūpasammati, atha ‘‘muttaharītakaṃ nāma buddhādīhi vaṇṇita’’nti catumadhuraṃ paṭikkhipitvā muttaharītakeneva bhesajjaṃ karonto paramasantuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathāsāruppasantoso. Evaṃ yathālābhādivasena tippabhedo santoso catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ vasena dvādasavidho hotīti veditabbo.
依欲寻、嗔恚寻、害寻而说,即是三种不善寻。依出离寻、无嗔恚寻、无害寻而说,即是三种善寻。所谓“一切烦恼损减、趋向还灭”,即是指作为贪等一切烦恼损减之因的涅槃界。八种精进事的圆满,即是八种精进发动之因的圆满。因为,最初生起的策励,会相应地成为之后精进发动之因。应当知道,与适当审察相伴的策励,或以那策励为根本的审察,即是八种精进事。正如——巴利
Kāmavitakkabyāpādavitakkavihiṃsāvitakkānaṃ vasena akusalavitakkattayaṃ. Nekkhammavitakkaabyāpādavitakkaavihiṃ sāvitakkānaṃ vasena kusalavitakkattayaṃ. Sabbakilesāpacayabhūtāya vivaṭṭāyāti rāgādisabbakilesānaṃ apacayahetubhūtāya nibbānadhātuyā. Aṭṭhavīriyārambhavatthupāripūriyāti aṭṭhannaṃ vīriyārambhakāraṇānaṃ pāripūriyā. Yathā tathā paṭhamaṃ pavattaabbhussahanañhi upari vīriyārambhassa kāraṇaṃ hoti. Anurūpapaccavekkhaṇāsahitāni hi abbhussahanāni tammūlakāni vā paccavekkhaṇāni aṭṭha vīriyārambhavatthūnīti veditabbāni. Tathā hi –
我会有一件该做的事要去做,可是在做那件事的时候,不容易把心放在诸佛的教法上。来吧,我要发起精进,为了达到还没达到的,获得还没获得的,证悟还没证悟的。我已经做完了那件事,可是在做那件事的时候,我没能把心放在诸佛的教法上。来吧,我要发起精进……我要走一段路,可是在走路的时候,不容易把心放在诸佛的教法上。来吧,我要发起精进……我已经走完了那段路,可是在走路的时候,我没能把心放在诸佛的教法上。来吧,我要发起精进……我到村落或城镇去乞食,没有得到足够分量的粗食或美食来吃饱,我的身体轻快、适合做事。来吧,我要发起精进……我到村落或城镇去乞食,得到了足够分量的粗食或美食来吃饱,我的身体强壮、适合做事。来吧,我要发起精进……我生起了一点小病,而这种情况是可能发生的:我的病会加重。来吧,我要发起精进……我刚从病中痊愈,病好没多久,而这种情况是可能发生的:我的病会复发。来吧,我要发起精进,为了达到还没达到的,获得还没获得的,证悟还没证悟的。巴利
‘‘Kammaṃ kho me kattabbaṃ bhavissati, kammaṃ kho pana me karontena na sukaraṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ manasi kātuṃ, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Ahaṃ kho kammaṃ akāsiṃ, kammaṃ kho panāhaṃ karonto nāsakkhiṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ manasi kātuṃ, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, maggaṃ kho pana me gacchantena na sukaraṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ manasi kātuṃ, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho maggaṃ agamāsiṃ, maggaṃ kho panāhaṃ gacchanto nāsakkhiṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ manasi kātuṃ, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya caranto nālatthaṃ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṃ pāripūriṃ, tassa me kāyo lahuko kammañño, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya caranto alatthaṃ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṃ pāripūriṃ, tassa me kāyo balavā kammañño, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… uppanno kho me ayaṃ appamattako ābādho, ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati, yaṃ me ābādho pavaḍḍheyya, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā, ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati, yaṃ me ābādho paccudāvatteyya, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.335; a. ni. 8.80) –
像这样,与生起方式相应的审察相伴的策励,或者以那策励为根本的审察,就叫做八种精进事。巴利
Evaṃ pavattaanurūpapaccavekkhaṇāsahitāni abbhussahanāni tammūlakāni vā paccavekkhaṇāni aṭṭha vīriyārambhavatthūni nāma.
“与那相称、与那随顺”在这里,“那”这个词既指向将要说的,也指向已经过去的,所以说“现在将要制定学处”等等。因为一切代词既可以是将要说的语句,也可以是已经过去的语句。“与防护和断除相应”,就是与五种防护以及五种断除相应。防护有五种:戒防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护。断除也有五种:彼分断除、镇伏断除、正断断除、止息断除、出离断除。巴利
Tadanucchavikaṃ tadanulomikanti ettha ta-saddo vakkhamānāpekkho ca atītāpekkho ca hotīti āha ‘‘yaṃ idāni sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessatī’’tiādi. Sabbanāmāni hi vakkhamānavacanānipi honti pakkantavacanānipi. Saṃvarappahānapaṭisaṃyuttanti pañcasaṃvarehi ceva pañcapahānehi ca paṭisaṃyuttaṃ. Pañcavidho hi saṃvaro sīlasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti. Pahānampi pañcavidhaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nissaraṇappahānanti.
在这里,“以这个巴帝摩卡律仪而具足、圆满具足”这样说的巴帝摩卡律仪,就叫戒律仪,它的实际含义是身体和语言上都不违犯。“守护眼根,在眼根上实行防护”这样说的根守护,叫念律仪,它的实际含义就是如此生起的念本身。“我说诸漏的防护,这些以慧关闭”这样说的智律仪。这里先说“我说诸漏的防护”,后说“这些以慧关闭”;因此,这智慧能断除被称为“漏”的渴爱、邪见、恶行、无明等烦恼,由于它具有关闭的作用,所以被称为律仪。“能忍受寒、热”这样说的安忍,叫忍律仪,它的实际含义就是如此生起的蕴或无嗔。有人说这是“慧”,那不应采纳。“不忍受已生起的欲寻”这样说的、以去除欲寻等而运行的精进本身,就是精进律仪。所有这些律仪,由于对各自应当防护的对象——也就是被称为恶戒的身语恶行、被称为失念的放逸,或者贪欲等、不忍、无知、懈怠——加以防护、关闭、遮盖,所以被称为“律仪”。防护就是律仪,意思是关闭、阻止、不让它生起。在这里,所谓防护,就是在条件具足时,对可能生起的身恶行等,以各种方式不让它们生起。以上就是应当理解的五种律仪。巴利
Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto’’ti (vibha. 511) evamāgato pātimokkhasaṃvaro sīlasaṃvaro nāma, so ca atthato kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo. ‘‘Rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.213; ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) evamāgatā indriyārakkhā satisaṃvaro, sā ca atthato tathāpavattā sati eva. ‘‘Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti (su. ni. 1041; netti. 11) evamāgato ñāṇasaṃvaro. Ettha hi ‘‘sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti vacanato sotasaṅkhātānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritaavijjādikilesānaṃ samucchedakañāṇaṃ pidahanaṭṭhena saṃvaroti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassā’’tievamāgatā (ma. ni. 1.24; ma. ni. 3.159; a. ni. 4.114) adhivāsanā khantisaṃvaro, sā ca atthato tathāpavattā khandhā adoso vā. Paññāti eke, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.26) evamāgataṃ kāmavitakkādīnaṃ vinodanavasena pavattaṃ vīriyameva vīriyasaṃvaro. Sabbo cāyaṃ saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ dussīlyasaṅkhātānaṃ kāyavacīduccaritānaṃ muṭṭhassaccasaṅkhātassa pamādassa abhijjhādīnaṃ vā akkhanti aññāṇakosajjānañca saṃvaraṇato pidahanato chādanato ‘‘saṃvaro’’ti vuccati. Saṃvaratīti saṃvaro, pidahati nivāreti pavattituṃ na detīti attho. Paccayasamavāye uppajjanārahānaṃ kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ tathā tathā anuppādanameva hi idha saṃvaraṇaṃ nāma. Evaṃ tāva pañcavidho saṃvaro veditabbo.
以这样的每一种功德分,断除对应的每一种过失分,这就是“彼分断”。因为在名色分别等内观智中,由于具有对治法的性质,就像用灯光破除黑暗一样:以名色确定来断除有身见,以缘的把握来断除无因见和不正因见,以之后生起的度疑来断除犹豫不决的状态,以聚的观照来断除“我、我所”的执取,以道与非道的确定来断除在非道上生起道的想,以生的随观来断除断见,以灭的随观来断除常见,以怖畏的随观来断除在可怕的事物上生起不可怕的想法等等——依照这样的方式,以每一种内观智断除对应的每一种过失分,应当知道这就是“彼分断”。其次,以近行定和安止定所区分的定,由于阻止了心的转起,就像用瓶击打水面上的浮萍一样,断除那些盖等法,这叫做“镇伏断”。镇伏本身就是断,所以叫“镇伏断”。由于修习四种圣道,在各道者的自身相续中,以“为了断除诸邪见”等(《法集论》277)的方式所说的、属于集谛一方的烦恼群,以毕竟不再生起的方式断除,这叫做“正断断”。而在果位刹那,烦恼的止息、寂静状态,这叫做“止息断”。由于出离一切有为法、断除一切有为法的涅槃,这叫做“出离断”。这一切也都以舍离的意义而称为“断”。如此,应当知道,与上述这些律仪以及这些“断”相应的法教,就是“律仪断相应”。巴利
Tena tena guṇaṅgena tassa tassa aguṇaṅgassa pahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ. Nāmarūpaparicchedādīsu hi vipassanāñāṇesu paṭipakkhabhāvato dīpālokeneva tamassa nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīnaṃ, tasseva aparabhāge uppannena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathībhāvassa, kalāpasammasanena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti gāhassa, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhaye abhayasaññāyātiādinā nayena tena tena vipassanāñāṇena tassa tassa aguṇaṅgassa pahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānanti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattinivāraṇato ghaṭappahāreneva udakapiṭṭhe sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, etaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ nāma. Vikkhambhanameva pahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ. Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato attano santāne ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 277) nayena vuttassa samudayapakkhiyassa kilesagaṇassa accantaṃ appavattibhāvena pahānaṃ, idaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ vūpasantatā kilesānaṃ, etaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pahīnasabbasaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ, etaṃ nissaraṇappahānaṃ nāma. Sabbampi cetaṃ cāgaṭṭhena pahānanti vuccati. Evamimehi yathāvuttasaṃvarehi ceva pahānehi ca paṭisaṃyuttā dhammadesanā ‘‘saṃvarappahānapaṭisaṃyuttā’’ti veditabbā.
“不附属于经藏”的意思是:没有系属于诸经,没有被编入圣典。因为零散开示的法义不入结集。为了阐明这个已经说过的意思,所以他说“脱离圣典”。或者,“不附属于经藏”是就它没有被编入经藏和论藏圣典而言,“脱离圣典”是就它没有被编入律藏圣典而言。所谓“中途插入的法教”,是指没有以智慧深入、而是在中途所说的法教,其用意在于拒绝,就像跋达离长老那样。因为将要前往、将要由此世去到彼世,所以叫“来世”,也就是他方世;“以轮回怖畏来警醒”是指:“如此,破戒者将在地狱等处受苦”这般地警醒。即使作长部篇幅、中部篇幅的法教,也不应说“在那刹那、在那片刻,世尊怎能作如此广大的法教”。因为只要世间大众说一句话,阿难长老就说八句话;而当阿难长老只说一句话时,世尊就说十六句话。以这种方法,在世间人发出一句话的刹那,世尊就说二十八句话。为什么?因为世尊的舌柔软,齿障善触,言语不滞,有分住行轻快,所以假如一位比丘问身随观,另一位问受随观,另一位问心随观,另一位问法随观,没有人会想“他问了这个,我要问这个”而看另一人一眼;即便如此,那些比丘的“这位先问,这位第二问”等提问次第,对于那样有智慧的人来说,仍可了知,因为微细的间隔可得。然而,诸佛的说法次第,他人根本不能了知,因为在一弹指顷的刹那中,有无数一百亿心的生起。以强弓射出的箭,在越过一肘四指长的棕榈影之前,世尊就已宣说十四种身随观、九种受随观、十六种心随观、五种法随观。且置这四种不谈,假如另外四人在四正勤、另外四人在四神足、另外四人在五根、另外四人在五力、另外四人在七觉支、另外四人在八圣道分上提问,世尊也会宣说。且置这八人不说,假如另外三十七人在菩提分法上提问,世尊也会在那时立即宣说。巴利
Asuttantavinibaddhanti suttantesu anibaddhaṃ, pāḷianāruḷhanti attho. Pakiṇṇakadhammadesanā hi saṅgahaṃ na ārohati. Vuttamevatthaṃ pakāsento āha ‘‘pāḷivinimutta’’nti. Atha vā asuttantavinibaddhanti suttābhidhammapāḷiṃ anāruḷhabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, pāḷivinimuttanti vinayapāḷiṃ anāruḷhabhāvaṃ sandhāya. Okkantikadhammadesanā nāma ñāṇena anupavisitvā antarā kathiyamānā dhammadesanā, paṭikkhipanādhippāyā bhaddālittherasadisā. Samparetabbato pecca gantabbato samparāyo, paraloko. Tattha bhavaṃ samparāyikaṃ. Vaṭṭabhayena tajjentoti ‘‘evaṃ dussīlā nirayādīsu dukkhaṃ pāpuṇantī’’ti tajjento. Dīghanikāyappamāṇampi majjhimanikāyappamāṇampi dhammadesanaṃ karotīti ‘‘tena khaṇena tena muhuttena kathaṃ bhagavā tāvamahantaṃ dhammadesanaṃ karotī’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Yāvatā hi lokiyamahājanā ekaṃ padaṃ kathenti, tāva ānandatthero aṭṭha padāni katheti. Ānandatthere pana ekaṃ padaṃ kathenteyeva bhagavā soḷasa padāni katheti. Iminā nayena lokiyajanassa ekapaduccāraṇakkhaṇe bhagavā aṭṭhavīsasataṃ padāni katheti. Kasmā? Bhagavato hi jivhā mudu, dantāvaraṇaṃ suphusitaṃ, vacanaṃ agaḷitaṃ, bhavaṅgaparivāso lahuko, tasmā sace eko bhikkhu kāyānupassanaṃ pucchati, añño vedanānupassanaṃ, añño cittānupassanaṃ, añño dhammānupassanaṃ, ‘‘iminā puṭṭhe ahaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti eko ekaṃ na oloketi, evaṃ santepi tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ paṭhamaṃ pucchi, ayaṃ dutiya’’ntiādinā pucchanavāro tādisassa paññavato paññāyati sukhumassa antarassa labbhanato. Buddhānaṃ pana desanāvāro aññesaṃ na paññāyateva accharāsaṅghātamatte khaṇe anekakoṭisahassacittappavattisambhavato. Daḷhadhammena dhanuggahena khittasarassa vidatthicaturaṅgulaṃ tālacchāyaṃ atikkamanato puretaraṃyeva bhagavā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanaṃ, navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ, soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ, pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ katheti. Tiṭṭhantu vā ete cattāro, sace hi aññe cattāro sammappadhānesu, aññe iddhipādesu, aññe pañcindriyesu, aññe pañcabalesu, aññe sattabojjhaṅgesu, aññe aṭṭhamaggaṅgesu pañhe puccheyyuṃ, tampi bhagavā katheyya. Tiṭṭhantu vā ete aṭṭha, sace aññe sattatiṃsa janā bodhipakkhiyesu pañhe puccheyyuṃ, tampi bhagavā tāvadeva katheyya.
应当知道:根本、依止、住立,是后一个对前一个的同义词。其中,住立是指以相应力和亲依止力而成为基础的状态。因为对那些称为学的其余善法来说,或者以离非梵行的相应力为住立,或者以亲依止力为住立。因此他说:因为淫欲防护……等等。依所说义,就是依住立、证得、方便之义。为了说明在学处分别中所阐释的离思及其相应法就是学处,他说:此义应依学处分别中所说的方法来了知。因为在学处分别中,离等诸法以直接方式和譬喻方式被说为学处。正如所说:巴利
Mūlaṃ nissayo patiṭṭhāti pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ paṭhamassa paṭhamassa vevacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha patiṭṭhāti sampayogavasena upanissayavasena ca okāsabhāvo. Sikkhāsaṅkhātānañhi avasesakusaladhammānaṃ methunaviratisampayogavasena vā patiṭṭhā siyā upanissayabhāvena vā. Tenevāha ‘‘methunasaṃvaro hī’’tiādi. Vuttatthavasenāti patiṭṭhāadhigamūpāyavasena. Sikkhāpadavibhaṅge niddiṭṭhaviraticetanā taṃsampayuttadhammā ca sikkhāpadanti dassetukāmo āha – ‘‘ayañca attho sikkhāpadavibhaṅge vuttanayena veditabbo’’ti. Sikkhāpadavibhaṅge hi viratiādayo dhammā nippariyāyato pariyāyato ca ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti vuttā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
在这里,什么是离欲邪行学处?当一个人远离欲邪行时,如果生起了欲界的善心,这个心伴随着喜悦,并且与智慧相应,那么,就在那个时候,对于欲邪行的远离、戒除、彻底戒除、离弃、不做、不造作、不违犯、不越界、断除桥梁,这就叫作离欲邪行学处。其余的那些法,都与这个远离相应。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṃ? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ kāmesumicchācārā viramantassa, yā tasmiṃ samaye kāmesumicchācārā ārati virati paṭivirati veramaṇī akiriyā akaraṇaṃ anajjhāpatti velānatikkamo setughāto, idaṃ vuccati kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṃ. Avasesā dhammā veramaṇiyā sampayuttā.
在这里,什么是离淫邪行学处?当远离淫邪行时,生起了与喜俱行、与智相应的欲界善心;在那时的思、思惟、思的状态,这称为离淫邪行学处。其余诸法与思相应。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṃ? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ kāmesumicchācārā viramantassa, yā tasmiṃ samaye cetanā sañcetanā cetayitattaṃ, idaṃ vuccati kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṃ. Avasesā dhammā cetanāya sampayuttā.
在这里,什么是离欲邪行学处?当一个人远离欲邪行时,生起了属于欲界的善心,这个善心伴随着喜悦,并且与智慧相应;就在那个时候,触……(中略)……努力、不散乱,这就叫作离欲邪行学处。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṃ? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ kāmesumicchācārā viramantassa, yo tasmiṃ samaye phasso…pe… paggāho avikkhepo, idaṃ vuccati kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpada’’nti (vibha. 706).
在这里,因为学处并不只是离,思本身也是学处,所以为了说明这一点,就说了第二种方式。又因为学处并不只是这两种法,与思相应的其余五十二种法,从应当修学的部分来说也是学处,所以说了第三种方式。学处其实有两种:直接意义上的学处和引申意义上的学处。其中,离是直接意义上的学处。因为它在巴利文中明确出现为“离杀生”,而不是思。而且,正在远离的人就是依靠这个离而远离各种事,不是依靠思;不过论中也把思引出来说明,同样也把其余与思相应的法引出来说明。因此应当知道,思以及其余相应的法,是引申意义上的学处。巴利
Ettha hi yasmā na kevalaṃ viratiyeva sikkhāpadaṃ, cetanāpi sikkhāpadameva, tasmā taṃ dassetuṃ dutiyanayo vutto. Yasmā ca na kevalaṃ eteyeva dve dhammā sikkhāpadaṃ, cetanāsampayuttā pana paropaṇṇāsa dhammāpi sikkhitabbakoṭṭhāsato sikkhāpadameva, tasmā tatiyanayo dassito. Duvidhañhi sikkhāpadaṃ nippariyāyasikkhāpadaṃ pariyāyasikkhāpadanti. Tattha virati nippariyāyasikkhāpadaṃ. Sā hi ‘‘pāṇātipātā veramaṇī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ āgatā, no cetanā. Viramanto ca tāya eva tato tato viramati, na cetanāya, cetanampi pana āharitvā dasseti, tathā sesacetanāsampayuttadhamme. Tasmā cetanā ceva avasesasampayuttadhammā ca pariyāyasikkhāpadanti veditabbaṃ.
现在不只是这里说的离杀生等法才是学处,其实阐明这些法之意义的制定(规定)也是学处,为了说明这一点,所以说了“复次”等话。有人说:“其中‘名身、句身’这一段,是出自《大注疏》。”名身就是名称的集合,也就是名称的概念施设。句、词、文都是名称的同义词,就像“名、名业、名说”等(《法集论》1313-1315)那样。学处的分类,说的就是离杀生等法,而阐明这些法之意义的话语也是学处,这一点在这里同样可以得到。巴利
Idāni na kevalaṃ idha viratiādayo dhammāva sikkhāpadaṃ, atha kho tadatthajotikā paññattipīti dassento āha ‘‘apicā’’tiādi. ‘‘Yo tattha nāmakāyo padakāyoti idaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti. Nāmakāyoti nāmasamūho nāmapaṇṇattiyeva. Padaniruttibyañjanāni nāmavevacanāneva ‘‘nāmaṃ nāmakammaṃ nāmaniruttī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1313-1315) viya. Sikkhākoṭṭhāsoti viratiādayova vuttā, tadatthajotakaṃ vacanampi sikkhāpadanti idampi ettha labbhateva.
“义利”是指增长上的殊胜、利益上的殊胜。不过,因为它们是制定学处的原因,所以世尊说“十种原因”,意思是十种原因的殊胜,因此说“利益殊胜”。或者说,“义利”就是义本身,十种义就是十种原因。又或者说,“义”是果,因为果依因而存在,所以把因称为“义利”;这里的含义也应当这样理解。“善哉,大王”这句话出自《入王宫学处》(《巴吉帝亚》494等)。因为经中说“凡认为我所说的应当听闻、应当相信的人,那对他们来说,将长久带来利益和安乐”,所以说“凡接受如来所说的话的人,那对他来说,将长久带来利益和安乐”。关于不接受的过患,则如《跋达离经》(《中部》2.134等)中那样,先指出不接受的过患。由于没有安乐住就没有共住,所以共住也被说成就是安乐住。所谓安乐住,就是行、住、坐、卧四种威仪的安适。巴利
Atthavaseti vuddhivisese ānisaṃsavisese. Tesaṃ pana sikkhāpadapaññattikāraṇattā āha ‘‘dasa kāraṇavase’’ti, dasa kāraṇaviseseti attho. Tenāha ‘‘hitavisese’’ti. Atthoyeva vā atthavaso, dasa atthe dasa kāraṇānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā attho phalaṃ tadadhīnavuttitāya vaso etassāti atthavaso, hetūti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Suṭṭhu devāti idaṃ rājantepurappavesanasikkhāpade (pāci. 494 ādayo) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ye mama sotabbaṃ saddahātabbaṃ maññissanti, tesaṃ taṃ assa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘yo ca tathāgatassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchati, tassa taṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Asampaṭicchane ādīnavanti bhaddālisutte (ma. ni. 2.134 ādayo) viya asampaṭicchane ādīnavaṃ dassetvā. Sukhavihārābhāve sahajīvamānassa abhāvato sahajīvitāpi sukhavihārova vutto. Sukhavihāro nāma catunnaṃ iriyāpathavihārānaṃ phāsutā.
“Maṅkuta”指的是没有精神、没有光彩的状态。“以法”等句里,“法”指真实的事。“律”指举罪和忆念。“师教”指白文和甘马语的圆满。“喜爱戒的人”指想要修学的人,因为对他们来说戒是可爱的。所以文中说“为圆满三种学而精勤的人”。“现前”指生起疑惑。“被逼迫”指被压迫。“僧团行事”应当理解为:伍波萨他和自恣虽然也是僧团行事,但这里按照“牛与公牛”的比喻,是把伍波萨他和自恣排除在外,只取达上等其他僧团行事。和合的状态就是和合。巴利
Maṅkutanti nittejabhāvaṃ. Dhammenātiādīsu dhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthu. Vinayoti codanā ceva sāraṇā ca. Satthusāsananti ñattisampadā ceva anussāvanasampadā ca. Piyasīlānanti sikkhākāmānaṃ. Tesañhi sīlaṃ piyaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘sikkhattayapāripūriyā ghaṭamānā’’ti. Sandiṭṭhamānāti saṃsayaṃ āpajjamānā. Ubbāḷhā hontīti pīḷitā honti. Saṅghakammānīti satipi uposathapavāraṇānaṃ saṅghakammabhāve gobalibaddañāyena uposathaṃ pavāraṇañca ṭhapetvā upasampadādisesasaṅghakammānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Samaggānaṃ bhāvo sāmaggī.
“春达,我不是只为防护现世的漏而说法。”(《长部》3.182)在这里,作为争论根源的烦恼,就是所说的“漏”。巴利
‘‘Na vo ahaṃ, cunda, diṭṭhadhammikānaṃyeva āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya dhammaṃ desemī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.182) ettha vivādamūlabhūtā kilesā āsavāti āgatā.
“ 凭此我愿生天,或作乾闼婆、或为飞鸟;
凭此我愿成夜叉,亦能投生为人。
我的这些漏已经断尽,已被摧毁,已被消灭。”巴利
‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo; Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje; Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36) –
在这里,三地的业以及其余的不善法(称为漏)。但此处说的是:诽谤他人、追悔、杀害、束缚等,以及作为恶趣之苦的种种灾祸,这些就是漏,所以经中说“住于不防护的人,就在同一个生命体中就会遭受”等等。如果世尊不制定学处,那么由于从事非法行为、不与取、杀生等原因,就会产生诽谤他人等现世的种种祸害;而因为同样的原因投生到地狱等处,以五种系缚、刑罚等方式承受大苦的种种祸害——针对这些,才说了“为了防护现世的漏,为了对治来世的漏”。现世就是指眼前这个生命体,存在于这个生命体中的就是现世的(漏),所以说“就在同一个生命体中就会遭受”。当面呵责是恶名,背后呵责是恶誉。或者也可以这样理解:当面和背后的呵责是恶名,失去随从眷属是恶誉。为了关闭来路之门:来世是死后要去的地方,所以叫来世,也就是他世,因此说“来世即地狱等”。淫欲等是染着的依处,杀生等是损害的依处。巴利
Ettha tebhūmakaṃ kammaṃ avasesā ca akusalā dhammā. Idha pana parūpavādavippaṭisāravadhabandhādayo ceva apāyadukkhabhūtā ca nānappakārā upaddavā āsavāti āha – ‘‘asaṃvare ṭhitena tasmiṃyeva attabhāve pattabbā’’tiādi. Yadi hi bhagavā sikkhāpadaṃ na paññapeyya, tato asaddhammapaṭisevanaadinnādānapāṇātipātādihetu ye uppajjeyyuṃ parūpavādādayo diṭṭhadhammikā nānappakārā anatthā, ye ca taṃnimittameva nirayādīsu nibbattassa pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇādivasena mahādukkhānubhavananānappakārā anatthā, te sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyā’’ti. Diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkho attabhāvo , tattha bhavā diṭṭhadhammikā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmiṃyeva attabhāve pattabbā’’ti. Sammukhā garahaṇaṃ akitti, parammukhā garahaṇaṃ ayaso. Atha vā sammukhā parammukhā ca garahaṇaṃ akitti, parivārahāni ayasoti veditabbaṃ. Āgamanamaggathakanāyāti āgamanadvārapidahanatthāya. Samparetabbato pecca gantabbato samparāyo, paralokoti āha ‘‘samparāye narakādīsū’’ti. Methunādīni rajjanaṭṭhānāni, pāṇātipātādīni dussanaṭṭhānāni.
所谓十四种犍度行仪,是指在《行仪犍度》里所说的:客比丘行仪、常住比丘行仪、出行比丘行仪、随喜行仪、食堂行仪、乞食行仪、阿兰若行仪、住处行仪、温室行仪、厕所行仪、和尚行仪、共住弟子行仪、阿阇梨行仪、门徒行仪——这十四种行仪。除此之外,还有一些只在受到呵责甘马等特定时候才应当行的八十二种大行仪,它们并不是在任何情况下都应当行,所以不算在十四种犍度行仪里面。不过,那些行仪从“我要为别住比丘制定行仪”(《小品》75等)开始,一直到“不应授具足戒……中略……不应在地上经行时经行”(《小品》76)为止,所说的有六十六种。此后,从“诸比丘,别住比丘不应与较年长的别住比丘、应退回本初者、应行敬悦者、正行敬悦者、应出罪者共住同一覆处”(《小品》82)等文句所说的行仪,因为与清净比丘所应行的没有不同,所以不单独计算;但由于要依较年长的别住比丘等不同的人分别来行,就把它们按这些人归纳起来,每一种算作一种,共五种,这样总计七十一种行仪。在受举甘马者的行仪中所说的“不应接受清净比丘的问候、起迎……中略……沐浴时的擦背服务”(《小品》75),这“不接受问候等”算一种;“不应以戒坏而诽谤清净比丘”等(《小品》51)有十种,这样加起来就是八十二种行仪。不过,在这些当中,有些是呵责甘马等行仪,有些是别住等行仪,由于没有把未取的和已取的分开计算,所以就是八十二种;而在其他注疏的地方,稍有增减并不计入数目,因此说“八十种犍度行仪”。巴利
Cuddasa khandhakavattāni nāma vattakkhandhake vuttāni āgantukavattaṃ āvāsikagamikaanumodanabhattaggapiṇḍacārikaāraññikasenāsanajantāgharavaccakuṭiupajjhāyasaddhivihārikaācariyaantevāsikavattanti imāni cuddasa vattāni. Tato aññāni pana kadāci tajjanīyakammakatādikāleyeva caritabbāni dveasīti mahāvattāni, na sabbāsu avatthāsu caritabbāni, tasmā cuddasakhandhakavattesu agaṇitāni, tāni pana ‘‘pārivāsikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vattaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti (cūḷava. 75 ādayo) ārabhitvā ‘‘na upasampādetabbaṃ…pe… na chamāyaṃ caṅkamante caṅkame caṅkamitabba’’nti (cūḷava. 76) vuttāvasānāni chasaṭṭhi, tato paraṃ ‘‘na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ, mūlāyapaṭikassanārahena, mānattārahena, mānattacārikena, abbhānārahena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne āvāse vatthabba’’ntiādinā (cūḷava. 82) vuttavattāni pakatattacaritabbehi anaññattā visuṃ agaṇetvā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarādīsu puggalantaresu caritabbattā tesaṃ vasena sampiṇḍetvā ekekaṃ katvā gaṇitāni pañcāti ekasattati vattāni, ukkhepanīyakammakatavattesu vuttaṃ ‘‘na pakatattassa bhikkhuno abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ…pe… nahāne piṭṭhiparikammaṃ sāditabba’’nti (cūḷava. 75) idaṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ asādiyanaṃ ekaṃ, ‘‘na pakatatto bhikkhu sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṃsetabbo’’tiādīni (cūḷava. 51) dasāti evametāni dvāsīti vattāni. Etesveva pana kānici tajjanīyakammādivattāāni, kānici pārivāsikādivattānīti aggahitaggahaṇena dvāsīti eva, aññattha pana aṭṭhakathāpadese appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti ‘‘asīti khandhakavattānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“防护之律”是指:戒防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护这五种防护。它们各自守护应当守护的、调伏应当调伏的身恶行等,因为守护所以叫“防护”,因为调伏所以叫“律”。“断除之律”是指:彼分断、镇伏断、正断、止息断、出离断这五种断。因为以舍离为义所以是“断”,以调伏为义所以是“律”,因此叫“断除之律”。“止息之律”是指七种灭诤法。“制定之律”就是指学处本身。因为学处已经制定,学处才得以成立,所以“制定之律”也被学处的制定所包含。巴利
Saṃvaravinayoti sīlasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidhopi saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ vinetabbānañca kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato saṃvaro, vinayanato vinayoti vuccati. Pahānavinayoti tadaṅgappahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nissaraṇappahānanti pañcavidhampi pahānaṃ yasmā cāgaṭṭhena pahānaṃ , vinayanaṭṭhena vinayo, tasmā pahānavinayoti vuccati. Samathavinayoti satta adhikaraṇasamathā. Paññattivinayoti sikkhāpadameva. Sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hi vijjamānāya eva sikkhāpadasambhavato paññattivinayopi sikkhāpadapaññattiyā anuggahito hoti.
对僧团有好处,就是让僧团安乐;让僧团安乐,就是为了压制那些难以调伏的人;压制那些难以调伏的人,就是为了让善良的比丘们安乐而住;让善良的比丘们安乐而住,就是为了防护现世的漏;防护现世的漏,就是为了消除来世的漏;消除来世的漏,就是为了让未生信心的人生起信心;让未生信心的人生起信心,就是为了让已生信心的人信心增长;让已生信心的人信心增长,就是为了正法久住;正法久住,就是为了护持律。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, yaṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, taṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya, yaṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya, taṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, yaṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, taṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya, yaṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya, taṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya, yaṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya, taṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya, yaṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya, taṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, yaṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, taṃ vinayānuggahāya.
凡是僧伽认为好的,就是僧伽的安乐;凡是僧伽认为好的,就是为了压制无耻之人;凡是僧伽认为好的,就是为了让善良的比丘们安住安乐;凡是僧伽认为好的,就是为了防护现世的漏;凡是僧伽认为好的,就是为了消除来世的漏;凡是僧伽认为好的,就是为了让未生信心的人生起信心;凡是僧伽认为好的,就是为了让已生信心的人信心增长;凡是僧伽认为好的,就是为了正法久住;凡是僧伽认为好的,就是为了护持戒律。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ vinayānuggahāya.
凡是让僧团安住的,就是为了折伏无耻之人;凡是让僧团安住的,就是为了让善良比丘们安乐而住;凡是让僧团安住的,就是为了防护现世的漏;凡是让僧团安住的,就是为了消除来世的漏;凡是让僧团安住的,就是为了让未生信心的人生起信心;凡是让僧团安住的,就是为了让已生信心的人更加增长;凡是让僧团安住的,就是为了正法久住;凡是让僧团安住的,就是为了护持戒律;凡是让僧团安住的,就是为了僧团的完善。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ vinayānuggahāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ saṅghasuṭṭhutāya.
为了折伏那些无惭无愧的人……(中略)……为了让善良的比丘们安乐而住……(中略)……为了防护现世的漏……(中略)……为了消除来世的漏……(中略)……为了让未生信心的人生起信心……(中略)……为了让已生信心的人信心增长……(中略)……为了正法久住……(中略)……为了护持律,就是为了僧伽的清净;为了僧伽的清净,就是为了僧伽的安乐;为了僧伽的安乐,就是为了折伏那些无惭无愧的人;为了折伏那些无惭无愧的人,就是为了让善良的比丘们安乐而住;为了让善良的比丘们安乐而住,就是为了防护现世的漏;为了防护现世的漏,就是为了消除来世的漏;为了消除来世的漏,就是为了让未生信心的人生起信心;为了让未生信心的人生起信心,就是为了让已生信心的人信心增长;为了让已生信心的人信心增长,就是为了正法久住。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya…pe… yaṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya…pe… yaṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya…pe… yaṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya…pe… yaṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya…pe… yaṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya…pe… yaṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā…pe… yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saṅghasuṭṭhutāya , yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saṅghaphāsutāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā (pari. 334).
“ 一百种义理,一百种法,还有两百种言辞表达。
在《义释》这部论书里,有四百种智。”巴利
‘‘Atthasataṃ dhammasataṃ, dve ca niruttisatāni; Cattāri ñāṇasatāni, atthavase pakaraṇe’’ti (pari. 334) –
为了说明《附随》里所说的内容,就说了“复次,在此”等话。巴利
Yaṃ vuttaṃ parivāre, taṃ dassento ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,按照“凡是僧伽所善净的,就是僧伽的安乐;凡是僧伽的安乐,就是为了折伏无惭之人”这样依次所说的内容,因为把相邻和相邻的句子与上面一句一句连接起来,像锁链一样环环相扣,所以称为“锁链理趣”。作锁链理趣,就是连接的意思。像“凡是僧伽所善净的,就是僧伽的安乐;凡是僧伽所善净的,就是为了折伏无惭之人”这样,在十个句子中,把每一句和其余九句一一连接起来所说的内容,就是所说的“以每一句为根本,作十次连接”。巴利
Tattha ‘‘yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’ti iminā anukkamena yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ sandhāya āsannāsannapadānaṃ uparūparipadehi saddhiṃ yojitattā saṅkhalikabandhanasadisattā ‘‘saṅkhalikanaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Saṅkhalikanayaṃ katvāti sambandho. ‘‘Yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’ti evamādinā dasasu padesu ekamekaṃ padaṃ tadavasesehi navanavapadehi yojetvā yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekekapadamūlikaṃ dasakkhattuṃ yojanaṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ.
在“义百”等说法中,先按锁链法来说:应当以前一句一句为依据,了知“法百”;以后一句一句为依据,看待“义百”。这是怎么说的呢?虽然在《附随》里,只按锁链法说了“凡对僧伽善,即对僧伽乐”这样的断轮,但依同样的道理,也给出了结轮的方法。所以,说了“凡对僧伽善,即对僧伽乐”等之后,再连接“凡有助于律者,即对僧伽善”,构成结轮。同样,说了“凡对僧伽乐,即为折伏恶人”等之后,也连接“凡有助于律者,即对僧伽善;凡对僧伽善,即对僧伽乐”,构成结轮。按这个次第一步步连接其余各句时,依锁链法就有十个结轮。其中每一个轮里,以前前句为依据各有十法,以后后句为依据各有十义。这样,在锁链法中便成就了义百与法百。可是在一根本法里,“凡对僧伽善,即对僧伽乐;凡对僧伽善,即为折伏恶人”这样,只是一句与其余九句相连。因为前句只有一句,所以只有一法句,而有九义句。因此,在一根本法中,于十处各取一句为根本,作十次连接时,依法句有十法句,依义句有九十义句,所以不能成就义百与法百。因此,在一根本法中,不采用锁链法所说的义百与法百,而是把其中依十法句与九十义句所成的百句,全部作为“法百”来取;再按注释中为阐明其义所说的“对僧伽善”等义句,作为“义百”来取。这样取时,义百与法百便成就了。先应这样了知义百与法百。至于“二语百”,这里应知道:依阐明义的语词有语百,依法本身的语词有语百,这样共有二语百。“四百智”则是:在义百中有百智,在法百中有百智,在二语百中有二百智,合计四百智。巴利
Atthasatantiādīsu saṅkhalikanaye tāva purimapurimapadānaṃ vasena dhammasataṃ veditabbaṃ, pacchimapacchimānaṃ vasena atthasataṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Kiñcāpi parivāre ‘‘yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsū’’tiādinā saṅkhalikanaye khaṇḍacakkameva vuttaṃ, tathāpi teneva nayena baddhacakkassapi nayo dinno, tasmā ‘‘yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsū’’tiādiṃ vatvā ‘‘yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saṅghasuṭṭhū’’ti yojetvā baddhacakkaṃ kātabbaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’tiādiṃ vatvāpi ‘‘yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsū’’ti yojetvā baddhacakkaṃ kātabbaṃ. Iminā anukkamena sesapadesupi yojitesu saṅkhalikanayena dasa baddhacakkāni honti. Tesu ekekasmiṃ cakke purimapurimapadānaṃ vasena dasa dasa dhammā, pacchimapacchimapadānaṃ vasena dasa dasa atthāti saṅkhalikanaye atthasataṃ dhammasatañca sampajjati. Ekamūlakanaye pana ‘‘yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’ti evamādinā ekameva padaṃ sesehi navahi padehi yojitanti purimapadassa ekattā ekameva dhammapadaṃ naveva atthapadāni honti, tasmā ekamūlakanaye dasasu padesu ekamekaṃ mūlaṃ katvā dasakkhattuṃ yojanāya katāya dhammapadānaṃ vasena dhammapadāni dasa, atthapadāni navutīti atthasataṃ dhammasatañca na sampajjati, tasmā ekamūlakanaye saṅkhalikanaye vuttanayena atthasataṃ dhammasatañca aggahetvā yaṃ tattha dasadhammapadānaṃ navutiatthapadānañca vasena padasataṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ dhammasatanti gahetvā tadatthajotanavasena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttāni saṅghasuṭṭhubhāvādīni atthapadāni atthasatanti evaṃ gahite atthasataṃ dhammasatañca sampajjati. Evaṃ tāva atthasataṃ dhammasatañca veditabbaṃ. Dve ca niruttisatānīti ettha pana atthajotikānaṃ niruttīnaṃ vasena niruttisataṃ, dhammabhūtānaṃ niruttīnaṃ vasena niruttisatanti dve niruttisatāni ca veditabbāni. Cattāri ñāṇasatānīti atthasate ñāṇasataṃ, dhammasate ñāṇasataṃ, dvīsu niruttisatesu dve ñāṇasatānīti cattāri ñāṇasatāni.
这里说“诸比丘,如是当诵”时,其中的“ca”字要按错开次序来连接,所以注释说“且当诵”。那么,这里说“当诵”时,怎么会有“应当学得”等含义呢?因此说“这里的‘ca’字有引出额外含义的作用”。把已经说过的含义之外的额外含义引出来,就叫“引出额外”;这个字具有这种含义,所以叫“有引出额外含义的作用”,也就是说它表示“把未说到的也总括进来”。因为前面已经说了“不共住”,所以这里说“坚固作”。巴利
Evañca pana, bhikkhaveti ettha ca-saddo bhinnakkamena yojetabboti āha ‘‘uddiseyyātha cā’’ti. Kathaṃ panettha ‘‘uddiseyyāthā’’ti vutte pariyāpuṇeyyāthātiādi atthasambhavoti āha ‘‘atirekānayanattho hi ettha ca-saddo’’ti. Vuttatthato atirekassa atthassa ānayanaṃ atirekānayanaṃ, so attho etassāti atirekānayanattho, avuttasamuccayatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Asaṃvāso’’ti vuttattā ‘‘daḷhaṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ.
猕猴譬喻故事的注释巴利
Makkaṭivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
40 40. 不显句的解释。“显”就是明显;与它相反的就是“不显”,即不明显、不常见、难以理解。对不显的句子所作的解释,就叫不显句的解释。因为显句的解释没有特别的需要,所以只取“不显”来说。“常习近”就是多多习近,意思是每天不间断地习近。这里用的是现在时语,是依多数情况而说的,就像“这里末罗族人打仗”等说法一样,即使并非一切时候都在习近,也是依多数情况而用现在时语。“游行”就是到处走动。“于其他”就是对于其他比丘。巴利
40.Anuttānapadavaṇṇanāti uttānaṃ vuccati pākaṭaṃ, tappaṭipakkhena anuttānaṃ apākaṭaṃ appacuraṃ duviññeyyañca, anuttānānaṃ padānaṃ vaṇṇanā anuttānapadavaṇṇanā. Uttānapadavaṇṇanāya payojanābhāvato anuttānaggahaṇaṃ. Pacurapaṭisevano hotīti bahulapaṭisevano hoti, divase divase nirantaraṃ paṭisevatīti attho. Pacuratthe hi vattamānavacananti sabbadā paṭisevanābhāvepi ‘‘iha mallā yujjhantī’’tiādīsu viya bāhullavuttiṃ upādāya vattamānavacanaṃ. Āhiṇḍantāti vicarantā. Aññesupīti aññesupi bhikkhūsu.
41 第四十一:与物品一起被抓住,就是连同财物一道被捉住。有人出于自己的邪执,或者用诡辩、掩饰,把本来意义完整的初次制定另作解释,说:“但那是对人女说的,不是对畜生女说的。”见,指带着贪染的看。捉,指正是因贪染而用手抓取。触,只是用自己身体碰到她身体上面;摩,是比触更用力地摩擦;揉,又比摩更用力,用身体去挤压身体。那一切,就是指见等这一切。巴利
41.Sahoḍḍhaggahitoti saha bhaṇḍena gahito. Attano micchāgāhena lesaoḍḍanena vā paripuṇṇatthampi paṭhamapaññattiṃ aññathā karonto ‘‘tañca kho manussitthiyā, no tiracchānagatāyā’’ti āha. Dassananti sānurāgadassanaṃ. Gahaṇanti anurāgavaseneva hatthena gahaṇaṃ. Āmasanaṃ attano sarīrena tassā sarīrassa upari āmasanamattaṃ, phusanaṃ tato daḷhataraṃ katvā saṃphusanaṃ, ghaṭṭanaṃ tatopi daḷhataraṃ katvā sarīrena sarīrassa ghaṭṭanaṃ. Taṃ sabbampīti dassanādi sabbampi.
42 42.“他制定了更坚固的学处。”在这个部分里,为了把随制学处的加固和放松依照它们的关联分别展示出来,想说“学处确实有两种”等等,于是说了这些话。其中,对于有心的学处,如果它的心必定是不善的,那就是世间罪。对于兼具有心和无心两方面以及无心的学处,在有心的方面,心必定是不善的,比如饮酒等,那也是世间罪。为了把这一含义总摄起来展示,所以说“在有心的方面,心必定是不善的,那就叫世间罪”。这里说的“在有心的方面”这句话,是就无心的情况而说的。因为对于纯粹有心的学处来说,用“在有心的方面”这个限定并没有必要。而且,“在有心的方面”应当理解为以了知违犯事的心,而不是以了知制戒的心。如果以“不可做”的制戒了知心来说,凡是学处在有心的方面心必定是不善的,那也说是世间罪的话,那么一切制戒的学处就都成了世间罪,因为知道“不可做”却违犯时,也只有不善心生起。因为了知世尊的教诫却故意违犯的人,善心不会生起,只会以不恭敬而生起嗔心。巴利
42.Daḷhataraṃ sikkhāpadamakāsīti imasmiṃ adhikāre anupaññattiyā sikkhāpadassa daḷhīkaraṇaṃ sithilakaraṇañca pasaṅgato āpannaṃ vibhajitvā dassetukāmo ‘‘duvidhañhi sikkhāpada’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yassa sacittakassa sikkhāpadassa cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajjaṃ. Yassa sacittakācittakapakkhasahitassa acittakassa ca sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, tampi surāpānādi lokavajjanti imamatthaṃ sampiṇḍetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajjaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sacittakapakkhe’’ti hi idaṃ vacanaṃ acittakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Na hi ekaṃsato sacittakassa ‘‘sacittakapakkhe’’ti visesane payojanaṃ atthi. Sacittakapakkheti ca vatthuvītikkamavijānanacittena ‘‘sacittakapakkhe’’ti gahetabbaṃ, na paṇṇattivijānanacittena. Yadi hi ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti paṇṇattivijānanacittenapi yassa sikkhāpadassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva, tampi lokavajjanti vadeyya, sabbesaṃ paṇṇattivajjasikkhāpadānampi lokavajjatā āpajjeyya paṇṇattivajjānampi ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti jānitvā vītikkame akusalacittasseva sambhavato. Na hi bhagavato āṇaṃ jānitvā maddantassa kusalacittaṃ uppajjati anādariyavasena paṭighacittasseva uppajjanato.
另外,在这里要明白:由于有“在有心的这一类里,心一定是不善的”这句话,所以对于无心的学处,因为不了解具体事由,并不存在“在无心的这一类里,心一定是不善的”这个固定规则。因为如果对无心的学处来说,在无心这一类里心也一定是不善的,那么“在有心的这一类里”这个限定语就没有意义了。如果只说“谁的心是不善的,那就是世间所呵责的”,那么不知道是酒而喝的人,以及不知道是香、颜料等而涂抹那些东西的比丘尼们,即使没有不善心也会犯戒。这样一来,除了决定是不善的有心学处之外,饮酒等无心学处就不会是世间所呵责的了。正是为了把那些情况也包含进来,才说“谁在有心的这一类里,心一定是不善的,那就是世间所呵责的”。正因为如此,在《小结》和《中结》中说:“‘我要杀死这个有情’,却杀了躺在同一个地方的另一个有情,由于有情是共通的,所以同样构成杀生;同样,‘我要喝这种酒’,却喝了另一种酒,由于酒是共通的,所以心一定是不善的。然而,就像把蛇误认成木头而杀死,不构成杀生;同样,把酒误认成椰子汁而喝,心不是不善的。”巴利
Apicettha ‘‘sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevā’’ti vacanato acittakassa vatthuajānanavasena acittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevāti ayaṃ niyamo natthīti viññāyati. Yadi hi acittakassa acittakapakkhepi cittaṃ akusalameva siyā, ‘‘sacittakapakkhe’’ti idaṃ visesanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyā. ‘‘Yassa cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajja’’nti ettake vutte surāti ajānitvā pivantassa gandhavaṇṇakādibhāvaṃ ajānitvā tāni limpantīnaṃ bhikkhunīnañca vināpi akusalacittena āpattisambhavato ekantākusalaṃ sacittakasikkhāpadaṃ ṭhapetvā surāpānādiacittakasikkhāpadānaṃ lokavajjatā na siyāti tesampi saṅgaṇhatthaṃ ‘‘yassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajja’’nti vuttaṃ. Teneva cūḷagaṇṭhipade majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca vuttaṃ ‘‘etaṃ sattaṃ māressāmīti tasmiṃyeva padese nipannaṃ aññaṃ mārentassa pāṇasāmaññassa atthitāya yathā pāṇātipāto hoti, evaṃ etaṃ majjaṃ pivissāmīti aññaṃ majjaṃ pivantassa majjasāmaññassa atthitāya akusalameva hoti. Yathā pana kaṭṭhasaññāya sappaṃ ghātentassa pāṇātipāto na hoti, evaṃ nāḷikerapānasaññāya majjaṃ pivantassa akusalaṃ na hotī’’ti.
有些人却说:沙弥不知道是酒而喝,不犯巴拉基格,但生起不善。这只是他们自己的看法。因为注释书里只说到这个程度:比丘即使不知道,只要从种子阶段开始算起,喝了酒就犯巴吉帝亚;沙弥知道而喝就犯破戒,不知道则不犯。注释书里并没有说“但生起不善”。还有人这样说:即使不知道而喝,酒也不会进入入流者的口中,因为必须生起达到业道程度的不善心才能喝下去。这种说法也不妥当。应当知道,这就像菩萨入母胎时,菩萨之母自然持戒一样,也是圣弟子们法性成就的表现。正因如此,《长部》《究陀达那经》的注释书里说:巴利
Keci pana vadanti ‘‘sāmaṇerassa surāti ajānitvā pivantassa pārājiko natthi, akusalaṃ pana hotī’’ti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhuno ajānitvāpi bījato paṭṭhāya majjaṃ pivantassa pācittiyaṃ, sāmaṇero jānitvā pivanto sīlabhedaṃ āpajjati, na ajānitvā’’ti ettakameva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘akusalaṃ pana hotī’’ti na vuttanti. Aparampi vadanti ‘‘ajānitvā pivantassapi sotāpannassa mukhaṃ surā na pavisati kammapathappattaakusalacitteneva pātabbato’’ti, tampi na sundaraṃ. Bodhisatte kucchigate bodhisattamātu sīlaṃ viya hi idampi ariyasāvakānaṃ dhammatāsiddhanti veditabbaṃ. Teneva dīghanikāye kūṭadantasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.352) vuttaṃ –
即使在另一期生命中,圣弟子也不会为了活命而杀生,也不会饮酒。就算有人把酒和牛奶混在一起灌进他嘴里,也只有牛奶会进去,酒进不去。就像什么呢?就像鹳鸟在混了牛奶的水里觅食时,只有牛奶会进去,水进不去。这是“由生性而成”的吗?应当知道,这也是“由法性而成”的。巴利
‘‘Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako jīvitahetupi neva pāṇaṃ hanati, na suraṃ pivati. Sacepissa surañca khīrañca missetvā mukhe pakkhipanti, khīrameva pavisati, na surā. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā koñcasakuṇānaṃ khīramissake udake khīrameva pavisati, na udakaṃ. Idaṃ yonisiddhanti ce? Idampi dhammatāsiddhanti veditabba’’nti.
如果是这样,为什么在饮酒学处的注释中说“在这里,由于不知道事情本身,应当知道这是无心的;因为必须由不善心才能喝,所以是世间所呵责的”?这并没有错。因为这里的真正意思是:在有心的这一类情况下,正是由于必须由不善心才能喝,所以是世间所呵责的。正是基于这个意思,在其他同样属于世间所呵责的无心学处中,也只说它们是不善心,而并没有说它们是有心的。也正因如此,在比丘尼分别的注释中说:巴利
Yadi evaṃ surāpānasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 329) ‘‘vatthuajānanatāya cettha acittakatā veditabbā, akusaleneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatā’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ? Nāyaṃ doso. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sacittakapakkhe akusalacitteneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatāti. Imināyeva hi adhippāyena aññesupi lokavajjesu acittakasikkhāpadesu akusalacittatāyeva vuttā, na pana sacittakatā. Teneva bhikkhunīvibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 1227) vuttaṃ –
观看歌舞集会、彩绘楼阁学处、僧衣、妇女装饰、香料颜料、香粉、由比丘尼等涂抹揉压——这十条学处是无心的、世间所呵责的、不善心的。巴利
‘‘Giraggasamajjaṃ cittāgārasikkhāpadaṃ saṅghāṇi itthālaṅkāro gandhakavaṇṇako vāsitakapiññāko bhikkhunīādīhi ummaddanaparimaddanāti imāni dasa sikkhāpadāni acittakāni lokavajjāni akusalacittānī’’ti,
这里的意思是这样的:有些罪即使没有心念也会犯,所以说是“无心”;但如果心念存在,就一定是由不善心才会犯,所以这些既是世间所呵责的,也是不善心的。因此,比丘分别中提到的饮酒、观军、观战这三条学处,以及比丘尼分别中提到的观看歌舞表演等十条学处,这十三条无心学处之所以加上“有心方面”这个限定语,就是为了表明它们是世间所呵责的。应当这样确定。不过,对于制定所呵责的戒条,以了知违犯事由的心来说,在有心的方面,这个心可能是善的,可能是不善的,可能是无记的。因此,对于它,在有心的方面并不存在“心必定是不善”这个定论,所以说其余的是“制定所呵责”。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – vināpi cittena āpajjitabbattā acittakāni, citte pana sati akusaleneva āpajjitabbattā lokavajjāni ceva akusalacittāni cāti. Tasmā bhikkhuvibhaṅge āgatāni surāpānauyyuttauyyodhikasikkhāpadāni tīṇi, bhikkhunīvibhaṅge āgatāni giraggasamajjādīni dasāti imesaṃ terasannaṃ acittakasikkhāpadānaṃ lokavajjatādassanatthaṃ ‘‘sacittakapakkhe’’ti idaṃ visesanaṃ katanti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Yasmā pana paṇṇattivajjassa vatthuvītikkamavijānanacittena sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ siyā kusalaṃ, siyā akusalaṃ, siyā abyākataṃ, tasmā tassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevāti ayaṃ niyamo natthīti sesaṃ paṇṇattivajjanti vuttaṃ.
“阻止”就是阻止违犯。“关闭门户”就是关闭违犯垢秽的门户。“截断流”就是截断一层又一层的违犯之流。或者也可以说,“阻止”是阻止无犯的残留;“关闭门户”是关闭无犯垢秽的门户;“截断流”是截断无犯之流,意思就是:正在造作犯行。
有人问:对于世间罪,不是有些随制在制定时是使戒条变宽松的吗?那为什么这里说“对于世间罪,随制在制定时……使戒条变得更严格”呢?于是回答说“除了增上慢之外,除了梦中之外”等等。
“除了增上慢之外”这一随制,理由是“因为没有违犯”。“除了梦中之外”这一随制,理由是“因为不具效力”。其中,“因为没有违犯”,是指没有“恶欲、被欲所败坏”等违犯。因为关于上人法,经中说“恶欲、被欲所败坏的人虚诳上人法”,所以怀着欺骗意图说妄语的人犯巴拉基格。但这里的人是因增上慢而自以为已经证得,才说出那样的话,并不是想要违犯学处。因此,“除了增上慢之外”这一随制在制定时,因为没有违犯,就成了无犯。
“因为不具效力”,是指在梦中即使有思和违犯的欲望,也因为不具效力。因为在梦中虽然有想要释放的贪乐之思,有时甚至还有加行,但由于被昏沉睡眠所压倒,那个心是不具效力的;因为心不具效力,连能引发加行行为的思也不具效力。正因如此,世尊说:“诸比丘,这个思是有的,但它不具效力。”所以,“除了梦中之外”这一随制,因为不具效力,就成了无犯。巴利
Rundhantīti vītikkamaṃ rundhantī. Dvāraṃ pidahantīti vītikkamalesassa dvāraṃ pidahantī. Sotaṃ pacchindamānāti uparūpari vītikkamasotaṃ pacchindamānā. Atha vā rundhantīti anāpattilesaṃ rundhantī. Dvāraṃ pidahantīti anāpattilesassa dvāraṃ pidahantī. Sotaṃ pacchindamānāti anāpattisotaṃ pacchindamānā, āpattimeva kurumānāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nanu ca lokavajje kāci anupaññatti uppajjamānā sithilaṃ karontī uppajjati, tasmā ‘‘lokavajje anupaññatti uppajjamānā…pe… gāḷhataraṃ karontī uppajjatī’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttanti āha ‘‘aññatra adhimānā aññatra supinantā’’tiādi. ‘‘Aññatra adhimānā’’ti imissā anupaññattiyā ‘‘vītikkamābhāvā’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘aññatra supinantā’’ti imissā ‘‘abbohārikattā’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha vītikkamābhāvāti pāpiccho icchāpakatotiādivītikkamābhāvā. Uttarimanussadhamme hi ‘‘pāpiccho icchāpakato uttarimanussadhammaṃ ullapatī’’ti (mahāva. 129) vacanato visaṃvādanādhippāyena musā bhaṇanto pārājiko hoti. Ayaṃ pana adhimānena adhigatasaññī hutvā ullapati, na sikkhāpadaṃ vītikkamitukāmo, tasmā ‘‘aññatra adhimānā’’ti ayaṃ anupaññatti uppajjamānā vītikkamābhāvā anāpattikarā jātā. Abbohārikattāti supinante vijjamānāyapi cetanāya vītikkamicchāya ca abbohārikattā. Kiñcāpi hi supinante mocanassādacetanā saṃvijjati, kadāci upakkamanampi hoti, tathāpi thinamiddhena abhibhūtattā taṃ cittaṃ abbohārikaṃ, cittassa abbohārikattā upakkamakiriyāsaṃvattanikāpi cetanā abbohārikā. Teneva ‘‘atthesā bhikkhave cetanā, sā ca kho abbohārikā’’ti (pārā. 235) bhagavatā vuttā, tasmā ‘‘aññatra supinantā’’ti ayaṃ anupaññatti abbohārikattā anāpattikarā jātā.
在“未作违犯”这一项中,就像“因心生悔愧而没有吃”等例子那样,是指违犯还没有发生。“使之松弛”:先解除原本对大众共同制定的学处,然后在自己各自的情况下,以不构成犯戒的方式使之松弛。“给予方便”:就是为不犯戒提供方便。因此说“一再地做不犯戒的事”。难道不是在媒嫁学处中,“乃至仅一时”这条随制生起时,就使之成为犯戒吗?那为什么又说“做不犯戒的事而生起”呢?所以接着说“乃至仅一时”等。因为伍达义比丘是在仅一时的媒嫁这一犯戒事例上制定学处的,所以说“在已作违犯时”。它只是属于制定所摄,也就是包含在根本制之中。巴利
Akate vītikkameti ‘‘kukkuccāyantā na bhuñjiṃsū’’tiādīsu viya vītikkame akate. Sithilaṃ karontīti paṭhamaṃ sāmaññato baddhasikkhāpadaṃ mocetvā attano attano visaye anāpattikaraṇavasena sithilaṃ karontī. Dvāraṃ dadamānāti anāpattiyā dvāraṃ dadamānā. Tenevāha ‘‘aparāparampi anāpattiṃ kurumānā’’ti. Nanu ca sañcarittasikkhāpade ‘‘antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyapī’’ti anupaññatti uppajjamānā āpattimeva karontī uppannā, atha kasmā ‘‘anāpattiṃ kurumānā uppajjatī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyapī’’tiādi. Udāyinā bhikkhunā taṅkhaṇikāya sañcarittaṃ āpannavatthusmiṃ paññattattā ‘‘kate vītikkame’’ti vuttaṃ. Paññattigatikāva hotīti mūlapaññattiyaṃyeva antogadhā hoti.
跋耆子事缘的注释巴利
Vajjiputtakavatthuvaṇṇanā
43 43. 因为他们的住处是毗舍离,所以叫毗舍离人,因此说“毗舍离的居民”。住在跋耆国的人就是跋耆人,跋耆人的儿子就是跋耆子,因此说“跋耆国毗舍离城中诸家族的儿子”。“亲属的灾祸”就是亲属的毁灭。而亲属的毁灭是由王罚等原因造成的,所以说“以王罚、疾病、死亡、离别为原因”。“财富的灾祸”就是财富的毁灭。那是金银、奴婢等可享用和受用的物品因王罚等而毁灭,所以说“这个道理也适用于第二句”。不诽谤佛:不以“佛巴利
43. Vesālī nivāso etesanti vesālikāti āha ‘‘vesālivāsino’’ti. Vajjīsu janapade vasantā vajjino, vajjīnaṃ puttakā vajjiputtakāti āha ‘‘vajjiraṭṭhe vesāliyaṃ kulānaṃ puttā’’ti. Ñātīnaṃ byasananti ñātīnaṃ vināso. So pana ñātīnaṃ vināso rājadaṇḍādikāraṇena hotīti āha ‘‘rājadaṇḍabyādhimaraṇavippavāsanimittenā’’ti. Bhogānaṃ byasanaṃ vināso bhogabyasanaṃ. Tañca hiraññasuvaṇṇadāsidāsādīnaṃ upabhogaparibhogavatthūnaṃ rājadaṇḍādinā vināsoti āha ‘‘esa nayo dutiyapadepī’’ti. Na buddhaṃ garahāmāti ‘‘asabbaññu buddho’’tiādinā buddhaṃ na garahāma. Na dhammagarahinoti ‘‘aniyyāniko dhammo’’tiādinā dhammaṃ na garahāma. Na saṅghagarahinoti ‘‘duppaṭipanno saṅgho’’tiādinā saṅghaṃ na garahāma. Aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesūti dasa kasiṇā dasa asubhā dasānussatiyo cattāro brahmavihārā cattāro āruppā catudhātuvavatthānaṃ āhāre paṭikūlasaññāti imesu cattālīsakammaṭṭhānesu pāḷiyaṃ anāgatattā ālokākāsakasiṇadvayaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesāni gahetvā vuttaṃ. Vibhattā kusalādhammāti ‘‘imasmiṃ ārammaṇe idaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ vibhattā upacārajjhānena saddhiṃ paṭhamajjhānādayo mahaggatakusalā dhammā . Teva dhammeti te eva kusale dhamme. Majjhimayāmo bhikkhūnaṃ niddākilamathavinodanokāsattā na gahitoti āha ‘‘paṭhamayāmañca pacchimayāmañcā’’ti. Saccāni bujjhati paṭivijjhatīti bodhi, arahattamaggañāṇaṃ. Upakārakattena tassa pakkhe bhavā bodhipakkhiyāti āha ‘‘bodhissa pakkhe bhavānaṃ, arahattamaggañāṇassa upakārakāna’’nti. Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti ime sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā. ‘‘Gihipalibodhaṃ āvāsapalibodhañca pahāyā’’ti imesaṃyeva dvinnaṃ palibodhānaṃ upacchedassa sudukkarabhāvato vuttaṃ. Yuttapayuttāti sammadeva yuttā.
“意乐”就是志向。如果世尊允许那些不舍弃学处、仍住在比丘身份中却行淫欲法的瓦吉之子们受达上,那就等于废除了“犯巴拉基格,不共住”这样制定下来的学处,所以经文说:“如果世尊……就会废除所制定的学处。”不过,因为经文说的是“若比丘”,所以允许舍弃学处之后行淫欲法的人受达上,就不算废除学处,因为那个人并不是以比丘的身份去行的。由于有“来者不得受达上”这句话,说明沙弥的身份是被允许的,所以说“然而,住在沙弥身份中”等等。最上义,就是阿拉汉果或涅槃。巴利
Āsayanti ajjhāsayaṃ. Sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya bhikkhubhāve ṭhatvā paṭisevitamethunānaṃ tesaṃ vajjiputtakānaṃ upasampadaṃ anujānanto bhagavā ‘‘pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti evaṃ paññattasikkhāpadaṃ samūhanati nāmāti āha – ‘‘yadi hi bhagavā…pe… paññattaṃ samūhaneyyā’’ti. ‘‘Yo pana bhikkhū’’ti vuttattā pana sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya paṭisevitamethunassa upasampadaṃ anujānanto na samūhanati nāma. Na hi so bhikkhu hutvā paṭisevati. ‘‘So āgato na upasampādetabbo’’ti vacanato sāmaṇerabhūmi anuññātāti āha ‘‘sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ pana ṭhito’’tiādi. Uttamatthanti arahattaṃ nibbānameva vā.
四种律论说的注释巴利
Catubbidhavinayakathāvaṇṇanā
45 “引出”就是从教法里引出来。比如经中这样说:“优波离,具足五支的比丘不应该被追问。是哪五支?不知道经,不知道随顺经……”(《附随》442)他们就是这样从经教的教法里把经和随顺经引出来之后,再加以说明。又说:“无犯,我们的阿阇梨们这样受持学习与遍问。”他们就是这样从阿阇梨之说的教法里把阿阇梨之说引出来之后,再加以说明。在婆卢羯车事(《巴拉基格》78)中说:“具寿优波离这样说:贤友,做梦时无犯。”他们就是这样从教法里把自己的见解引出来之后,再加以说明。这位长老正是凭着这种自己的见解,获得了第一的位置。巴利
45.Nīharitvāti sāsanato nīharitvā. Tathā hi ‘‘pañcahupāli aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā nānuyuñjitabbaṃ. Katamehi pañcahi? Suttaṃ na jānāti, suttānulomaṃ na jānātī’’ti (pari. 442) evamādipariyattisāsanato suttaṃ suttānulomañca nīharitvā pakāsesuṃ, ‘‘anāpatti evaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyānaṃ uggaho paripucchāti gaṇhātī’’ti evamādipariyattisāsanato ācariyavādaṃ nīharitvā pakāsesuṃ, bhārukacchakavatthusmiṃ (pārā. 78) ‘‘āyasmā upāli evamāha anāpatti āvuso supinantenā’’ti evamādipariyattisāsanato eva attanomatiṃ nīharitvā pakāsesuṃ. Tāya hi attanomatiyā thero etadaggaṭṭhānaṃ labhi.
“已说”是指那先长老所说的。“句”是指通过它来通达意义的,也就是世尊触及喉部等发声部位、加以区分之后说出的话语,称为“触句”,是世尊亲口所说。因此说:“‘触句’指的就是经。”像“诸比丘,凡是我没有以‘此不可’加以遮止的,如果它随顺不可、违逆可,那么对你们来说就是不可”等(《大品》305)所说的通相,在这里指的是“味”,所以说:“‘味’就是随顺经。”从结集法者等师资相承传来的注释书,在这里指的是“师承”,所以说:“‘师承’就是师说。”巴利
Vuttanti nāgasenattherena vuttaṃ. Pajjate anena atthoti padaṃ, bhagavatā kaṇṭhādivaṇṇappavattiṭṭhānaṃ āhacca visesetvā bhāsitaṃ padaṃ āhaccapadaṃ, bhagavatoyeva vacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘āhaccapadanti suttaṃ adhippeta’’nti. ‘‘Idaṃ kappati, idaṃ na kappatī’’ti evaṃ avisesetvā ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, mayā ‘idaṃ na kappatī’ti appaṭikkhittaṃ, tañce akappiyaṃ anulometi, kappiyaṃ paṭibāhati, taṃ vo na kappatī’’tiādinā (mahāva. 305) vuttaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ idha ‘‘raso’’ti adhippetanti āha ‘‘rasoti suttānuloma’’nti. Dhammasaṅgāhakappabhutiācariyaparamparato ānītā aṭṭhakathātanti idha ‘‘ācariyavaṃso’’ti adhippetāti āha ‘‘ācariyavaṃsoti ācariyavādo’’ti.
这里因为以律的裁决为主,所以开示与之相应的经,说道:“所谓经,就是整部律藏中的巴利。”大依据,就是大的依据,是安立律的重要处所;律依此安立之后,就能毫无疑惑地作出裁决。换句话说,大的原因就是大依据,也就是裁决律的重大原因,这话说的就是这个意思。有人主张:“从意义上说,‘诸比丘,凡……’等所说的有意图的巴利本身就是大依据。”因此说“凡世尊如此所说……”等。而这些大依据出现在犍度中,所以对它们的裁决讨论将在那里显现,此处不说。虽然世尊在各处所说的散说本身就是注释书,但它是由结集法者先结集三藏,然后依照其义释相应地安立为诵道,所以被称为“师说”,因为师长们以此解说巴利。因此说:“所谓师说……就是注释书的传承。”而且,大玛欣德长老将登上三次结集、成为佛陀言教义释之道,带到了铜掌岛;后来铜掌岛的大长老们用锡兰语安立,是为了避免异部见解混杂。虽然自己的见解要与经等对照后才能推想,但在经等中并没有特别指出,所以说“舍经、随顺经、师说”。随觉,就是随顺经等而起的觉知。理趣执,就是从经等中获得的理趣的执持。巴利
Idha vinayavinicchayassa adhikatattā tadanucchavikameva suttaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘suttaṃ nāma sakale vinayapiṭake pāḷī’’ti. Mahāpadesāti mahāokāsā, mahantāni vinayassa patiṭṭhāpanaṭṭhānāni yesu patiṭṭhāpito vinayo vinicchayati asandehato. Mahantāni vā kāraṇāni mahāpadesā, mahantāni vinayavinicchayakāraṇānīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Atthato pana ‘yaṃ, bhikkhave’tiādinā vuttā sādhippāyā pāḷiyeva mahāpadesā’’ti vadanti. Tenevāha ‘‘ye bhagavatā evaṃ vuttā’’tiādi. Ime ca mahāpadesā khandhake āgatā, tasmā tesaṃ vinicchayakathā tattheva āvi bhavissatīti idha na vuccati. Yadipi tattha tattha bhagavatā pavattitā pakiṇṇakadesanāva aṭṭhakathā, sā pana dhammasaṅgāhakehi paṭhamaṃ tīṇi piṭakāni saṅgāyitvā tassa atthavaṇṇanānurūpeneva vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā ‘‘ācariyavādo’’ti vuccati ācariyā vadanti saṃvaṇṇenti pāḷiṃ etenāti katvā. Tenāha – ‘‘ācariyavādo nāma…pe… aṭṭhakathātantī’’ti. Tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhoyeva ca buddhavacanassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhūto kathāmaggo mahāmahindattherena tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ ābhato, pacchā tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapito nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkarapariharaṇatthaṃ. Kiñcāpi attanomati suttādīhi saṃsanditvāva parikappīyati, tathāpi sā na suttādīsu visesato niddiṭṭhāti āha ‘‘suttasuttānulomaācariyavāde muñcitvā’’ti. Anubuddhiyāti suttādīniyeva anugatabuddhiyā. Nayaggāhenāti suttādito labbhamānanayaggahaṇena.
先总体上说明自己的见解,现在再把它特别区分开来显示,所以说“再者……”等话。现在要说明在这件事上应当怎么做,所以说“然而,取那个自己的见解来说的人……”等。以义,就是以自己的观察确定之义。应当导入师说,就是应当以智慧进入师说。一切软弱无力,是因为个人的辩才本来就是这样的缘故。由于放逸文本的缘故,师说有时也可能与随顺经不相符,那就不应当取;为了说明这一点,所以说“师说也……只有相符的才应当取”。只有相符的才应当取,意思是:就像与经相符那样,应当从大处引出义理,这就是所要显示的。随顺经虽然是经的一部分,但在经中并没有像“这是允许的,这是不允许的”这样区分之后亲口说出的东西,所以说“比起随顺经,经本身更有力”。不可逆转,就是不可抗拒。如同结集僧团,因为具有权威性,所以如同结集僧团一样。如同诸佛住世之时,因为这是由佛亲口所说的缘故,所以说如同佛在世时一样。如果抗拒经,那就是抗拒佛。自宗者取经而说,就是自宗者取自己的经来宣说。他宗者取随顺经,就是其他部派的人取自己部派中随顺经来说。不作轻蔑或呵责,就是既不作“这有什么用”这样的轻蔑,也不作“这个愚人说什么”这样的呵责。随顺经,就是对方所说的其他部派中随顺经。应当导入经,就是自宗者应当导入自己的经。应当安住于经,就是应当安住于自己的经。像这样,在其余各句中也应当作义理上的连接。此,就是自宗者。他,就是其他部派的人。其余也像这样。巴利
Attanomatiṃ sāmaññato paṭhamaṃ dassetvā idāni tameva visesetvā dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Idāni tattha paṭipajjitabbākāraṃ dassento āha – ‘‘taṃ pana attanomatiṃ gahetvā kathentenā’’tiādi. Atthenāti attanā sallakkhitena atthena. Ācariyavāde otāretabbāti ācariyavāde ñāṇena anuppavesetabbā. Sabbadubbalāti puggalassa sayaṃ paṭibhānabhāvato. Pamādapāṭhavasena ācariyavādassa kadāci suttānulomena asaṃsandanāpi siyā, so na gahetabboti dassento āha – ‘‘ācariyavādopi…pe… samento eva gahetabbo’’ti. Samentameva gahetabbanti yathā suttena saṃsandati, evaṃ mahāpadesato atthā uddharitabbāti dasseti. Suttānulomassa suttekadesattepi sutte viya ‘‘idaṃ kappati, idaṃ na kappatī’’ti paricchinditvā āhaccabhāsitaṃ kiñci natthīti āha – ‘‘suttānulomato hi suttameva balavatara’’nti. Appaṭivattiyanti appaṭibāhiyaṃ. Kārakasaṅghasadisanti pamāṇattā saṅgītikārakasaṅghasadisaṃ. Buddhānaṃ ṭhitakālasadisanti iminā buddheheva kathitattā dharamānabuddhasadisanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sutte hi paṭibāhite buddhova paṭibāhito hoti. Sakavādī suttaṃ gahetvā kathetīti sakavādī attano suttaṃ gahetvā voharati. Paravādī suttānulomanti aññanikāyavādī attano nikāye suttānulomaṃ gahetvā katheti. Khepaṃ vā garahaṃ vā akatvāti ‘‘kiṃ iminā’’ti khepaṃ vā ‘‘kimesa bālo vadatī’’ti garahaṃ vā akatvā. Suttānulomanti paravādinā vuttaṃ aññanikāye suttānulomaṃ. Sutte otāretabbanti sakavādinā attano sutte otāretabbaṃ. Suttasmiṃyeva ṭhātabbanti attano sutteyeva ṭhātabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesavāresupi atthayojanā kātabbā. Ayanti sakavādī. Paroti aññanikāyavādī. Evaṃ sesesupi.
前面不是已经说过“依顺经来说,经本身更有力”吗?那这里为什么又说“在顺经中应当把经纳入”等等呢?这并不矛盾。因为“依顺经来说,经本身更有力”这句话,是就自己宗派所认可的经而说的。在那里,是针对属于自宗见解范围内的经等,才说:“自己的见解最弱,比起自己的见解,师说更有力;比起师说,顺经更有力;比起顺经,经本身更有力。”而这里,是针对其他论师从别的部派引来的经,才说“在顺经中应当把经纳入”等等。所以,对其他论师引来的经等,要把它纳入自宗的顺经、师说和自宗见解之中,只取与自宗相合的部分,不相合的部分就不取——这里说的就是这个原则,因此前后没有任何矛盾。巴利
Nanu ca ‘‘suttānulomato suttameva balavatara’’nti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ, idha pana ‘‘suttānulome suttaṃ otāretabba’’ntiādi kasmā vuttanti? Nāyaṃ virodho. ‘‘Suttānulomato suttameva balavatara’’nti hi idaṃ sakamateyeva suttaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha hi sakamatipariyāpannameva suttādiṃ sandhāya ‘‘attanomati sabbadubbalā, attanomatito ācariyavādo balavataro, ācariyavādato suttānulomaṃ balavataraṃ, suttānulomato suttameva balavatara’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Idha pana paravādinā ānītaṃ aññanikāye suttaṃ sandhāya ‘‘suttānulome suttaṃ otāretabba’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tasmā paravādinā ānītaṃ suttādiṃ attano suttānulomaācariyavādaattanomatīsu otāretvā samentaṃyeva gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ na gahetabbanti ayaṃ nayo idha vuccatīti na koci pubbāparavirodho.
《外部经》是指没有收入三次结集、属于大众部部派所持有的《隐秘韦桑德拉》等经。“方广等”中的“等”字,应当理解为包含了《隐秘邪道》等,其他那些应当受到呵责的经则不应采纳。“应当只立足于自己的见解”——这句话表明,即使是从其他部派引来的经,在自己部派中,自己的见解仍然更有力量。自宗论师引经来说,他宗论师也依经来说——像这样,并不是按同类来设立论门;把经纳入经中,看起来像是割裂了而不明显,但按照所说的方式,就可以贯通。巴利
Bāhirakasuttanti tisso saṅgītiyo anāruḷhaguḷhavessantarādīni mahāsaṅghikanikāyavāsīnaṃ suttāni. Vedallādīnanti ādi-saddena guḷhaummaggādiggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, itaraṃ gārayhasuttaṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Attanomatiyameva ṭhātabbanti iminā aññanikāyato ānītasuttatopi sakanikāye attanomatiyeva balavatarāti dasseti. Sakavādī suttaṃ gahetvā katheti, paravādīpi suttamevātievamādinā samānajātikānaṃ vasena vāro na vutto, suttassa sutteyeva otāraṇaṃ bhinnaṃ viya hutvā na paññāyati, vuttanayeneva ca sakkā yojetunti.
现在,针对自宗论者和他宗论者之间就“合法与不合法”等问题产生争论的情况,为了说明这时应当怎么做,而说:“然而,如果这个人执取‘这是合法的’而说”等等。其中,“应当纳入经和随经中”,意思是自宗论者应当把它纳入自己的经和随经中。“对方找不到理由”,是说对方论者找不到理由。“他从经中引出大量理由和判断来展示”,是说对方论者从自己的经中引出大量理由和判断来展示。说“萨度”而接受之后,“应当坚持它是不合法的”——这句话的意思是:自宗论者在自己部派中找不到经等依据时,就应当依照对方论者的话来安住。“双方都看到理由的影子”,是说自宗论者和对方论者双方,都看到了能证明合法或不合法的东西,也就是理由的相似相。如果双方都看到了理由的影子,那为什么还说“应当坚持它是不合法的”呢?——所以说“因为触及了律”等等。为了让“触及了律”这个说法的含义更加清楚,又说“基于对合法与不合法的审察”。“应当阻断”等句中:在难以了知的判断中,遇到合法或不合法的情况时,对“合法”的执取应当阻断,对“不合法”的执取应当牢牢确立。也就是说,应当截断那不断生起的执取“合法”的念头之流,安住在被称为“重”的“不合法”状态本身——这就是它的意思。巴利
Idāni sakavādīparavādīnaṃ kappiyākappiyādibhāvaṃ sandhāya vivāde uppanne tattha paṭipajjitabbavidhiṃ dassento āha – ‘‘atha panāyaṃ kappiyanti gahetvā kathetī’’tiādi. Tattha sutte ca suttānulome ca otāretabbanti sakavādinā attanoyeva sutte ca suttānulome ca otāretabbaṃ. Paro kāraṇaṃ na vindatīti paravādī kāraṇaṃ na labhati. Suttato bahuṃ kāraṇañca vinicchayañca dassetīti paravādī attano suttato bahuṃ kāraṇaṃ vinicchayañca āharitvā dasseti. Sādhūti sampaṭicchitvā akappiyeva ṭhātabbanti iminā attano nikāye suttādīni alabhantena sakavādinā paravādīvacaneyeva ṭhātabbanti vadati. Dvinnampi kāraṇacchāyā dissatīti sakavādīparavādīnaṃ ubhinnampi kappiyākappiyabhāvasādhakaṃ kāraṇapatirūpakaṃ dissati. Yadi dvinnampi kāraṇacchāyā dissati, kasmā ‘‘akappiyeva ṭhātabba’’nti āha ‘‘vinayañhi patvā’’tiādi. ‘‘Vinayaṃ patvā’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ katvā dassento āha ‘‘kappiyākappiyavicāraṇamāgammā’’ti. Rundhitabbantiādīsu dubbiññeyyavinicchaye kappiyākappiyabhāve sati kappiyanti gahaṇaṃ rundhitabbaṃ, akappiyanti gahaṇaṃ gāḷhaṃ kātabbaṃ. Aparāparaṃ pavattakappiyagahaṇasotaṃ pacchinditabbaṃ, garukabhāvasaṅkhāte akappiyabhāveyeva ṭhātabbanti attho.
“以众多经与决断理由”,是指以众多经典,以及从那些经典中引出的决断理由。“不应放弃自己的执取”,是说自宗论者不应放弃自己那“不适合”的执取。现在,为了总结前面所说的内容,而说“如是”等语。其中的“凡”,是指自宗论者和他宗论者中的任何一位。不过有些人说:“这里指的只是自宗论者中的任何一位。”如果真是这样,那么在“然而,若此人执取‘这是适合的’而说”等所有场合,双方就都只能是自宗论者了,因为“如是”等语正是为了总结前文所说而说的,所以那种说法不应采纳。“获得更多理由”——在这里,在经等依据中,前者相对于后者,就叫作更多理由;或者说,在经等四种依据中,获得更多理由的人,就叫作获得更多理由。巴利
Bahūhi suttavinicchayakāraṇehīti bahūhi suttehi ceva tato ānītavinicchayakāraṇehi ca. Attano gahaṇaṃ na vissajjetabbanti sakavādinā attano akappiyanti gahaṇaṃ na vissajjetabbaṃ. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ nigamento ‘‘eva’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yoti sakavādīparavādīsu yo koci. Keci pana ‘‘sakavādīsuyeva yo koci idhādhippeto’’ti vadanti, evaṃ sante ‘‘atha panāyaṃ kappiyanti gahetvā kathetī’’tiādīsu sabbattha ubhopi sakavādinoyeva siyuṃ heṭṭhā vuttasseva nigamanavasena ‘‘eva’’ntiādīnaṃ vuttattā, tasmā taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Atirekakāraṇaṃ labhatīti ettha suttādīsu purimaṃ purimaṃ atirekakāraṇaṃ nāma, yo vā suttādīsu catūsu bahutaraṃ kāraṇaṃ labhati, so atirekakāraṇaṃ labhati nāma.
“善行”:意思是他的行为良好,或者因为戒而行为良好,所以叫“善行”。因此说“‘善行’就是行为良好”。“语上升”:意思是经由语言而上升,也就是以言语善加掌握。对“从经”的解释是“从巴利”。而这里,因为说过“所谓经,就是整个律藏”,所以“从巴利”应当理解为另一种阐明其意义的巴利语。对“随文”的解释是“从请问和从义注”。因为随顺巴利语、从文句上阐明义理,所以请问和义注称为“随文”。而这里,由于义注被单独列出,所以“请问”指的是长老部之说。僧团分裂之前阶段所起的争论,它的别名就是“僧团裂缝”。“恶作”:是指对极微小的过失也因见其可怕而生起恶作。“不违本”:即不改变巴利语。“不逾越”:即不超越。巴利
Suṭṭhu pavatti etassāti suppavatti, suṭṭhu pavattati sīlenāti vā suppavatti. Tenāha ‘‘suppavattīti suṭṭhu pavatta’’nti. Vācāya uggataṃ vācuggataṃ, vacasā suggahitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Suttatoti imassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘pāḷito’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘suttaṃ nāma sakalaṃ vinayapiṭaka’’nti vuttattā pāḷitoti tadatthadīpikā aññāyeva pāḷi veditabbā. Anubyañjanasoti imassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘paripucchato ca aṭṭhakathāto cā’’ti. Pāḷiṃ anugantvā atthassa byañjanato pakāsanato anubyañjananti hi paripucchā aṭṭhakathā ca vuccati. Ettha ca aṭṭhakathāya visuṃ gahitattā paripucchāti theravādo vutto. Saṅghabhedassa pubbabhāge pavattakalahassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ saṅgharājīti. Kukkuccakoti aṇumattesupi vajjesu bhayadassanavasena kukkuccaṃ uppādento. Tantiṃ avisaṃvādetvāti pāḷiṃ aññathā akatvā. Avokkamantoti anatikkamanto.
“呻吟”是指没看清义理就呻吟。“挣扎”是指颤动。“不能安立”是指没办法安住在同一个义理上。因此说:“别人说什么,他就什么都同意。”“执取他宗之说”是指:当持不同主张的人说“甘蔗里,渣滓是尽形寿可用的,汁液是七日限的,而离开这两者之外,并没有单独叫做甘蔗的东西,所以甘蔗在非时也可以吃”,他也把这种说法接受下来。“一一毛”是针对白发说的。“于彼”是指在那个人身上。“耗尽、穷尽”,在意义上是一回事。巴利
Vitthunatīti atthaṃ adisvā nitthunati. Vipphandatīti kampati. Santiṭṭhituṃ na sakkotīti ekasmiṃyeva atthe patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃyaṃ parena vuccati, taṃ taṃ anujānātī’’ti. Paravādaṃ gaṇhātīti ‘‘ucchumhi kasaṭaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ, raso sattāhakāliko, tadubhayavinimutto ca ucchu nāma visuṃ natthi, tasmā ucchupi vikāle vaṭṭatī’’ti paravādinā vutte tampi gaṇhāti. Ekekalomanti palitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yamhīti yasmiṃ puggale. Parikkhayaṃ pariyādānanti atthato ekaṃ.
他的师承传承确实是善加掌握的。这里说的“师承传承”,就是指诸位阿阇梨的决断传承。正因如此,后面会说:“应当依照阿阇梨、阿阇梨的阿阇梨,以及圣典和问难所说的那样去了知。”所谓“前后关联”,就是“这是前文,这是后文,这是关联”,这样从前后的关联来了知。“师承传承”正是“上座部教说”的另一种说法,意思是“长老的次第”。“两三轮转”,就是指两种或三种传承。巴利
Ācariyaparamparā kho panassa suggahitā hotīti ettha ācariyaparamparāti ācariyānaṃ vinicchayaparamparā. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘yathā ācariyo ca ācariyācariyo ca pāḷiñca paripucchañca vadanti, tathā ñātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Pubbāparānusandhitoti ‘‘idaṃ pubbavacanaṃ, idaṃ paravacanaṃ, ayamanusandhī’’ti evaṃ pubbāparānusandhito. Ācariyaparamparanti imasseva vevacanaṃ theravādaṅganti, therapaṭipāṭinti attho. Dve tayo parivaṭṭāti dve tisso paramparā.
以这三种特相——也就是前面说过的“他的经是善来的”等三种特相。在这里,第一种特相说明的是对律的善加领受,第二种特相说明的是所领受的不动摇、善安立,第三种特相说明的是:即使圣典和注释里没有的内容,也能靠阿阇梨的言教来决断的能力。当事情被提交时,指的是名为举罪或名为违犯的事情被提交到僧团中,意思是被提出。为了阐明已经说过的内容,他说:当举罪者和被举罪者已经说了,应当说的就要说。不过有些人这样连接:当举罪者把事情提交,被举罪者也说了,应当说的就要说。另一些人则这样连接:当举罪者和被举罪者已经说了,持律者应当说。但应当知道,当举罪者和被举罪者已经说了,应当说的就要说,这种连接方式更好。应当观察事由,就是应当观察每一学处的事由。因为以草或叶……若有人来,犯恶作罪这条,是在尼萨耆亚的向非亲属乞求学处的事由中制定的;而由于土喇咤亚、恶说等罪没有出现在总目里,所以说了五种罪中任何一种。或者说某一种罪,这是针对于时作非时想,犯恶作罪;于时疑惑,犯恶作罪等所说的恶作而言。在各学处之间,就是包括附随事例在内的每一学处之间。巴利
Imehi ca pana tīhi lakkhaṇehīti ‘‘suttamassa svāgataṃ hotī’’tiādinā heṭṭhā vuttehi tīhi lakkhaṇehi. Ettha ca paṭhamena lakkhaṇena vinayassa suṭṭhu uggahitabhāvo vutto, dutiyena uggahitena acalatā suppatiṭṭhitatā vuttā, tatiyena yaṃ pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca natthi, tampi ācariyavacanena vinicchinituṃ samatthatā vuttā. Otiṇṇe vatthusminti codanāsaṅkhāte vītikkamasaṅkhāte vā vatthusmiṃ saṅghamajjhe otiṇṇe, osaṭeti attho. Vuttameva vibhāvento ‘‘codakena ca cuditakena ca vutte vattabbe’’ti āha. Keci pana ‘‘codakena otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ cuditakena ca vutte vattabbe’’ti evaṃ yojenti. Apare pana ‘‘codakena ca cuditakena ca vutte vinayadharena ca vattabbe’’ti evampi yojenti. ‘‘Codakena ca cuditakena ca vutte vattabbe’’ti ayameva pana yojanā sundaratarāti veditabbā. Vatthu oloketabbanti tassa tassa sikkhāpadassa vatthu oloketabbaṃ. ‘‘Tiṇena vā paṇṇena vā…pe… yo āgaccheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 517) hi idaṃ nissaggiye aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadassa vatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, thullaccayadubbhāsitāpattīnaṃ mātikāya anāgatattā ‘‘pañcannaṃ āpattīnaṃ aññatara’’nti vuttaṃ. Aññataraṃ vā āpattinti ‘‘kāle vikālasaññī āpatti dukkaṭassa, kāle vematiko āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti evamādinā (pāci. 250) āgataṃ dukkaṭaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sikkhāpadantaresūti vinītavatthuṃ antokatvā ekekasmiṃ sikkhāpadantare.
“微细”是说:心自身的本性难以了知,又轻快多变,所以用转变迅速来形容它。因此说“心轻快”。“心轻快”就是指这些人的心轻快、转变迅速。“那些”是指那些违犯。“以彼为事由”是说,那些不与取、杀人等违犯,就是事由、依据和原因,所以叫“以彼为事由”。“净化诸戒后”是说,对以某事为由生起的追悔不加理会,净化其余的戒。因为三十二身分清楚明了、容易运用,所以说“你先作意三十二身分”。但如果对其他业处已经修习纯熟,就应当作意那个业处。“令业处相续”是指不让中间出现间断,以所缘的方式与心长时间相续结合。“诸行明显而现前”是说:如果是修观业处的人,他的诸行就会明显而现前。如果曾经违犯巴拉基格,即使他不想回忆,也会以追悔之事为由反复现前,因此得不到心一境性。所以说了“业处不相续”等话。“自己知道”就是自己知道。这里是反身用法,意思是“自己知道”。“其他天神也知道”是说,除了守护神之外,其他能知他心的天神也知道。巴利
Sukhumāti attanopi duviññeyyasabhāvassa lahuparivattino cittassa sīghaparivattitāya vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘cittalahukā’’ti. Cittaṃ lahu sīghaparivatti etesanti cittalahukā. Teti te vītikkame. Taṃvatthukanti te adinnādānamanussaviggahavītikkamā vatthu adhiṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇametassāti taṃvatthukaṃ. Sīlāni sodhetvāti yaṃvatthukaṃ kukkuccaṃ uppannaṃ, taṃ amanasikaritvā avasesasīlāni sodhetvā. Pākaṭabhāvato sukhavaḷañjanatāya ca ‘‘dvattiṃsākāraṃ tāva manasi karohī’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññasmiṃ pana kammaṭṭhāne kataparicayena tadeva manasi kātabbaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ ghaṭayatīti antarantarā khaṇḍaṃ adassetvā cittena saddhiṃ ālambanabhāvena cirakālaṃ ghaṭayati. Saṅkhārā pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahantīti vipassanākammaṭṭhāniko ce, tassa saṅkhārā pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Sace katapārājikavītikkamo bhaveyya, tassa satipi asaritukāmatāya vippaṭisāravatthuvasena punappunaṃ taṃ upaṭṭhahatīti cittekaggataṃ na vindati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ na ghaṭayatī’’tiādi. Attanā jānātīti sayameva jānāti. Paccatte cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ, attā jānātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññā ca devatā jānantīti ārakkhadevatāhi aññā paracittaviduniyo devatā ca jānanti.
比丘词义分别的注释巴利
Bhikkhupadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
所谓“因此”,是因为去掉了“然而”一词,只说一个不定的、用来指示人的“凡”字,所以才是“因此”。这里,就是指这个“凡”字。由于“然而”只是一个语助词,注释者为了说明“凡”这个词本身的含义,就说“也就是所说的‘无论何人’”。“无论何人”,就是无论是谁、无论哪一个,都叫“无论何人”。“或致力于……”就是或致力于观。“于诸戒”就是在平常的戒上。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā pana-saddaṃ apanetvā aniyamena puggaladīpakaṃ yo-saddameva āha, tasmā. Etthāti imasmiṃ yo-sadde. Pana-saddassa nipātamattattā yo-saddasseva atthaṃ pakāsento ‘‘yo kocīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha. Yo koci nāmāti yo vā so vā yo kocīti vutto. Vāsadhurayutto vāti vipassanādhurayutto vā. Sīlesūti pakatīsu.
“乞求”就是乞讨。不论得到还是没得到——不管是谁,只要他在乞食、在寻求、在到处找食物,那么他得到也好,没得到也好,他仍然是在乞求,所以叫比丘——这就是这里的意思。所谓“以圣者的乞求”,即如所说的“圣者们意在安住,这就是圣者的乞求”,指的是这样一种圣者的乞求,而不是像穷人、旅人、乞丐、讨饭的人那样喊着“给吧!给吧!”的那种乞求。“以乞食而行”——就是靠捡拾别人丢弃的食物过活。“由于已趋入”——就是由于已经从事。“扁担饭”——就是用扁担挑来的饭。“以价值、触感、颜色的差别”——就是价值等失去了原来的状态。这里所说的“差别”,就是指失去原来的状态。洗不掉的污垢,以及能那样洗掉的尘垢。“穿破布衣者”——这是词源解释,因为“比丘”这个词在穿破布衣的人身上已经约定俗成了。巴利
Bhikkhatīti yācati. Labhanto vā alabhanto vāti yo koci bhikkhati bhikkhaṃ esati gavesati, so taṃ labhatu vā mā vā, tathāpi bhikkhatīti bhikkhūti ayamettha adhippāyo. Ariyāya yācanāyāti ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyāna yācanā’’ti evaṃ vuttāya ariyayācanāya, na kapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṃ viya ‘‘dehi dehī’’ti evaṃ pavattayācanāya. Bhikkhācariyanti uñchācariyaṃ. Ajjhupagatattāti anuṭṭhitattā. Kājabhattanti kājehi ānītaṃ bhattaṃ. Agghaphassavaṇṇabhedenāti agghādīnaṃ purimapakativijahena. Purimapakativijahanañhettha bhedoti adhippetaṃ. Dhovitvā apanetuṃ asakkuṇeyyasabhāvaṃ malaṃ, tathā apanetuṃ sakkuṇeyyasabhāvā jallikā. Bhinnapaṭadharoti nibbacanaṃ bhinnapaṭadhare bhikkhu-saddassa niruḷhattā kataṃ.
具足资助者,是指过去世就具足了八种资具布施资助的人。如果有人把衣服等八种资具,或者只把钵和衣,布施给入流果等圣者,或者布施给持戒的凡夫,然后发愿说:“愿这份资具布施,成为未来获得‘善来比丘’身份的助缘”,应当知道,当他善行圆满、遇到诸佛出现时,这份布施就会让他获得神通变化所成的资具。梵音,是指最殊胜的音声,或者与梵天神的音声相似的音声。梵行,是指教法上的梵行和道上的梵行。应当结合“彻底终结苦”来理解。Bhaṇḍū,是指剃光头的人。Vāsī,是指削齿木用的小刀。Bandhanaṃ,是指腰带。Yutto bhāvanānuyogo assāti yuttayogo,意思是“他致力于修习,所以是具足修习者”,也就是说“具足修习者”是指精勤于修习的人。为了说明他威仪具足,所以举了“像六十岁长老那样”的例子。Buddhācariyako,是指以佛陀为出家师和受达上师的人。因为在初成道的那段时期,还没有其他受达上的人,所以说“在初成道时的一个时期”。Pañca pañcavaggiyattherā,就是五位五群长老。Tīṇi satanti,就是三百,为了偈颂读起来顺口而颠倒了语序。Eko ca thero,是指指鬘长老。Na vuttā,是指在义注中没有说到。Tattha,是指在律藏中。巴利
Upanissayasampannanti pubbe aṭṭhaparikkhāradānūpanissayasampannaṃ. Yo hi cīvarādike aṭṭha parikkhāre pattacīvarameva vā sotāpannādiariyassa puthujjanasseva vā sīlasampannassa datvā ‘‘idaṃ parikkhāradānaṃ anāgate ehibhikkhubhāvāya paccayo hotū’’ti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapesi, tassa taṃ sati adhikārasampattiyaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve iddhimayaparikkhāralābhāya saṃvattatīti veditabbaṃ. Brahmaghosanti uttamaghosaṃ, brahmuno ghosasadisaṃ vā ghosaṃ. Brahmacariyanti sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca. Dukkhassa sammā antakiriyāyāti yojetabbaṃ. Bhaṇḍūti muṇḍo. Vāsīti dantakaṭṭhacchedanavāsi. Bandhananti kāyabandhanaṃ. Yutto bhāvanānuyogo assāti yuttayogo, tassa yuttayogassa, bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iriyāpathasampannatāvibhāvanatthaṃ ‘‘saṭṭhivassikatthero viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Buddhova pabbajjācariyo upasampadācariyo ca assāti buddhācariyako. Paṭhamabodhiyampi paṭhamakāleyeva sesaupasampadānaṃ abhāvoti āha ‘‘paṭhamabodhiyaṃ ekasmiṃ kāle’’ti. Pañca pañcavaggiyattherāti pañcavaggiyattherā pañca. Tīṇi satanti tīṇi satāni, gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ vacanavipallāso kato. Eko ca theroti aṅgulimālattheraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Na vuttāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na vuttā. Tatthāti vinayapāḷiyaṃ.
世尊正坐在竹林大精舍的香室里,知道大迦叶长老是为了自己而出家,便起身去迎接他,独自走了三拘卢舍的路,在多子榕树根下盘腿坐下。大迦叶长老来到世尊面前,行了最恭敬的顶礼,三次表白说:“尊者,世尊是我的导师,我是弟子;尊者,世尊是我的导师,我是弟子。”世尊为了说明大迦叶长老这份恭敬的分量,以及自己的广大威德,便开示说:如果有别的外道导师,明明不知道却自称“我知道”,明明没看见却自称“我看见了”,而一个全心具足、净信的弟子,对这样的导师行如此最上的恭敬,那这个导师的头颅就会像从蒂上断落的棕榈果一样从脖子掉下来,或者裂成七瓣。接着世尊说:“迦叶,我却是知道才说‘我知道’,看见了才说‘我看见了’。”然后,为了断除大迦叶长老对出身、傲慢和容貌的骄慢,世尊用三段教诫来教导他,开口说道:“因此,迦叶,你应当……”巴利
Veḷuvanamahāvihāre gandhakuṭiyaṃ nisinnoyeva bhagavā mahākassapattherassa attānaṃ uddissa pabbajitabhāvaṃ viditvā tassa paccuggamanaṃ karonto tigāvutaṃ maggaṃ ekakova gantvā bahuputtanigrodhamūle pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinno attano santikaṃ āgantvā paramanipaccakāraṃ dassetvā ‘‘satthā me bhante bhagavā, sāvakohamasmi, satthā me bhante bhagavā, sāvakohamasmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ attano sāvakattaṃ sāvetvā ṭhitassa mahākassapattherassa nipaccakāramahattataṃ attano ca mahānubhāvataṃ dīpetuṃ yassa aññassa ajānaṃyeva ‘‘jānāmī’’ti paṭiññassa bāhirakassa satthuno evaṃ sabbacetasā samannāgato pasannacitto sāvako evarūpaṃ paramanipaccakāraṃ kareyya, tassa vaṇṭacchinnatālapakkaṃ viya gīvato muddhāpi vipateyya, sattadhā vā phaleyyāti dassento ‘‘yo kho, kassapa, evaṃ sabbacetasā samannāgataṃ sāvakaṃ ajānaṃyeva vadeyya ‘jānāmī’ti, apassaṃyeva vadeyya ‘passāmī’ti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyya, sattadhā vā phaleyya, ahaṃ kho, kassapa, jānaṃyeva vadāmi ‘jānāmī’ti, passaṃyeva vadāmi ‘passāmī’’’ (saṃ. ni. 2.154) ti vatvā jātimadamānamadarūpamadappahānatthaṃ tīhi ovādehi mahākassapattheraṃ ovadanto ‘‘tasmātiha te kassapā’’tiādimāha.
这里,“因此,迦叶”中的“因此”只是说“所以”。因为我明明知道却说“我知道”,明明看见却说“我看见”,所以才有“因此”这个意思。ti 和 ha 是虚词。“iha”是指“在这个教法里”,ta 是因为连读而加进来的。所谓“应当这样学”,就是应当按现在所说的方式去学。“强烈”是指厚重、广大。“惭与愧”就是惭和愧。“现前”是指在走近之前就已经现前。因为这样,他在那些长老面前,就会以恭敬、尊重的心态安住。如果有人对长老等生起惭和愧之后才走近,长老等也会以有惭有愧的态度来接待他,这就是这里的利益。“与善相应”是指依靠善、依靠没有过失的法。“当作骨干”是指把自己和这个法当作骨干,或者把这个法当作“这是我的法”而当作骨干。“放在心里”是指安置在心中。“以全部心作意”是指不让心哪怕稍微向外散乱,以完全的作意之心来作意。“倾耳而听”是指把耳朵侧过去听,也就是把耳朵专注地放在法上。因为这样,你就应当学。也就是说,倾注智慧之耳和信心之耳,心想“我要认真听世尊所说的法”,就应当这样学。“我的身至念与乐俱行”,是指在不净观和入出息念中,以初禅的方式与乐相应的身至念。而这三条教诫,对这位长老来说,本身就是他的出家与达上。巴利
Tattha (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154) tasmātihāti tasmā icceva vuttaṃ hoti, yasmā ahaṃ jānantova ‘‘jānāmī’’ti passanto eva ca ‘‘passāmī’’ti vadāmi, tasmāti attho. Ti-kāra ha-kārā nipātā. Ihāti vā imasmiṃ sāsane, ta-kāro padasandhivasena āgato. Evaṃ sikkhitabbanti idāni vuccamānākārena sikkhitabbaṃ. Tibbanti bahalaṃ mahantaṃ. Hirottappañcāti hirī ca ottappañca. Paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissatīti upasaṅkamanato paṭhamatarameva upaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissati. Tathā hi sati tesaṃ purato assa sagāravasappatissavatā saṇṭhāti. Yo ca therādīsu hirottappaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā upasaṅkamati, therādayopi taṃ sahirikā saottappā ca hutvā upasaṅkamantīti ayamettha ānisaṃso. Kusalūpasaṃhitanti kusalanissitaṃ, anavajjadhammanissitanti attho. Aṭṭhiṃ katvāti attānaṃ tena dhammena aṭṭhikaṃ katvā, taṃ vā dhammaṃ ‘‘esa mayhaṃ dhammo’’ti aṭṭhiṃ katvā. Manasi katvāti citte ṭhapetvā. Sabbacetasā samannāharitvāti cittassa thokampi bahi gantuṃ adento sabbena samannāhāracittena samannāharitvā. Ohitasototi ṭhapitasoto, dhamme nihitasototi attho. Evañhi te sikkhitabbanti ñāṇasotañca pasādasotañca odahitvā ‘‘mayā desitaṃ dhammaṃ sakkaccameva suṇissāmī’’ti evañhi te sikkhitabbaṃ. Sātasahagatā ca me kāyagatāsatīti asubhesu ceva ānāpāne ca paṭhamajjhānavasena sukhasampayuttā kāyagatāsati. Yo ca panāyaṃ tividho ovādo, therassa ayameva pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca ahosi.
以色界禅那来说,以遍为所缘的,就是色想。这里是以“想”为代表来指称禅那,而正因为那禅那以膨胀(尸)的似相为所缘,所以又说为“膨胀想”。索波迦沙弥被世尊问到时说:“这两者在色界这一点上是同一含义,只是字面不同而已。”“Āraddhacitto”就是心意满足、心生喜悦。至于接受敬法等等而受达上,后文自然会详细说明。巴利
Kasiṇārammaṇaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ rūpasaññā. Saññāsīsena hettha jhānaṃ vuttaṃ, tadeva ca uddhumātakapaṭibhāgārammaṇattā ‘‘uddhumātakasaññā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sopākasāmaṇero bhagavatā puṭṭho ‘‘ete dve rūpāvacarabhāvena ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti āha. Āraddhacittoti ārādhitacitto. Garudhammapaṭiggahaṇādiupasampadā upari vitthārato sayameva āvi bhavissati.
这里说“善凡夫等”,意思是:因为没有断除许多种不同的有身见等烦恼,所以这些烦恼会生起他;或者说,是被这些烦恼所生起的人,就叫凡夫。既是善的,又是凡夫,所以叫善凡夫。以善凡夫为首的那些入流者等,就是善凡夫等。这里用“善”这个限定,是为了排除盲凡夫。因为凡夫有两种:盲凡夫和善凡夫。正如所说的——巴利
Kalyāṇaputhujjanādayoti ettha bahūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīnaṃ avihatattā janeti, tāhi vā janitoti puthujjano, kalyāṇo ca so puthujjano cāti kalyāṇaputhujjano, so ādi yesaṃ sotāpannādīnaṃ te kalyāṇaputhujjanādayo. Kalyāṇaggahaṇena cettha andhaputhujjanaṃ nivatteti. Dvidhā hi puthujjanā andhaputhujjano kalyāṇaputhujjanoti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“ 两种凡夫被太阳的亲戚佛陀所说。
一种是盲凡夫,一种是善凡夫。”巴利
‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.61; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.51);
应当把“善慧”和“善解脱”连接起来理解。在“以戒”等说法中,“戒”指四遍净戒;“定”指作为观修基础的八种等至;“慧”指世间智和出世间智;“解脱”指圣果解脱;“解脱智见”指十九种省察智。这里应当根据具体情况来连接理解。因为善凡夫只具备戒等前三法,而圣者们则戒等一切法都具备。所谓“以戒为心材的比丘”等说法,也是指善凡夫等人,所以说“即以他们的戒材等”。或者,从毫不迂回、最直接的意义上说,只有漏尽者才叫心材比丘,所以说“或者因为已经远离了烦恼肤材的状态”等等。巴利
Bhadrāya paññāya bhadrāya vimuttiyāti yojetabbaṃ. Sīlenātiādīsu sīlanti catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Samādhīti vipassanāpādakā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Paññāti lokiyalokuttarañāṇaṃ. Vimuttīti ariyaphalavimutti. Vimuttiñāṇadassananti ekūnavīsatividhaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Yathāsambhavena cettha yojanā veditabbā. Kalyāṇaputhujjanassa hi sīlādayo tayo eva sambhavanti, ariyānaṃ pana sabbepi sīlādayo. Sāro bhikkhūtipi kalyāṇaputhujjanādayova vuttāti āha ‘‘tehiyeva sīlasārādīhī’’tiādi. Atha vā nippariyāyato khīṇāsavova sāro bhikkhu nāmāti āha ‘‘vigatakilesapheggubhāvato vā’’tiādi.
即使是善凡夫,只要他实践随顺之行并使之圆满,具足戒行,守护根门,饮食知量,专心修习警寤,在前夜和后夜都致力于修习菩提分法,心里想“今天或明天我将会证得某一种沙门果”,他也被称为“正在学习的人”,也就是“有学”。因此说“与善凡夫一起”。七位圣者,是指四位安住于道者,加上三位安住于下三果者,这七位就是圣者。三学,是指增上戒等三种学。或者因为生于学中,所以叫“有学”。因为圣者以圣者的出生而出生时,是生于学中,不是生于母胎。或者因为具有学习的习性,所以叫“有学”。在以人为中心的说法中,这些不与其他人共通的三道三果之法,是以有学的同义词来说的。“无学”这个词,是在可能有“有学性”疑问的地方,对此加以否定,因此应当知道,在世间法和涅槃中都不成立“无学性”。因为被称为戒、定、慧的学,由于已经从各自的敌对烦恼中解脱而清净,又不会成为随烦恼的所缘,所以适合被称为“学”;它们存在于八种道果中,因此,就像具足四道和下三果的人一样,具足阿拉汉果的人也生于这些学中,这样一来,具足阿拉汉果的阿拉汉也像其他人一样有有学性,就可以说“有学的这些”,以及“这是有学的,他有这些学戒”,为了遮止这种说法,才说“无学”,否定如上所说的有学性。在阿拉汉果中现起的学,因为已经完成了学的作用,所以不再作学的作用,只是以学果的状态现起,因此它们不配称为“学”,具足它们的人也不配称为“有学”,也不配说为“有学习的习性”或“生于学中”。然而在下三果中,学因为是一来道观等的亲依止缘,所以还在作学的作用,因此配称为“学”,具足它们的人也配称为“有学”,配说为“有学习的习性”和“生于学中”。因为“学习者,就是有学”显示了学尚未圆满的人,而“不学习,就是无学”则显示了学已圆满的人,并不是说没有学,所以说:“超越有学法……漏尽者称为无学。”或者,增长已达究竟的学就是“无学”,在这个意义上,是否有某位安住于有学法的圣者获得无学性呢?也就是阿拉汉道法,依前面所说的诸义而成为有学,具足它的人——安住于最上道的人,是否获得无学性?不是,因为对相似者使用了那个名称。因为阿拉汉果与阿拉汉道,除了遍知作用的完成和异熟性之外,并没有差别,所以可以说他们是有学,即成为最上果法的状态。又因为异熟乐比善乐更寂静、更殊胜,所以那些法成为增长已达究竟的,具足它们的人就称为“无学”。巴利
Yopi kalyāṇaputhujjano anulomapaṭipadāya paripūrakārī sīlasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto pubbarattāpararattaṃ bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanānuyogamanuyutto viharati ‘‘ajja vā sve vā aññataraṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ adhigamissāmī’’ti, sopi vuccati sikkhatīti sekhoti āha ‘‘puthujjanakalyāṇakena saddhi’’nti. Satta ariyāti cattāro maggaṭṭhā, heṭṭhimā ca tayo phalaṭṭhāti ime satta ariyā. Tisso sikkhāti adhisīlādikā tisso sikkhā. Sikkhāsu jātoti vā sekho. Ariyapuggalo hi ariyāya jātiyā jāyamāno sikkhāsu jāyati, na yoniyaṃ. Sikkhanasīloti vā sekho, puggalādhiṭṭhānāya vā kathāya sekhassa ayanti anaññasādhāraṇā maggaphalattayadhammā sekhapariyāyena vuttā. Asekhoti ca yattha sekhabhāvāsaṅkā atthi, tatthāyaṃ paṭisedhoti lokiyanibbānesu asekhabhāvānāpatti daṭṭhabbā. Sīlasamādhipaññāsaṅkhātā hi sikkhā attano paṭipakkhakilesehi vimuttattā parisuddhā, upakkilesānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvampi anupagamanato etā sikkhāti vattuṃ yuttā, aṭṭhasupi maggaphalesu vijjanti, tasmā catumaggaheṭṭhimaphalattayasamaṅgino viya arahattaphalasamaṅgīpi tāsu sikkhāsu jātoti taṃsamaṅgino arahato itaresaṃ viya sekhatte sati sekhassa ayanti, sikkhā sīlaṃ etassāti ca sekhoti vattabbo siyāti taṃ nivattanatthaṃ ‘‘asekho’’ti yathāvuttasekhabhāvapaṭisedho kato. Arahattaphalehi pavattamānā sikkhā pariniṭṭhitasikkhākiccattā na sikkhākiccaṃ karonti, kevalaṃ sikkhāphalabhāveneva pavattanti, tasmā tā na sikkhāvacanaṃ arahanti, nāpi taṃsamaṅgī sekhavacanaṃ, na ca sikkhanasīlo, sikkhāsu jātoti ca vattabbataṃ arahati, heṭṭhimaphalesu pana sikkhā sakadāgāmimaggavipassanādīnaṃ upanissayabhāvato sikkhākiccaṃ karontīti sikkhāvacanaṃ arahanti, taṃsamaṅgino ca sekhavacanaṃ sikkhanasīlā, sikkhāsu jātāti ca vattabbataṃ arahanti ‘‘sikkhantīti sekhā’’ti apariyositasikkhānaṃ dassitattā, ‘‘na sikkhatīti asekho’’ti iminā pariyositasikkho dassito, na sikkhāya rahitoti āha – ‘‘sekkhadhamme atikkamma…pe… khīṇāsavo asekhoti vuccatī’’ti. Vuddhippattasikkho vā asekhoti etasmiṃ atthe sekhadhammesu eva ṭhitassa kassaci ariyassa asekhabhāvāpattīti arahattamaggadhammā vuddhippattā ca yathāvuttehi atthehi sekhāti katvā taṃsamaṅgino aggamaggaṭṭhassa asekhabhāvo āpannoti? Na, taṃsadisesu tabbohārato. Arahattamaggato hi ninnānākaraṇaṃ arahattaphalaṃ ṭhapetvā pariññākiccakaraṇaṃ vipākabhāvañca, tasmā te eva sekhā aggaphaladhammabhāvaṃ āpannāti sakkā vattuṃ. Kusalasukhato ca vipākasukhaṃ santataratāya paṇītataranti vuddhippattā ca te dhammā hontīti taṃsamaṅgī asekhoti vuccatīti.
“以最彻底的方式”就是指以最完全的限定。因为达上甘马具有决定性作用,所以说“应作五众甘马”。五个人组成的团体或集合,就叫五众;或者说具备五个人的团体,就叫五众;由这个团体所应作的甘马,就叫应作五众甘马。“诸比丘,无论多少”,就是指所有的比丘。“堪任甘马者”,指适合参与甘马的人,也就是没有犯巴拉基格、没有被举罪的人。因为达上甘马应当由五众来做,所以只要五位比丘堪任甘马,由这些人就能成办甘马;其余的人则适合表达意愿。“以白四甘马”:在这里,虽然白首先被宣说,但因为三遍甘马语在意义和文句上没有差别,而白在意义和文句上与它们不同,所以把白当作它们的第四,因此说“白四”。在义注中是随顺文句说“以三遍甘马语和一次白”,但如果按照意义生起的顺序,则应该说“以一次白和三遍甘马语”。在“由于事、白、甘马语、界场、众会都具足”这句话中,“事”指求受达上的人,应当理解为除了未满二十岁者、曾犯终极罪者,以及黄门等十一种不能受戒的人之外的人。因为未满二十岁者等十三种人,是达上的非事;除了这些人之外,如果另有求受达上的人,那么达上甘马就叫做事具足成就。巴利
Sabbantimena pariyāyenāti sabbantimena paricchedena. Upasampadākammassa adhikārattā ‘‘pañcavaggakaraṇīye’’ti vuttaṃ. Pañcannaṃ vaggo samūhoti pañcavaggo, pañcaparimāṇayutto vā vaggo pañcavaggo, tena kattabbaṃ kammaṃ pañcavaggakaraṇīyaṃ. Yāvatikā bhikkhūti yattakā bhikkhū. Kammappattāti kammārahā pārājikaṃ anāpannā anukkhittā ca. Upasampadākammassa pañcavaggakaraṇīyattā pañceva bhikkhū kammappattā ettakehipi kammasiddhito, itare chandārahā. Ñatticatutthenāti ettha kiñcāpi ñatti sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuccati, tissannaṃ pana anussāvanānaṃ atthabyañjanabhedābhāvato atthabyañjanabhinnā ñatti tāsaṃ catutthāti katvā ‘‘ñatticatuttha’’nti vuccati. Byañjanānurūpameva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tīhi anussāvanāhi ekāya ca ñattiyā’’ti vuttaṃ, atthappavattikkamena pana ‘‘ekāya ñattiyā tīhi anussāvanāhī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Vatthuñattianaussāvanasīmāparisasampattisampannattāti ettha vatthūti upasampadāpekkho puggalo, so ṭhapetvā ūnavīsativassaṃ antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpannapubbaṃ paṇḍakādayo ca ekādasa abhabbapuggale veditabbo. Ūnavīsativassādayo hi terasa puggalā upasampadāya avatthu, ime pana ṭhapetvā aññasmiṃ upasampadāpekkhe sati upasampadākammaṃ vatthusampattisampannaṃ nāma hoti.
没有提说对象、僧团、个人、动议,以及事后安立动议——这五种就是动议的过失。其中,没有提说求受达上者“这位名叫某某”,叫作没有提说对象。在“请僧团听我说,尊者”这句话里,说了“请听我说,尊者”而没有说“僧团”,叫作没有提说僧团。没有提说戒师,即未说出“某某的求受达上者”,叫作没有提说个人。完全没有诵出动议,叫作没有提说动议。在完成第一遍甘马语之后,才说“这是动议”,然后说“僧团同意”,像这样事后才宣说动议,叫作事后安立动议。如此,远离这些过失的动议,就是具备动议圆满的动议。巴利
Vatthusaṅghapuggalañattīnaṃ aparāmasanāni pacchā ñattiṭṭhapanañcāti ime tāva pañca ñattidosā. Tattha ‘‘ayaṃ itthannāmo’’ti upasampadāpekkhassa akittanaṃ vatthuaparāmasanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho’’ti ettha ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante’’ti vatvā ‘‘saṅgho’’ti abhaṇanaṃ saṅghaaparāmasanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Itthannāmassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti upajjhāyassa akittanaṃ puggalaaparāmasanaṃ nāma. Sabbena sabbaṃ ñattiyā anuccāraṇaṃ ñattiaparāmasanaṃ nāma. Paṭhamaṃ kammavācaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘esā ñattī’’ti vatvā ‘‘khamati saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ ñattikittanaṃ pacchā ñattiṭṭhapanaṃ nāma. Iti imehi dosehi vimuttāya ñattiyā sampannaṃ ñattisampattisampannaṃ nāma.
对事、僧、人没有提及,遗漏宣告,以及非时宣告——这五种是随宣告的过失。其中,对事等没有提及,与动议部分所说的相同。但在三遍随宣告中,无论在哪一处没有提及这些,就是没有提及;如果完全不说甘马语,只是四次宣说动议;或者在甘马语中间漏念、错念字母或词句,就叫遗漏宣告。又或者,在没有宣告时机的情况下,先安立动议,然后作随宣告,就叫非时宣告。如此,远离这些过失的随宣告,就叫成就随宣告的圆满。巴利
Vatthusaṅghapuggalānaṃ aparāmasanāni sāvanāya hāpanaṃ akāle sāvananti ime pañca anussāvanadosā. Tattha vatthādīnaṃ aparāmasanāni ñattiyaṃ vuttasadisāneva. Tīsu pana anussāvanāsu yattha katthaci etesaṃ aparāmasanaṃ aparāmasanameva, sabbena sabbaṃ pana kammavācaṃ avatvā catukkhattuṃ ñattikittanameva. Atha vā pana kammavācabbhantare akkharassa vā padassa vā anuccāraṇaṃ vā duruccāraṇaṃ vā sāvanāya hāpanaṃ nāma. Sāvanāya anokāse paṭhamaṃ ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā anussāvanakaraṇaṃ akāle sāvanaṃ nāma. Iti imehi dosehi vimuttāya anussāvanāya sampannaṃ anussāvanasampattisampannaṃ nāma.
当界已经超越了坏界相的限制时,在这(如法的)界内所作的甘马,就叫作成就界圆满。所有应当参与甘马的比丘没有到场,应当送来意欲的比丘没有送来意欲,已经到场的人提出反对——这三种是僧团的过失。远离了这些过失的僧团所作的甘马,就叫作成就僧团圆满。巴利
Vipattisīmālakkhaṇaṃ samatikkantāya pana sīmāya kataṃ sīmāsampattisampannaṃ nāma. Yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā, tesaṃ anāgamanaṃ, chandārahānaṃ chandassa anāharaṇaṃ, sammukhībhūtānaṃ paṭikkosananti ime pana tayo parisadosā, tehi vimuttāya parisāya kataṃ parisasampattisampannaṃ nāma.
被称为“达上甘马语”的世尊言教,因为是成办达上甘马的因,所以是“处”。世尊教导说应当怎样做,就照那样做了,因此与所说的相符,动议和随宣告没有缺漏,按顺序宣说,堪称为“处”。因为世尊确实说了应当怎样做,如果没有照那样做,就不能成为达上甘马的因,所以那就不堪称为“处”。因此说“以应因、应师教”。由此应当知道,动议和随宣告的圆满已经说完。“以和合僧”这一句,则是说众的圆满。“以不动”这一句,应当知道是从其余方面来说事圆满和界圆满。不过,在注疏中为了把“不动”的特相归纳到一处来显示,对“以不动”解释为:“事、动议、随宣告、界、众都圆满具足,因此不可动摇、不可异议。”但有些人说:“这里‘处’是指‘不得让断手者出家’等师教。”巴利
Upasampadākammavācāsaṅkhātaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ upasampadākammakaraṇassa kāraṇattā ṭhānaṃ, yathā ca taṃ kattabbanti bhagavatā anusiṭṭhaṃ, tathā katattā tadanucchavikaṃ yathāvuttaṃ anūnaṃ ñattianussāvanaṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā ca avuttaṃ ṭhānārahaṃ. Yathā kattabbanti hi bhagavatā vuttaṃ, tathā akate upasampadākammassa kāraṇaṃ na hotīti na taṃ ṭhānārahaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kāraṇārahena satthusāsanārahenā’’ti. Iminā ñattianussāvanasampatti kathitāti veditabbā. ‘‘Samaggena saṅghenā’’ti iminā pana parisasampatti kathitāva. ‘‘Akuppenā’’ti iminā pārisesato vatthusīmāsampattiyo kathitāti veditabbā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana akuppalakkhaṇaṃ ekattha sampiṇḍetvā dassetuṃ akuppenāti imassa ‘‘vatthuñattianussāvanasīmāparisasampattisampannattā akopetabbataṃ appaṭikkositabbataṃ upagatenā’’ti attho vutto. Keci pana ‘‘ṭhānārahenātiettha ‘na hatthacchinno pabbājetabbo’tiādi (mahāva. 119) satthusāsanaṃ ṭhāna’’nti vadanti.
在“以白四甘马”这一部分里,造论者因文义的关联而把它引了出来;他想把一切注疏中所详细阐明的甘马特相,就放在它出现的那个地方来显示。因此,为了说明“不在此处说、而在彼处说”的用意,他在这里便说了“然而,站在此处”等话。巴利
‘‘Ñatticatutthena kammenā’’ti imasmiṃ adhikāre pasaṅgato āharitvā yaṃ kammalakkhaṇaṃ sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu papañcitaṃ, taṃ yathāāgataṭṭhāneyeva dassetukāmo idha tassa avacane tattha vacane ca payojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā’’tiādimāha.
在八种达上当中,善来比丘达上、皈依达上、受教诫达上和答问达上这四种,以这些方式受达上的人,不可能违犯世间共知的学处;而受重法达上、遣使达上和八语达上这三种,只有比丘尼才被允许。所以应当知道,这里所指的,就是以白四甘马受达上的人。因为善来比丘达上只适用于最后一生的人,皈依达上只适用于心地清净的人,受教诫达上和答问达上只适用于大迦叶和索帕卡,而他们不可能犯巴拉基格等世间共知的罪;受重法达上等三种又只有比丘尼才被允许,而这里说的是比丘。因此应当知道,这里所指的,就是以白四甘马受达上的人。巴利
Aṭṭhasu upasampadāsu ehibhikkhūpasampadā saraṇagamanūpasampadā ovādapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā pañhabyākaraṇūpasampadāti imāhi upasampadāhi upasampannānaṃ lokavajjasikkhāpadavītikkame abhabbattā garudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā dūtenūpasampadā aṭṭhavācikūpasampadāti imāsañca tissannaṃ upasampadānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃyeva anuññātattā ñatticatuttheneva kammena upasampanno gahitoti veditabbo. Tathā hi ehibhikkhūpasampadā antimabhavikānaṃyeva, saraṇagamanūpasampadā parisuddhānaṃ, ovādapaṭiggahaṇapañhabyākaraṇūpasampadā mahākassapasopākānaṃ, na ca te bhabbā pārājikādilokavajjaṃ āpajjituṃ, garudhammapaṭiggahaṇādayo ca bhikkhunīnaṃyeva anuññātā, ayañca bhikkhu, tasmā ettha ñatticatutthena upasampannova gahitoti veditabbo.
然而,在那些属于“制定遮止”的学处上,其他像善来比丘达上等受具方式受戒的人,也同样被包含在内。因为他们同样会犯下共宿之类的“制定遮止”之罪。如果真是这样,那么在“制定遮止”的学处中,为什么说“在此意义上,所指的比丘是以白四甘马受具者”呢?因为他堪能违犯一切学处,而且这种受具方式遍通一切时。而善来比丘达上等方式,并不堪能违犯一切学处,也不遍通一切时。正因如此,在八种达上中,只有白四甘马达上、遣使达上和八语达上这三种是长久存在的,其余几种只在佛陀住世时才有。也正因为这样,在《比丘尼分别》(巴吉帝亚658)中也说:“在此,由和合的二部僧众,以不可动摇、堪任其位的白四甘马受具的比丘尼,才是此意义下所指的比丘尼。”这是把遣使达上和八语达上受具者也包含进来,而只把由二部僧众以白四甘马受具的比丘尼说为“比丘尼”,并不包括以敬受八重法受具者,因为那种受具方式是针对个人的,不遍通一切时。敬受八重法达上只对大爱道所开许,是针对个人的。因此,应当取“以遍通一切时的白四甘马受具者”为准,而说一切学处都是为此人制定的。如果这样,那么在“制定遮止”的学处中,善来比丘达上等受具者也被包含在内,这又怎么理解呢?因为他们从意义上说也是犯戒者。正如说:“有两种人不可能犯戒,即佛陀与独觉佛;有两种人可能犯戒,即比丘与比丘尼。”这是从一般意义上说的。因此,善来比丘达上等受具者,也会在无意、失念、无心的情况下,犯下共宿等“制定遮止”之罪,所以从意义上说他们也是犯戒者。这就是此处的要点。至于在这里有人以其他方式所作的种种枝蔓解释,都不应当作要点来接受。巴利
Paṇṇattivajjesu pana sikkhāpadesu aññepi ehibhikkhūpasampadāya upasampannādayo saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tepi hi sahaseyyādipaṇṇattivajjaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjantiyeva. Yadi evaṃ paṇṇattivajjesupi sikkhāpadesu ‘‘ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippeto bhikkhū’’ti ñatticatuttheneva kammena upasampanno kasmā vuttoti? Sabbasikkhāpadavītikkamārahattā sabbakālikattā ca. Ehibhikkhūpasampadādayo hi na sabbasikkhāpadavītikkamārahā asabbakālikā ca. Tathā hi aṭṭhasu upasampadāsu ñatticatutthakammūpasampadā dūtenūpasampadā aṭṭhavācikūpasampadāti imā tissoyeva thāvarā, sesā buddhe dharamāneyeva ahesuṃ. Teneva ca bhikkhunīvibhaṅgepi (pāci. 658) ‘‘tatra yāyaṃ bhikkhunī samaggena ubhatosaṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampannā, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā bhikkhunī’’ti dūtenūpasampadāya aṭṭhavācikūpasampadāya ca upasampannaṃ antokatvā ubhatosaṅghena ñatticatuttheneva kammena upasampannā bhikkhunī vuttā, na garudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadāya upasampannā tassā upasampadāya pāṭipuggalikabhāvato asabbakālikattā. Garudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā hi mahāpajāpatiyā eva anuññātattā pāṭipuggalikāti, tasmā sabbasikkhāpadavītikkamārahaṃ sabbakālikāya ñatticatutthakammūpasampadāya upasampannameva gahetvā sabbasikkhāpadāni paññattānīti gahetabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ paṇṇattivajjesu sikkhāpadesu ca ehibhikkhūpasampannādīnampi saṅgaho kathaṃ viññāyatīti? Atthato āpannattā. Tathā hi ‘‘dve puggalā abhabbā āpattiṃ āpajjituṃ buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca, dve puggalā bhabbā āpattiṃ āpajjituṃ bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo cā’’ti (pari. 322) sāmaññato vuttattā ehibhikkhūpasampannādayopi asañcicca assatiyā acittakaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ sahaseyyādiāpattiṃ āpajjantīti atthato āpannanti ayamettha sāro. Yaṃ panettha ito aññathā kenaci papañcitaṃ, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ.
“依词源”是指按词语解释来说。“依表达”是指按惯用说法来说。“在甘马语尚未生起时”是指在白四甘马语尚未生起时。“依功德”是指依与戒等种种功德相应来说。在这里应当知道,“比丘”的词源解释是:他破坏诸恶不善法。巴利
Niruttivasenāti nibbacanavasena. Abhilāpavasenāti vohāravasena. Anuppannāya kammavācāyāti anuppannāya ñatticatutthakammavācāya. Guṇavasenāti sīlāditaṃtaṃguṇayogato. Ettha ca bhindati pāpake akusale dhammeti bhikkhūti nibbacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
学处与活命分别的注释巴利
Sikkhāsājīvapadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
应当修学,就是应当反复练习。“最上”是指殊胜。在增上戒等存在的情况下,也应当具备戒等。就像依着一把尺寸较小的伞或旗,把超出尺寸的称为“过大的伞”“过大的旗”,这里也一样,应当这样作意:“依着不算殊胜的戒,而应当具备增上戒;同样,依着不算殊胜的心和慧,而应当具备增上心和增上慧。”为了从戒等的自相来阐明它们,所以说了“那么,这里什么是戒”等话。八支戒因为已经包含在十支戒里,所以没有单独列出,只说了“五支戒、十支戒”这么多。巴帝摩卡防护戒,是指按行持和遮止两种方式,属于律藏的学处戒。这个戒能保护守持它的人,使他从恶趣等苦中解脱出来,所以称为“巴帝摩卡”。防护就是律仪,即不以身语违犯。巴帝摩卡本身就是律仪,所以叫“巴帝摩卡防护”。它本身就是以戒为义,所以叫“巴帝摩卡防护戒”。巴利
Sikkhitabbāti āsevitabbā. Uttamanti visiṭṭhaṃ. Adhisīlādīsu vijjamānesu sīlādīhipi bhavitabbaṃ. Yathā hi omakatarappamāṇaṃ chattaṃ vā dhajaṃ vā upādāya atirekappamāṇaṃ ‘‘atichattaṃ atidhajo’’ti vuccati, evamihāpi ‘‘anukkaṭṭhasīlaṃ upādāya adhisīlena bhavitabbaṃ, tathā anukkaṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ paññañca upādāya adhicittena adhipaññāya ca bhavitabba’’nti manasi katvā sīlādiṃ sarūpato vibhāvetukāmo ‘‘katamaṃ panettha sīla’’ntiādimāha. Aṭṭhaṅgasīlaṃ dasaṅgasīlesveva antogadhattā visuṃ aggahetvā ‘‘pañcaṅgadasaṅgasīla’’nti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlanti cārittavārittavasena duvidhaṃ vinayapiṭakapariyāpannaṃ sikkhāpadasīlaṃ. Tañhi yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehīti pātimokkhanti vuccati. Saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro , kāyavācāhi avītikkamo. Pātimokkhameva saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro. So eva sīlanaṭṭhena sīlanti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ.
另一种解释:因为烦恼势力强大,所以容易作恶,难以行善,因此屡屡堕入恶趣,所以叫“堕者”,也就是凡夫。或者因为无常,被业力抛掷到各种有当中,像被机器转动一样无法停住地到处流转,所以具有“行”的性质,叫“堕者”;或者因为死亡,在各种众生群体中,身体坏灭,所以叫“堕者”,指的是众生相续,或者就是心本身。这个“别解脱”能让那些堕落者从轮回之苦中解脱出来,所以叫“别解脱”。因为心解脱了,众生才被称为解脱。经中确实说过:“由心清净而清净”,还有“心不执取,从诸漏中解脱”。巴利
Aparo nayo (udā. aṭṭha. 31; itivu. aṭṭha. 97) – kilesānaṃ balavabhāvato pāpakiriyāya sukarabhāvato puññakiriyāya ca dukkarabhāvato bahukkhattuṃ apāyesu patanasīloti pātī, puthujjano. Aniccatāya vā bhavābhavādīsu kammavegakkhitto ghaṭiyantaṃ viya anavaṭṭhānena paribbhamanato gamanasīloti pātī, maraṇavasena vā tamhi tamhi sattanikāye attabhāvassa patanasīloti pātī, sattasantāno, cittameva vā. Taṃ pātinaṃ saṃsāradukkhato mokkhetīti pātimokkhaṃ. Cittassa hi vimokkhena satto vimuttoti vuccati. Vuttañhi ‘‘cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.100), ‘‘anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimutta’’nti (mahāva. 28) ca.
或者,以无明等为因,在轮回中堕落、行走、流转,所以叫“堕”。经中确实说过:“被无明遮覆的众生,被渴爱系缚,四处奔走、轮回流转。”那个“堕者”众生,通过这个法从渴爱等三种杂染中解脱出来,所以叫“别解脱”。应当知道,这个复合词的构成方式,就像“喉黑”等词一样。巴利
Atha vā avijjādinā hetunā saṃsāre patati gacchati pavattatīti pāti. ‘‘Avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ sattānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarata’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.124) hi vuttaṃ. Tassa pātino sattassa taṇhādisaṃkilesattayato mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. ‘‘Kaṇṭhekāḷo’’tiādīnaṃ viyassa samāsasiddhi veditabbā.
或者,“堕”的意思是令堕落、令陷没于种种苦,这就是心。经中确实说过:“世间被心引导,被心牵引。”这个“堕者”通过它而得到解脱,所以叫“别解脱”。或者,通过它而堕入恶趣之苦和轮回之苦,所以叫“堕”,也就是渴爱杂染。经中确实说过:“渴爱产生人,人以渴爱为第二伴侣”等等。从那个“堕”中解脱出来,所以叫“别解脱”。巴利
Atha vā pāteti vinipāteti dukkhehīti pāti, cittaṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘cittena nīyati loko, cittena parikassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.62). Tassa pātino mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. Patati vā etena apāyadukkhe saṃsāradukkhe cāti pāti, taṇhāsaṃkileso. Vuttañhi ‘‘taṇhā janeti purisaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.55-57), taṇhādutiyo puriso’’ti (a. ni. 4.9; itivu. 15, 105) ca ādi. Tato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho.
或者,凡是会让人堕落其中的,就叫“堕”,也就是内六处和外六处。经里说过:“世间在六处中生起,在六处中与人结交。”从这被称为内六处和外六处的“堕”中解脱出来,所以叫“别解脱”。巴利
Atha vā patati etthāti pāti, cha ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni. Vuttañhi ‘‘chasu loko samuppanno, chasu kubbati santhava’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.70; su. ni. 171). Tato chaajjhattikabāhirāyatanasaṅkhātato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho.
或者,由于它有堕落和毁灭,所以叫“堕者”,也就是轮回。从它当中解脱出来,就叫“别解脱”。巴利
Atha vā pāto vinipāto assa atthīti pātī, saṃsāro. Tato mokkhoti pātimokkho.
或者,因为是一切世界之主的缘故,世尊被称为“主”(pati);通过它而解脱,所以叫“解脱”(mokkho);因为是主的解脱,依据这一点而施设名称,所以叫“主解脱”(patimokkho);主解脱就是“巴帝摩卡”(pātimokkho)。又或者,因为是一切功德的根本,以最上的意义称为“主”(pati),并且按照前面所说的意义称为“解脱”(mokkho),所以叫“主解脱”(patimokkho);主解脱就是“巴帝摩卡”。正如所说:“巴帝摩卡,这是口,这是首要的口”(《大品》135),对此有详细说明。巴利
Atha vā sabbalokādhipatibhāvato dhammissaro bhagavā patīti vuccati, muccati etenāti mokkho, patino mokkho tena paññattattāti patimokkho, patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Sabbaguṇānaṃ vā mūlabhāvato uttamaṭṭhena pati ca so yathāvuttena atthena mokkho cāti patimokkho, patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhanti mukhametaṃ pamukhameta’’nti (mahāva. 135) vitthāro.
或者,“pa”表示方式,“ati”是表示“极尽”义的助词,因此,通过种种方式极尽地解脱,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。因为此戒本身以彼分断而极尽地解脱、释放;当它与定相应、与慧相应时,则以镇伏断和正断而极尽地解脱、释放,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。巴利
Atha vā pa-iti pakāre, atīti accantatthe nipāto, tasmā pakārehi accantaṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkho. Idañhi sīlaṃ sayaṃ tadaṅgavasena samādhisahitaṃ paññāsahitañca vikkhambhanavasena samucchedavasena ca accantaṃ mokkheti mocetīti pātimokkho.
“主解脱”(patimokkho)之所以得名,是因为它从每一种、每一种违犯的过失中,各自分别地解脱出来,这就是它的含义。主解脱本身就是“巴帝摩卡”(pātimokkho)。或者说,解脱就是涅槃,而它是那个解脱的映像,所以叫“主解脱”。因为戒的防护就像太阳升起前的曙光,既是涅槃生起的先兆,也与涅槃相似——因为它能相应地熄灭烦恼;主解脱本身就是“巴帝摩卡”。或者说,它转向并面向解脱,所以叫“主解脱”(patimokkha);主解脱本身就是“巴帝摩卡”。在这里,“巴帝摩卡”这个词的含义,首先应当这样来理解。巴利
Pati pati mokkhoti vā patimokkho, tamhā tamhā vītikkamadosato paccekaṃ mokkhetīti attho, patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Mokkho vā nibbānaṃ, tassa mokkhassa paṭibimbabhūtoti patimokkho. Sīlasaṃvaro hi sūriyassa aruṇuggamanaṃ viya nibbānassa udayabhūto tappaṭibhāgo ca yathārahaṃ kilesanibbāpanato, patimokkhoyeva pātimokkho. Pativattati mokkhābhimukhanti vā patimokkhaṃ, patimokkhameva pātimokkhanti evaṃ tāvettha pātimokkhasaddassa attho veditabbo.
能防护、能关闭,所以叫“防护”(saṃvaro);巴帝摩卡本身就是防护,所以叫“巴帝摩卡防护”(pātimokkhasaṃvaro)。它就是戒,也就是“巴帝摩卡防护戒”(pātimokkhasaṃvarasīla);但从含义上说,它既是对种种应当避免的违犯之处的远离,也是思。巴利
Saṃvarati pidahati etenāti saṃvaro, pātimokkhameva saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro. So eva sīlaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ, atthato pana tato tato vītikkamitabbato viratiyo ceva cetanā ca.
称为增上戒,是因为它彻底具备身与语的防护,并且是道戒的近依处,所以巴帝摩卡防护戒是更上等、更殊胜的戒,因此称为增上戒。“Pajjotānaṃ”就是诸光明。难道独觉佛不也是依法的本性而具备巴帝摩卡防护戒吗?既然如此,为什么限定说“只在佛出世时才有流布,没有佛出世就没有”呢?所以接着说“并非除去那施设……”等等。虽然独觉佛也具备巴帝摩卡防护戒,但并不是依他们而广为流布,这是这里的意旨。“对于这种事、这种违犯,有这种名称”的施设,不是其他人的领域,只有诸佛才有这个领域,是诸佛的力量,所以说“然而只有诸佛……”等等。世间戒被称为增上戒,是就方便说而言;为了显示其究竟说,就说“比巴帝摩卡防护更上的,即与道果相应的戒,才是增上戒”。所谓“成就此的比丘”,是针对居士中的入流者可能发生对妻子的违犯而说的。因为他们确实与妻子儿女一起住在家里。巴利
Adhisīlanti vuccatīti anavasesato kāyikavācasikasaṃvarabhāvato ca maggasīlassa padaṭṭhānabhāvato ca pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ adhikaṃ visiṭṭhaṃ sīlaṃ adhisīlanti vuccati. Pajjotānanti ālokānaṃ. Nanu ca paccekabuddhāpi dhammatāvasena pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlena samannāgatāva honti, evaṃ sati kasmā ‘‘buddhuppādeyeva pavattati, na vinā buddhuppādā’’ti niyametvā vuttanti āha – ‘‘na hi taṃ paññattiṃ uddharitvā’’tiādi. Kiñcāpi paccekabuddhā pātimokkhasaṃvarasampannāgatā honti, na pana tesaṃ vasena vitthāritaṃ hutvā pavattatīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ imasmiṃ vītikkame idaṃ nāma hotī’’ti paññapanaṃ aññesaṃ avisayo, buddhānaṃyeva esa visayo, buddhānaṃ balanti āha – ‘‘buddhāyeva panā’’tiādi. Lokiyasīlassa adhisīlabhāvo pariyāyenāti nippariyāyameva taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvaratopi ca maggaphalasampayuttameva sīlaṃ adhisīla’’nti vuttaṃ. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhūti gahaṭṭhesu sotāpannānaṃ sadāravītikkamasambhavato vuttaṃ. Tathā hi te saputtadārā agāraṃ ajjhāvasanti.
令他人受持与自己受持:令他人受持,以及自己受持。称为增上心:因为它是道定的依止状态,所以称为增上心。非离佛出世:虽然独觉佛确实有作为观禅基础的八等至心,但他们不能令其他人在此受持,所以不是依他们而详细流布、运转,这是意旨。对于观慧的增上慧性成就,“非离佛出世”这句话也应知是依此意旨而说的。世间心的增上心性,是就权说而言;为了显示其就实说,而说“比那更上的,即道果心才是增上心”。然而,依此注释书之语“但此于此非所意许”,可知依世间心而说的增上心学,在这里也是所意许的。而“成就此的比丘,不行淫欲法”这句话,则会导致“成就世间增上心者,行淫欲法”的过失。在增上慧的解释中,说了“比那更上的,即道果慧才是增上慧”之后,又说“但那于此非所意许。因为成就此的比丘,不行淫欲法”,由此可知,依世间慧而说的增上慧学,在这里也是所意许的,而且注释书中允许成就那者行淫欲法。然而,这一切与“其中,此增上戒学,是于此义中所意许之学”这段圣典不相符合。因为这段圣典阐明:只有增上戒学是于此所意许的,而非其他。因此,圣典与注释书的意旨应这样了知:当成就世间增上心、增上慧者,依于那样的缘而生起“我将行淫欲法”的心时,可能从那增上心、增上慧退失,因此,成就那两者的人不可能行淫欲法,所以圣典中只说了增上戒学。因为增上戒学,只要不造作违犯,就仍是成就的状态。并非仅凭心生起,巴帝摩卡防护戒就称为已破。而在注释书中则说:比丘即使从世间增上心、增上慧退失,也可能有时行淫欲法,所以不否定那两者;但由于道果法有不可动摇的本质,成就那的比丘绝不可能从那里退失而行淫欲法,因此应知唯对出世间增上心、增上慧作了否定。巴利
Samādāpanaṃsamādānañcāti aññesaṃ samādāpanaṃ sayaṃ samādānañca. Adhicittanti vuccatīti maggasamādhissa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato adhicittanti vuccati. Na vinā buddhuppādāti kiñcāpi paccekabuddhānaṃ vipassanāpādakaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ hotiyeva, na pana te tattha aññe samādāpetuṃ sakkontīti na tesaṃ vasena vitthāritaṃ hutvā pavattatīti adhippāyo. Vipassanāpaññāyapi adhipaññatāsādhane ‘‘na vinā buddhuppādā’’ti vacanaṃ imināva adhippāyena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Lokiyacittassa adhicittatā pariyāyenāti nippariyāyameva taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatopi ca maggaphalacittameva adhicitta’’nti āha. Taṃ pana idha anadhippetanti iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanena lokiyacittassa vasena adhicittasikkhāpi idha adhippetāti viññāyati. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevatīti ca iminā lokiyaadhicittaṃ samāpanno methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevatīti āpannaṃ. Adhipaññāniddese ca ‘‘tatopi ca maggaphalapaññāva adhipaññā’’ti vatvā ‘‘sā pana idha anadhippetā. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevatī’’ti vuttattā lokiyapaññāvasena adhipaññāsikkhāyapi idhādhippetabhāvo taṃ samāpannassa methunadhammapaṭisevanañca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ anuññātanti viññāyati. Idañca sabbaṃ ‘‘tatra yāyaṃ adhisīlasikkhā, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā sikkhā’’ti imāya pāḷiyā na sameti. Ayañhi pāḷi adhisīlasikkhāva idha adhippetā, na itarāti dīpeti, tasmā pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca evamadhippāyo veditabbo – lokiyaadhicittaadhipaññāsamāpannassa tathārūpapaccayaṃ paṭicca ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevissāmī’’ti citte uppanne tato adhicittato adhipaññato ca parihāni sambhavatīti taṃ dvayaṃ samāpannena na sakkā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitunti pāḷiyaṃ adhisīlasikkhāva vuttā. Adhisīlasikkhañhi yāva vītikkamaṃ na karoti, tāva samāpannova hoti. Na hi cittuppādamattena pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ bhinnaṃ nāma hotīti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana lokiyaadhicittato adhipaññato ca parihāyitvāpi bhikkhuno methunadhammapaṭisevanaṃ kadāci bhaveyyāti taṃ dvayaṃ appaṭikkhipitvā maggaphaladhammānaṃ akuppasabhāvattā taṃ samāpannassa bhikkhuno tato parihāyitvā methunadhammapaṭisevanaṃ nāma na kadāci sambhavatīti lokuttarādhicittaadhipaññānaṃyeva paṭikkhepo katoti veditabbo.
“有布施,有供养”等这一类展开的说法,用这句话来说明:巴利
Atthi dinnaṃ atthi yiṭṭhantiādinayappavattanti iminā –
在这里,什么是“业自属智”?就是认为:有布施,有供养,有献祭,有善业和恶业各自的果报,有这个世界,有另一个世界,有母亲,有父亲,有化生的众生,世间有沙门婆罗门走正道、修行正确,他们自己以胜智证知这个世界和另一个世界之后,把它宣说出来——像这样的慧、了知……无痴、择法、正见,这就叫业自属智。除了随顺谛智以外,一切有漏的善慧都是业自属智。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ kammassakataññāṇaṃ? ‘Atthi dinnaṃ, atthi yiṭṭhaṃ, atthi hutaṃ, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko, atthi ayaṃ loko, atthi paro loko, atthi mātā, atthi pitā, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammā paṭipannā, ye imañca lokaṃ parañca lokaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti yā evarūpā paññā pajānanā…pe… amoho dhammavicayo sammādiṭṭhi, idaṃ vuccati kammassakataññāṇaṃ. Ṭhapetvā saccānulomikaṃ ñāṇaṃ sabbāpi sāsavā kusalā paññā kammassakataññāṇa’’nti (vibha. 793) –
把这部《分别论》巴利原文收摄进来。巴利
Imaṃ vibhaṅgapāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
在这里,对于“有布施”等说法,应当通过“以布施为缘而有果报”这一方式来了知它的含义。“布施”是以所施之物为代表而说的施舍。“供养”指大祭祀,意思是众人共享的大布施。“献祭”指的是充足的恭敬供养。“有母,有父”是说对父母行正行或邪行,会产生相应的果报。“这被称为”的意思是:能了知“此业属于自己的,此业不属于自己的”这种智慧,就叫做业自属智。其中,三种身恶行、四种语恶行、三种意恶行,这些叫做不属于自己的业;在三门中的十种善行,则叫做属于自己的业。无论业是属于自己还是属于他人,一切不善都叫做不属于自己的业。为什么呢?因为它破坏利益、产生不利。无论业是属于自己还是属于他人,一切善都叫做属于自己的业。为什么呢?因为它破坏不利、产生利益。安住在能这样了知的业自属智中,广行布施、圆满戒行、受持伍波萨他,从安乐到安乐、从成就到成就地享受之后,证得涅槃的众生,其数量无法计算。除了随顺谛智之外——所谓“随顺谛智”,是因为随顺道谛和胜义谛而得名的观智——其余一切有漏善慧都是业自属智。巴利
Tattha (vibha. aṭṭha. 793) atthi dinnantiādīsu dinnapaccayā phalaṃ atthīti iminā upāyena attho veditabbo. Dinnanti ca deyyadhammasīsena dānaṃ vuttaṃ. Yiṭṭhanti mahāyāgo, sabbasādhāraṇaṃ mahādānanti attho. Hutanti pahonakasakkāro adhippeto. Atthi mātā, atthi pitāti mātāpitūsu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattiādīnaṃ phalasambhavo vutto. Idaṃ vuccatīti yaṃ ñāṇaṃ ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ sakaṃ, idaṃ no saka’’nti jānāti, idaṃ kammassakataññāṇaṃ nāma vuccatīti attho. Tattha tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ catubbidhaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ tividhaṃ manoduccaritanti idaṃ na sakakammaṃ nāma, tīsu dvāresu dasavidhampi sucaritaṃ sakakammaṃ nāma. Attano vāpi hotu parassa vā, sabbampi akusalaṃ na sakakammaṃ nāma. Kasmā? Atthabhañjanato anatthajananato ca. Attano vā hotu parassa vā, sabbampi kusalaṃ sakakammaṃ nāma. Kasmā? Anatthabhañjanato atthajananato ca. Evaṃ jānanasamatthe imasmiṃ kammassakataññāṇe ṭhatvā bahuṃ dānaṃ datvā sīlaṃ pūretvā uposathaṃ samādiyitvā sukhena sukhaṃ sampattiyā sampattiṃ anubhavitvā nibbānaṃ pattānaṃ sattānaṃ gaṇanaparicchedo natthi. Ṭhapetvā saccānulomikaṃ ñāṇanti maggasaccassa paramatthasaccassa ca anulomanato saccānulomikanti laddhanāmaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā sabbāpi sāsavā kusalā paññā kammassakataññāṇamevāti attho.
能辨别三相的行相,是指能切断“无常等三种特相生起后又消失等行相”的智慧。称为增上慧,是说观智因为是道慧的依止处,所以称为增上慧。巴利
Tilakkhaṇākāraparicchedakanti aniccādilakkhaṇattayassa hutvā abhāvādiākārapaacchindanakaṃ. Adhipaññāti vuccatīti maggapaññāya adhiṭṭhānabhāvato vipassanāñāṇaṃ adhipaññāti vuccati.
“ 行善者得善,作恶者得恶。
他体验这二重,并跟随造作者。”巴利
‘‘Kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ, pāpakārī ca pāpakaṃ; Anubhoti dvayametaṃ, anubandhati kāraka’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.256);
过去和未来的轮回根本之苦也是同样:这“业自属慧”,在观察此种苦时成为令人警醒的事由,又因渴望解脱而成为助缘,因而也被称为增上慧。世俗慧具有增上慧的性质,这只是方便的说法;为了以究竟说显示它,才说:“从那一层来说,只有道慧和果慧才是增上慧。”巴利
Evaṃ atīte anāgate ca vaṭṭamūlakadukkhasallakkhaṇavasena saṃvegavatthutāya vimuttiākaṅkhāya paccayabhūtā kammassakatapaññā adhipaññātipi vadanti. Lokiyapaññāya adhipaññābhāvo pariyāyenāti nippariyāyameva taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatopi ca maggaphalapaññāva adhipaññā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“他们共同依此而活”,因此称为“共活”,这是说一切学处,所以说道:“一切……中略……因此称为共活。”其中,“学处”是指佛陀所说的言教,即所谓“名身、句身、词身、字身”。“同分活命者”意思是相同活命者、相似而行者。“于彼学”一句中,依处有待于所依,须先说明依处所依的是什么,才标出“于彼”这个依处;所以说道:“以彼学处为心之依处。”意思是:把那称为共活的学处作为所缘,依“我是否依学处而学、未学”这样的方式运作,以学处为境,以它为所依,这样的心就是依处。难道不应当这样解释“学与共活具足者”一词吗?即,先显示所学与共活二者,然后说“于他们中学,故名为学与共活具足者”。为何不这样说,而只说“于彼学,故名为共活具足者”这么一点呢?针对这内在的诘问,才说:“并非仅此……”等。巴利
Saha ājīvanti etthāti sājīvoti sabbasikkhāpadaṃ vuttanti āha – ‘‘sabbampi…pe… tasmā sājīvanti vuccatī’’ti. Tattha sikkhāpadanti ‘‘nāmakāyo padakāyo niruttikāyo byañjanakāyo’’ti vuttaṃ bhagavato vacanasaṅkhātaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ. Sabhāgavuttinoti samānavuttikā, sadisappavattikāti attho. Tasmiṃ sikkhatīti ettha ādheyyāpekkhattā adhikaraṇassa kimādheyyamapekkhitvā ‘‘tasmi’’nti adhikaraṇaṃ niddiṭṭhanti āha – ‘‘taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ cittassa adhikaraṇaṃ katvā’’ti, taṃ sājīvasaṅkhātaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ ‘‘yathāsikkhāpadaṃ nu kho sikkhāmi, na sikkhāmī’’ti evaṃ pavattivasena sikkhāpadavisayattā tadādheyyabhūtassa cittassa adhikaraṇaṃ katvāti attho. Nanu ca ‘‘sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’ti imassa padabhājanaṃ karontena ‘‘yaṃ sikkhaṃ sājīvañca samāpanno, tadubhayaṃ dassetvā tesu sikkhati, tena vuccati sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, evamavatvā ‘‘tasmiṃ sikkhati, tena vuccati sājīvasamāpanno’’ti ettakameva kasmā vuttanti antolīnacodanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘na kevalañcāyametasmi’’ntiādi.
圆满守护戒,意思是:依止持戒,让与远离相应的思在自己心中生起;依止作持戒,让与远离不相应的思在自己心中生起。而“于彼学处不违犯而学”,意思是:对于世尊所说、被称为“名身、句身、词身、字身”的学处,成为不违犯者,并在那学处上修学。圆满守护戒和不违犯正命,这两者就是这里所说的“学”,这是要旨。其中,不违犯正命是学处圆满的助缘,因为从不违犯正命开始,直到证道之间,学处都能圆满。此外,这里“以圆满学而学”这一句,特别指的是被称为远离思的守护戒在自己相续中生起的时候;而“以不违犯而学”这一句,则也包括它没有生起的时候。因为无论是以圆满的方式让学在自己心中生起,还是由于睡眠等原因而没有生起,由于没有违犯,所以都称为“不违犯而学”。巴利
Sīlasaṃvaraṃ paripūrento, vārittasīlavasena viratisampayuttaṃ cetanaṃ cārittasīlavasena virativippayuttaṃ cetanañca attani pavattentoti attho. Tasmiñca sikkhāpade avītikkamanto sikkhatīti ‘‘nāmakāyo padakāyo niruttikāyo byañjanakāyo’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavato vacanasaṅkhātaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ avītikkamanto hutvā tasmiṃ yathāvuttasikkhāpade sikkhatīti attho. Sīlasaṃvarapūraṇaṃ sājīvānatikkamanañcāti idameva ca dvayaṃ idha sikkhanaṃ nāmāti adhippāyo. Tattha sājīvānatikkamo sikkhāpāripūriyā paccayo. Sājīvānatikkamato hi yāva maggā sikkhāpāripūrī hoti. Apicettha ‘‘sikkhaṃ paripūrento sikkhatī’’ti iminā viraticetanāsaṅkhātassa sīlasaṃvarassa visesato santāne pavattanakālova gahito, ‘‘avītikkamanto sikkhatī’’ti iminā pana appavattanakālopi. Sikkhañhi paripūraṇavasena attani pavattentopi niddādivasena appavattentopi vītikkamābhāvā ‘‘avītikkamanto sikkhatī’’ti vuccatīti.
舍弃学处分别的注释巴利
Sikkhāpaccakkhānavibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
“不舍弃,因为未被舍弃”这两种读法,在三部《结句》里都有提到。“即使软弱已显露”是指在“我何不舍弃佛陀”这类话里,把软弱的状态表现出来的时候。而“因为学已被舍弃”则是指通过“我舍弃佛陀”这类话,学已被舍弃。因为一旦采用“重述词”,前后两句就变得连贯;不采用时就不会连贯,所以“重述词”的作用只是让文句连贯,因此说“为了文句的连贯”。“因为已挂在嘴上”的意思是:因为这样的说法在世人中已经口耳相传,所以说这句话。巴利
‘‘Appaccakkhāya appaccakkhātāyā’’ti ubhayathāpi pāṭho tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vutto. Dubbalye āvikatepīti ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ buddhaṃ paccakkheyya’’ntiādinā dubbalabhāve pakāsitepi. Sikkhāya pana paccakkhātāyāti ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā sikkhāya paccakkhātāya. Yasmā dirattavacane gahite tena purimapacchimapadāni saṃsiliṭṭhāni honti, na tasmiṃ aggahite, tasmā dirattavacanena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattameva payojananti āha ‘‘byañjanasiliṭṭhatāyā’’ti. Mukhāruḷhatāyāti yasmā evarūpaṃ vacanaṃ lokassa mukhamāruḷhaṃ, tasmāti attho.
“令文句圆满”:因为这个词没有单独的意义,所以用另一个词来说明已经说过的意义,这就是使文句圆满。为了用理由把已经说过的意义分析清楚,他说了“因为缺少随转词”等话。能显示意义的词,就是义理词。巴利
Byañjanaṃsampādetīti tassa visuṃ atthābhāvato vuttamevatthaṃ aññapadena dīpento byañjanaṃ sampādeti. Vuttamevatthaṃ kāraṇena vibhāvento āha ‘‘parivārakapadavirahitañhī’’tiādi. Atthadīpakaṃ padaṃ atthapadaṃ.
关于舍弃修学这句话,指的是“我舍弃佛”这类舍弃修学的话语。在“我舍弃佛”等说法中,因为经里说过“比丘们,这样确实既是示弱的表现,也是舍弃了修学”,所以两者都成立,因此说“其中一部分是示弱的意思”。虽然“我舍弃佛”这类舍弃修学的话语,其词义本身并不是示弱,但说出“我舍弃佛”时,在修学圆满方面所表现的软弱也会被领会到,所以说“舍弃修学的话语中,有一部分是示弱的意思”。所谓“就此而言”,是指就那个作为其含义的示弱来说的。巴利
Sikkhāpaccakkhānassāti ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādisikkhāpaccakkhānavacanassa. ‘‘Buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādīsu ‘‘evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca paccakkhātā’’ti vuttattā ubhayampi hotīti āha – ‘‘ekaccaṃ dubbalyāvikammaṃ attho hotī’’ti. Kiñcāpi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādisikkhāpaccakkhānavacanassa dubbalyāvikammapadattho na hoti, tathāpi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vutte sikkhāparipūraṇe dubbalyāvibhāvassapi gamyamānattā ‘‘sikkhāpaccakkhānassa ekaccaṃ dubbalyāvikammaṃ attho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Naṃ sandhāyāti naṃ atthabhūtaṃ dubbalyāvikammaṃ sandhāya.
关于“有差别与无差别”:在这里,如果某种情况只是示弱,而不是舍弃学处,那么在这种情况下,舍弃学处和示弱之间是有差别的。但如果某种情况既是舍弃学处又是示弱,那就应当知道,这两者之间没有差别。“生活艰难者”:因为这是在诸界中已经讲到的,所以说“已陷入艰难维生者”。厌倦就是艰难维生,从这里到达那种状态者就叫“厌倦者”。“从这里”是指从这个住处,或者从这个寺院。“这里”说的是他想去的地方。因为被不满逼迫,心神散乱,抬起头来,仰着脸,从这里到那里四处张望地游走,所以说“伸着脖子住”。巴利
Visesāvisesanti ettha yena dubbalyāvikammameva hoti, na sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ, tattha sikkhāpaccakkhānadubbalyāvikammānaṃ atthi viseso. Yena pana sikkhāpaccakkhānañceva dubbalyāvikammañca hoti, tattha nevatthi visesoti veditabbaṃ. Kaṭhakicchajīvaneti dhātūsu paṭhitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kicchajīvikappatto’’ti. Ukkaṇṭhanaṃ ukkaṇṭhā, kicchajīvikā, taṃ ito pattoti ukkaṇṭhito. Itoti ito ṭhānato, ito vihārato vā. Etthāti gantumicchitaṃ padesaṃ vadati. Anabhiratiyā pīḷito vikkhittacitto hutvā sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā uddhaṃmukho ito cito ca olokento āhiṇḍatīti āha ‘‘uddhaṃ kaṇṭhaṃ katvā viharamāno’’ti.
这里“正被折磨”的意思是:他把“自己”当成一个被折磨的东西那样来对待,所以说是“正被折磨”。因为“aṭṭīya”这个词本身就含有比喻所依据的行为,所以这个行为的直接对象是作为比喻本体的“自己”,而不是“比丘身份”。因此注释里说“比丘身份——以比丘身份”。他并不是把比丘身份当成被折磨的东西那样来对待,而是把自己当成被折磨的东西来对待。所以,“比丘身份”应当理解为完成这个行为的工具,也就是工具格意义上的业格,因此说“折磨自己”,这里的意思应当这样理解。注释说“工具格意义上的业格”,就是这个意思。至于“被卡在喉咙里的东西折磨”这一说法,这里纯粹是工具格,所以注释说“按照它的特征,只用工具格来表达”。或者,也可以把它理解为主动者意义上的业格,所以注释说“或者以那个比丘身份”等等,意思是以那个作为主动者的比丘身份。在这个意思里,“aṭṭīyati”是从“aṭṭaṃ karoti”(制造折磨)派生出来的,然后加上表示被动意义的“māna”,构成“aṭṭīyamāno”,应当这样理解这个词的构成。因此注释说:“正被折磨、正被逼迫。”
“正厌恶者”:在这个语境里,“比丘身份”是业格的意义,所以注释说“像厌恶不净物那样厌恶它”,意思是厌恶那个比丘身份。“如果我”:意思是如果我。巴利
Aṭṭīyamānoti ettha aṭṭamiva attānamācarati aṭṭīyatīti aṭṭīyasaddassa antogadhaupamānabhūtakammattā upameyyabhūtena attanāva sakammakattaṃ, na bhikkhubhāvenāti āha ‘‘bhikkhubhāvanti bhikkhubhāvenā’’ti. Na hi so bhikkhubhāvaṃ aṭṭamiva ācarati, kiñcarahi attānaṃ tasmā bhikkhubhāvena karaṇabhūtena attānaṃ aṭṭīyamānoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘karaṇatthe upayogavacana’’nti. Kaṇṭhe āsattena aṭṭīyeyyāti ettha pana karaṇattheyeva karaṇavacananti āha – ‘‘yathālakkhaṇaṃ karaṇavacaneneva vutta’’nti. Kattuatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbanti āha – ‘‘tena vā bhikkhubhāvenā’’tiādi, tena kattubhūtena bhikkhubhāvenāti attho. Imasmiṃ panatthe aṭṭaṃ karotīti aṭṭīyatīti aṭṭīya-saddaṃ nipphādetvā tato kammani māna-sadde kate ‘‘aṭṭīyamāno’’ti padasiddhi veditabbā. Tenevāha – ‘‘aṭṭo kariyamāno pīḷiyamāno’’ti. Jigucchamānoti iminā pana sambandhe kariyamāne bhikkhubhāvanti upayogatthe eva upayogavacananti āha – ‘‘asuciṃ viya taṃ jigucchanto’’ti, taṃ bhikkhubhāvaṃ jigucchantoti attho. Sacāhanti sace ahaṃ.
因为经里说“应舍弃、应舍弃”,所以是依着与舍弃行为相关的方式而说,才叫“以舍弃方式所说”。所谓“以状态分别方式”,是因为经里出现“我愿成为、我愿成为”这样的话,所以对于想成就的每一种状态,都以分别的方式来说;也就是说,以比丘身份之外的其他种种状态的分别方式来说——这里的意思就是这样。巴利
Paccakkhānākārena vuttānīti ‘‘paccakkheyyaṃ paccakkheyya’’nti vuttattā paccakkhānākārasambandhena vuttāni. Bhāvavikappākārenāti ‘‘assaṃ assa’’nti āgatattā yaṃ yaṃ bhavitukāmo, tassa tassa bhāvassa vikappākārena, bhikkhubhāvato aññabhāvavikappākārenāti adhippāyo.
50 我不堪,是在显示自己在各处都没有努力。我不能,是在显示对一食等事无法承受。我不乐,是在显示“我的快乐不在出家的根本”。我不喜,是在显示自己对出家没有满足感。巴利
50.Na ussahāmīti attano tattha tattha ussahābhāvaṃ dasseti. Na visahāmīti ekabhattādīnaṃ asayhabhāvaṃ dasseti. Na ramāmīti ‘‘pabbajjāmūlakaṃ natthi me sukha’’nti dasseti. Nābhiramāmīti pabbajjāya attano santosābhāvaṃ dasseti.
现在,站在舍戒这一部分来说,应当了解这样的判定——其中,用“想要舍弃沙门性”等语句,显示心的限定。用“佛、法”等语句,显示对象的限定。就像世间把谷物生长的地方叫作“田”,这里也因为它是舍戒生起的地方,所以叫作“田”。用“我舍,请你记住”这句话,显示时间的限定。用“说”这个字,显示方式的限定。用“我已不需要佛,佛对我有什么用,佛对我没有利益,我已从佛善解脱”等语句,显示即使不涉及特定时间,舍戒也能成立。用“告知”这个字,显示对方了知的限定。用“疯癫者舍戒,在疯癫者面前舍戒”等语句,显示人的限定。用“以圣典语在蛮族人面前舍戒,而他不明白,戒没有舍”等语句,显示即使具备人等的限定,但缺少了知的限定,也不能成立。用“为了嬉戏而舍戒,戒没有舍”等语句,显示即使具备对象等的限定,但缺少心的限定,也不能生起。用“想要告知却不告知,戒没有舍”这句话,显示即使具备心的限定,但缺少方式的限定,也不能生起。用“对不明白的人告知,对明白的人不告知”等语句,显示即使心、对象、时间、方式、人、了知等限定都具备,也只有当所针对的那个人听到了,才能成立,别人听到不算。而“或者完全不告知,戒没有舍”这句话,是为了说明只有具备心等限定,戒才算舍了,不是别的情形。因此,应当依据心、对象、时间、方式、人、了知这些限定来理解舍戒,缺少这些条件就应知道没有舍戒。巴利
Idāni sikkhāpaccakkhānavāre ṭhatvā ayaṃ vinicchayo veditabbo – tattha ‘‘sāmaññā cavitukāmo’’tiādīhi padehi cittaniyamaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Buddhaṃ dhamma’’ntiādīhi padehi khettaniyamaṃ dasseti. Yathā hi loke sassānaṃ ruhanaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘khetta’’nti vuccati, evamidampi sikkhāpaccakkhānassa ruhanaṭṭhānattā ‘‘khetta’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Paccakkhāmi dhārehī’’ti etena kālaniyamaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vadatī’’ti iminā payoganiyamaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Alaṃ me buddhena, kinnu me buddhena, na mamattho buddhena, sumuttāhaṃ buddhenā’’tiādīhi anāmaṭṭhakālavasenapi paccakkhānaṃ hotīti dasseti. ‘‘Viññāpetī’’ti iminā vijānananiyamaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ummattako sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, ummattakassa santike sikkhaṃ paccakkhātī’’tiādīhi puggalaniyamaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ariyakena milakkhassa santike sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, so ca nappaṭivijānāti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’tiādīhi puggalādiniyame satipi vijānananiyamāsambhavaṃ dasseti . ‘‘Davāya sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’tiādīhi khettādiniyame satipi cittaniyamābhāvena na ruhatīti dasseti. ‘‘Sāvetukāmo na sāveti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’ti iminā cittaniyamepi sati payoganiyamābhāvena na ruhatīti dasseti. ‘‘Aviññussa sāveti, viññussa na sāvetī’’ti etehi cittakhettakālapayogapuggalavijānananiyamepi sati yaṃ puggalaṃ uddissa sāveti, tasseva savanena ruhati, na aññassāti dasseti. ‘‘Sabbaso vā pana na sāveti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’ti idaṃ pana cittādiniyameneva sikkhā paccakkhātā hoti, na aññathāti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā cittakhettakālapayogapuggalavijānananiyamavasena sikkhāya paccakkhānaṃ ñatvā tadabhāvena appaccakkhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
怎么会这样?因为只有以想要舍弃具足戒的心,才会成立舍戒,并不是在嬉笑或喧闹中说话时成立的。所以,舍戒是以心而成立,不是在没有这个心的情况下也能成立。巴利
Kathaṃ? Upasampannabhāvato cavitukāmatācitteneva hi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na davā vā ravā vā bhaṇantassa. Evaṃ cittavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
同样地,若按这样的说法说:“我舍弃佛,我舍弃法,我舍弃僧,我舍弃学处,我舍弃律,我舍弃巴帝摩卡,我舍弃诵戒,我舍弃和尚,我舍弃阿阇梨,我舍弃共住弟子,我舍弃近住弟子,我舍弃同和尚者,我舍弃同阿阇梨者,我舍弃梵行同伴”——即如上所说的佛等十四种;又说:“请记住我是居士、近事男、园民、沙弥、外道、外道弟子、非沙门、非释子”——即如上所说的居士等八种。对这二十二种对象词,不论针对其中哪一种,也不论用它的哪一个同义词,只要想说、只要说出其中任何一项,舍戒即成立;反之,若取树木等其他名称而说,则不成立舍戒。因此,舍戒是依对象而成立,不是没有这个对象。巴利
Tathā ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi, saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmi, sikkhaṃ, vinayaṃ, pātimokkhaṃ, uddesaṃ, upajjhāyaṃ, ācariyaṃ, saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ, samānupajjhāyakaṃ, samānācariyakaṃ, sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ catuddasannaṃ, ‘‘gihīti maṃ dhārehi, upāsako, ārāmiko, sāmaṇero, titthiyo, titthiyasāvako, assamaṇo, asakyaputtiyoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ gihiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannañcāti imesaṃ dvāvīsatiyā khettapadānaṃ yassa kassaci savevacanassa vasena tesu ca yaṃkiñci vattukāmassa yaṃkiñci vadatopi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na rukkhādīnaṃ aññatarassa nāmaṃ gahetvā sikkhaṃ paccakkhantassa. Evaṃ khettavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
在这里,像“我舍弃”和“请记住我”这类话,是现在时的表达。另有像“我不需要佛了,佛对我有什么用,佛对我没有意义,我已从佛那里很好地解脱了”等等这样的说法,它们不指明时态,与前面十四个词搭配而说,即“我不需要”等四个词以及它们的同义说法,舍戒依这些而成立。并不是说“我已舍弃”“我将舍弃”“你已记住我”“你将记住我”或“我何不舍弃”等过去、未来或假设的说法,对说这些话的人也成立。如此,舍戒依现在时态、也依不指明时态而成立,并非没有这些也能成立。巴利
Tattha yadetaṃ ‘‘paccakkhāmī’’ti ca ‘‘maṃ dhārehī’’ti ca vuttaṃ vattamānakālavacanaṃ, yāni ca ‘‘alaṃ me buddhena, kinnu me buddhena, na mamattho buddhena, sumuttāhaṃ buddhenā’’tiādinā nayena ākhyātavasena kālaṃ anāmasitvā purimehi cuddasahi padehi saddhiṃ yojetvā vuttāni ‘‘alaṃ me’’tiādīni cattāri padāni, tesaṃyeva ca savevacanānaṃ vasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na ‘‘paccakkhāsi’’nti vā ‘‘paccakkhissa’’nti vā ‘‘maṃ dhāresī’’ti vā ‘‘dhāressasī’’ti vā ‘‘yanūnāhaṃ paccakkheyya’’nti vātiādīni atītānāgataparikappavacanāni bhaṇantassa. Evaṃ vattamānakālavasena ceva anāmaṭṭhakālavasena ca paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
舍弃的方式有两种:身体的行为和言语的行为。其中,像“我舍弃佛”这样,用任何一种语言说出话来,只有通过言语的行为才算舍弃,而不是在写字或者做手势等身体行为的时候舍弃。如此,只有通过言语的行为才算舍弃,没有这个就不算舍弃。巴利
Payogo pana duvidho kāyiko vācasiko. Tattha ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā nayena yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vacībhedaṃ katvā vācasikapayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na akkharalikhanaṃ vā hatthamuddādidassanaṃ vā kāyapayogaṃ karontassa. Evaṃ vācasikapayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
人则有两种:一种是舍戒的人,另一种是被舍戒的人。其中,舍戒的人只要不是疯子、心乱者、被剧痛所逼者这一类人中的任何一种就行。而被舍戒的人,只要他是人类,又不是疯子等这一类人中的任何一种,并且当面在场,舍戒才能成立。因为如果对方不在场,就算通过信使或书信告知,舍戒也不成立。如此,依照上面所说的人的条件,舍戒才能成立,并不是没有这个对方也能舍戒。巴利
Puggalo pana duvidho yo ca paccakkhāti, yassa ca paccakkhāti. Tattha yo paccakkhāti, so sace ummattakakhittacittavedanāṭṭānaṃ aññataro na hoti. Yassa pana paccakkhāti, so sace manussajātiko hoti, na ca ummattakādīnaṃ aññataro, sammukhībhūto ca sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti. Na hi asammukhībhūtassa dūtena vā paṇṇena vā ārocanaṃ ruhati. Evaṃ yathāvuttapuggalavasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
认知也分两种:指定和没有指定。其中,如果指定了某人或某些人,说“我告诉这个人或这些人”,假如他们像世间普通人那样,一听话就能在作意的时候明白,那么在他话刚说完时,他们不管通过什么方式,比如“这个人厌烦了”或者“这个人想要过在家生活”,知道了他舍戒这件事,戒就算已经舍了。如果他们是后来才想“他刚才说了什么”然后才知道,或者是别人知道,那戒就还没有舍。如果没有指定而告诉对方,那么按照前面说的方式,只要有任何一个人类听懂了话里的意思,戒就已经舍了。这样,舍戒是靠认知成立的,不是没有这个认知也能舍戒。因此应当看到,舍戒就是靠前面说的这些心等等才成立的,不是靠别的什么方式。巴利
Vijānanampi niyamitāniyamitavasena duvidhaṃ. Tattha yassa yesaṃ vā niyametvā ‘‘imassa imesaṃ vā ārocemī’’ti vadati, sace te yathā pakatiyā loke manussā vacanaṃ sutvā āvajjanasamaye jānanti, evaṃ tassa vacanānantarameva tassa ‘‘ayaṃ ukkaṇṭhito’’ti vā ‘‘gihibhāvaṃ patthayatī’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena sikkhāpaccakkhānabhāvaṃ jānanti, paccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Atha aparabhāge ‘‘kiṃ iminā vutta’’nti cintetvā jānanti, aññe vā jānanti, appaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Aniyametvā ārocentassa pana sace vuttanayena yo koci manussajātiko vacanatthaṃ jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Evaṃ vijānanavasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Iti imesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ cittādīnaṃ vaseneva sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na aññathāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
51 51. 先说“说”,是为了显示运用言语表达这件事;紧接着又说“令知”,所以这里指的是通过同样的言语表达来传达意图,而不是通过别的什么方式,因此说“以同样的言语表达”。“把词倒过来”就是把词序颠倒。这样说,是因为词句的搭配并没有固定规则。就像世间可以看到,用不固定的词句搭配,比如“拿钵来,钵拿来”,就能传达那个意思;同样,这里用不固定的词句搭配,比如“我舍佛,舍佛我”,也能传达那个意思,这就是要点所在。“我舍佛”这个说明是以意义为主,不是以声音为主,所以说“或者用蛮语等任何一种语言说出那个意思”。要知道,除了摩揭陀语之外,其余所有语言,比如安达罗语、达弥罗语等,都算是蛮语。为了说明:即使想说出某个田地说,却说成了别的,由于仍然落在田地的范围内,学处仍然算已舍,所以说“想说‘我舍佛’时”等等。即使心里不想说“我舍佛”,而是想排斥它、说别的,却又失误说出了那句话,只要心里有想脱离教法的意愿,由于所说的仍然是田地,条件已经圆满,就应当知道舍学处已经成立。“落入田地”就是落入了构成舍学处成立之处的田地。巴利
51. ‘‘Vadatī’’ti vacībhedappayogaṃ dassetvā tadanantaraṃ ‘‘viññāpetī’’ti vuttattā teneva vacībhedena adhippāyaviññāpanaṃ idhādhippetaṃ, na yena kenaci upāyenāti āha ‘‘teneva vacībhedenā’’ti. Padapaccābhaṭṭhaṃ katvāti padaviparāvuttiṃ katvā. Idañca padappayogassa aniyamitattā vuttaṃ. Yathā hi loke ‘‘āhara pattaṃ, pattaṃ āharā’’ti aniyamitena padappayogena tadatthaviññāpanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, evamidhāpi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, paccakkhāmi buddha’’nti aniyamitena padappayogena tadatthaviññāpanaṃ hotiyevāti adhippāyo. Buddhaṃ paccakkhāmīti atthappadhāno ayaṃ niddeso, na saddappadhānoti āha ‘‘milakkhabhāsāsu vā aññatarabhāsāya tamatthaṃ vadeyyā’’ti. Māgadhabhāsato avasiṭṭhā sabbāpi andhadamiḷādibhāsā milakkhabhāsāti veditabbā. Khettapadesu ekaṃ vattukāmo sacepi aññaṃ vadeyya, khettapadantogadhattā paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhāti dassento āha ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmīti vattukāmo’’tiādi. Yadipi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vattuṃ anicchanto cittena taṃ paṭikkhipitvā aññaṃ vattukāmo puna virajjhitvā tameva vadeyya, tathāpi sāsanato cavitukāmatācitte sati khettapadasseva vuttattā aṅgapāripūrisambhavato hotveva sikkhāpaccakkhānanti veditabbaṃ. Khettameva otiṇṇanti sikkhāpaccakkhānassa ruhanaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ khettameva otiṇṇaṃ.
由于“我舍弃”这句话是针对正在发生的时刻作为主要表达方式而说的,所以用过去或未来的假设说法都不能成立舍学处。为了说明这一点,就说了“然而,如果‘舍弃佛’或者……”等等。
在“说、令知”当中,因为用“说”限定了行为方式,所以只有在某一个人面前,通过自己言语的表达,舍学处才能成立,而不是通过派遣使者传话等方式。为了说明这一点,就说了“或者派遣使者”等等。
其中,“或者派遣使者”是指口头传话:“请告诉他我舍学处这件事。”
“或者送信”是指把信写好后送出去。
“或者在树上等地方刻字”是指把字刻在树上等处让人看到。
“或者用手印告知那件事”是指用手势来传达意图。能传达意图的手势变化就是手印。这里“手”这个词,应该像“我不会把整只手放进嘴里”这类说法那样,理解为手指等部分。因此,这里的含义应该是:通过能传达意图的屈指等手势变化来告知那件事。巴利
‘‘Paccakkhāmi dhārehī’’ti vattamānakālassa padhānabhāvena vattumicchitattā atītānāgataparikappavacanehi nevatthi sikkhāpaccakkhānanti dassento āha ‘‘sace pana buddhaṃ paccakkhinti vā’’tiādi. Vadati viññāpetīti ettha vadatīti iminā payogassa niyamitattā ekassa santike attano vacībhedappayogeneva sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na dūtasāsanādippayogenāti dassento āha ‘‘dūtaṃ vā pahiṇātī’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘mama sikkhāpaccakkhānabhāvaṃ kathehī’’ti mukhasāsanavasena ‘‘dūtaṃ vā pahiṇātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṇṇe likhitvā pahiṇanavasena ‘‘sāsanaṃ vā pesetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Rukkhādīsu akkharāni likhitvā dassanavasena ‘‘akkharaṃ vā chindatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Hatthamuddāya vā tamatthaṃ ārocetīti hatthena adhippāyaviññāpanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Adhippāyaviññāpako hi hatthavikāro hatthamuddā. Hattha-saddo cettha tadekadesesu aṅgulīsu daṭṭhabbo ‘‘na sabbaṃ hatthaṃ mukhe pakkhipissāmī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 618) viya. Tasmā adhippāyaviññāpakena aṅgulisaṅkocādinā hatthavikārena tamatthaṃ ārocetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“与心相应”是指与想要舍弃的心相应。现在,为了说明从认知的角度来看,舍弃学处应分为限定和不限定两种,所以说道:“如果只让这个人知道”等等。应当理解,这种分类是依据“说和令知是同一对象,因此对谁说,就只让那个人认知,而不是让其他人认知”这一原则得出的。因为不可能存在对某人说却让另一个人知道的情况。“只有他知道”这个限定,排除了他不知道而旁边其他人知道的情况。因此说:“如果他不知道,站在旁边的另一个人知道,学处就没有舍弃。”所以,如果限定一个人并对他说“只让这个人知道”,那么,即便他和别人都知道,舍弃学处仍然成立——因为被限定者按所限定的范围去认知,这是可能的;毕竟“不让别人知道”这一条并没有被限定。所谓“对两个人限定而说”,是指这样限定并告知:“让两个人知道,或者让一个人知道,我只告诉这两个人。”因此说:“或者一个人知道时,或者两个人知道时。”所以,如果限定两个人并告知“只让这两个人知道,不让一个人知道”,那么只有在两个人都知道时,舍弃学处才成立,如果只有一个人知道则不成立,诸师是这样说的。巴利
Cittasampayuttanti paccakkhātukāmatācittasampayuttaṃ. Idāni vijānanavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ niyamitāniyamitavasena dvidhā veditabbanti dassento āha – ‘‘yadi ayameva jānātū’’tiādi. Ayañca vibhāgo ‘‘vadati viññāpetīti ekavisayattā yassa vadati, tasseva vijānanaṃ adhippetaṃ, na aññassā’’ti iminā nayena laddhoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi yassa vadati, tato aññaṃ viññāpetīti ayamattho sambhavati. Soyeva jānātīti avadhāraṇena tasmiṃ avijānanteyeva aññassa jānanaṃ paṭikkhipati. Tenevāha – ‘‘atha so na jānāti, añño samīpe ṭhito jānāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘ayameva jānātū’’ti ekaṃ niyametvā ārocite yadipi sopi jānāti aññopi, niyamitassa pana niyamitavasena vijānanasambhavato sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘añño mā jānātū’’ti aniyamitattā. Dvinnampi niyametvāti idaṃ ‘‘dve vā jānantu eko vā, imesaṃyeva dvinnaṃ ārocemī’’ti evaṃ niyametvā ārocanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘ekasmiṃjānantepi dvīsu jānantesupī’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘dveyeva jānantu, eko mā jānātū’’ti evaṃ dvinnaṃ niyametvā ārocite dvīsuyeva jānantesu sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na ekasmiṃ jānanteti vadanti.
“同法者”就是指可信赖的人。“担心被阻止”是指心里担忧:“如果他们知道了,就会来拦阻我。”“知时者”是指通达教法和行持的人,但在这里,仅仅凭着了知对方的意图,也可以叫“知时者”。所以论中说:“了知‘这个人已经厌离……已经脱离教法’。”因此,即使明白了“我舍弃佛”这句话的意思,如果不知道“这个比丘想舍弃比丘身份,或者想成为在家人”这个意图,修学就还是没有舍弃。反过来,即使不明白“我舍弃佛”这句话的意思,只要知道他的意图是“已经厌离,想成为在家人”,修学就已经舍弃了。因为在一个刹那,耳识路在取声音;在另一个刹那,意识路才了知那个意思,所以说:“然而,要在同一刹那,不先不后地了知,是极难的。”因为不可能在同一刹那既听到声音又了知它的意思。比如说,有人说了“罐”或“布”,对于当下捕捉到的“gha”这个声音,一条耳识路生起后就灭去;紧接着,一条意识路取那个已经过去的声音生起。这样,对于所说的那句话,有多少个字母,就一个一个地取每个字母的当下和过去,耳识路和意识路不断生起灭去;到最后,把这些字母合在一起,取整个字母集合,又一条意识路生起后灭去。紧接着,以取名概念的方式——“这个字母集合就是这个名字”——另一条意识路生起灭去;随后生起的意识路,按照习惯了知它的意思:“这是那个的意思”,这才成为可能。巴利
Sabhāgeti vissāsike. Parisaṅkamānoti ‘‘sace te jāneyyuṃ, maṃ te vāressantī’’ti āsaṅkamāno. Samayaññūti sāsanācārakusalo, idha pana tadadhippāyajānanamattenapi samayaññū nāma hoti. Teneva āha – ‘‘ukkaṇṭhito ayaṃ…pe… sāsanato cutoti jānātī’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti imassa atthaṃ ñatvāpi sace ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhubhāvato cavitukāmo, gihī vā hotukāmo’’ti na jānāti, appaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Sace pana ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vacanassa atthaṃ ajānitvāpi ‘‘ukkaṇṭhito gihī hotukāmo’’ti adhippāyaṃ jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Aññasmiṃ khaṇe sotaviññāṇavīthiyā saddaggahaṇaṃ, aññasmiṃyeva ca manoviññāṇavīthiyā tadatthavijānananti āha – ‘‘taṅkhaṇaññeva pana apubbaṃ acarimaṃ dujjāna’’nti. Na hi ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe saddasavanaṃ tadatthavijānanañca sambhavati. Tathā hi ‘‘ghaṭo’’ti vā ‘‘paṭo’’ti vā kenaci vutte tattha gha-saddaṃ paccuppannaṃ gahetvā ekā sotaviññāṇavīthi uppajjitvā nirujjhati, tadanantaraṃ ekā manoviññāṇavīthi tameva atītaṃ gahetvā uppajjati. Evaṃ tena vuttavacane yattakāni akkharāni honti, tesu ekamekaṃ akkharaṃ paccuppannamatītañca gahetvā sotaviññāṇavīthiyā manoviññāṇavīthiyā ca uppajjitvā niruddhāya avasāne tāni akkharāni sampiṇḍetvā akkharasamūhaṃ gahetvā ekā manoviññāṇavīthi uppajjitvā nirujjhati. Tadanantaraṃ ‘‘ayamakkharasamūho etassa nāma’’nti nāmapaññattiggahaṇavasena aparāya manoviññāṇavīthiyā uppajjitvā niruddhāya tadanantaraṃ uppannāya manoviññāṇavīthiyā ‘‘ayametassa attho’’ti pakatiyā tadatthavijānanaṃ sambhavati.
在“转向之时”这一说法里,这是以具格用词表达处格语义,也就是“在作意之时”。现在为了说明这个转向之时,说道:“就像平常那样……了知。”正因为这里要表达的是通过言语说出自己的意图,所以后面当有人怀疑“这话是什么意思”,需要过很久才能明白他的意图,或者通过别的某种方式也能明白,而不只是靠言语表达,因此说道:“那么,在后来的部分……戒学并未被舍弃。”如果说“我将成为居士”,因为意义和时间都不同,所以戒学未被舍弃。因为“你记住”这个词的意义和时间,跟“我将成为”这个词的意义和时间并不一样。但如果说“我是居士”,那就只有意义不同,没有时间不同,因为“我是”是用现在时说的。在“我已生为居士,我是居士”这里,也是因为意义和时间都不同,所以戒学未被舍弃。“从今天起”这句话,即使这样说了,因为有过失,所以是把它说完整了。“你记住”:因为说明是以意义为主,所以即使换用同义词来表达,也仍然构成舍戒。为了说明这一点,说道“你知晓”等等。因为“你记住、你知晓、你了知、你作意”这些词,在意义和时间上都没有差别。巴利
Āvajjanasamayenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, atthābhogasamayeti attho. Idāni tameva āvajjanasamayaṃ vibhāvento āha – ‘‘yathā pakatiyā…pe… jānantī’’ti. Teneva vacībhedena adhippāyaviññāpanassa idhādhippetattā aparabhāge ‘‘kiṃ iminā vutta’’nti taṃ kaṅkhantassa cirena adhippāyavijānanaṃ aññenapi kenaci upāyantarena sambhavati, na kevalaṃ vacībhedamattenāti āha – ‘‘atha aparabhāge…pe… appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’ti. ‘‘Gihī bhavissāmī’’ti vutte atthabhedo kālabhedo ca hotīti appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. ‘‘Dhārehī’’ti hi imassa yo attho kālo ca, na so ‘‘bhavissāmī’’ti etassa. ‘‘Gihī homī’’ti vutte pana atthabhedoyeva, na kālabhedo ‘‘homī’’ti vattamānakālasseva vuttattā. ‘‘Gihī jātomhi, gihīmhī’’ti etthāpi atthassa ceva kālassa ca bhinnattā appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. ‘‘Ajja paṭṭhāyā’’ti idaṃ tathā vuttepi dosabhāvato paripuṇṇaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dhārehī’’ti atthappadhānattā niddesassa pariyāyavacanehipi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti dassento āha ‘‘jānāhī’’tiādi. Dhārehi jānāhi sañjānāhi manasi karohīti hi etāni padāni atthato kālato ca abhinnāni.
52 前面那十四种,就是从佛陀开始,一直到梵行者的范围。“Hotu bhavatu”这句话,也只是表示拒绝而已,所以说“hotu,意思是‘够了’”。巴利
52.Purimāneva cuddasāti buddhādisabrahmacārīpariyantāni. Hotu bhavatūti idampi paṭikkhepamattamevāti āha ‘‘hotu, pariyattanti attho’’ti.
53 所谓“功德篇章”,大众部说它是一部阐明佛陀功德的经。在“优波离偈颂”中(《中部》2.76)——巴利
53.Vaṇṇapaṭṭhānanti mahāsaṅghikānaṃ buddhaguṇaparidīpakaṃ ekaṃ suttanti vadanti. Upāligāthāsūti (ma. ni. 2.76) –
智者的愚痴已经消失,
已经摧毁了心中的顽固堡垒,战胜了一切该战胜的。
没有烦恼、内心完全平静的人;
戒行成熟、智慧贤善的人;
远离极端、没有污垢的人;
我是那位世尊的弟子。
没有疑惑、内心满足的人;
已经抛弃世间利养、内心欢喜的人;
已尽沙门本分,
已得最后之身者
对于无可比拟、远离尘垢的人,
我是那位世尊的弟子。
无疑惑、善巧
善调御者,最胜之御者
无上妙法者
离疑光耀者
彼已断慢之勇者、彼世尊,
我是那位世尊的弟子。
不可衡量的人中之牛
对于甚深者、证得牟那境界的人;
安稳之作者、明智者;
住法者、善自守护者。
彼已超越贪执、得究竟解脱之世尊,
我是那位世尊的弟子。
住在僻处的龙象,
结缚断尽、解脱自在。
能答诘难、涤垢清净者;
已降慢幢、离贪无欲者。
已调伏、无戏论的人;
我是那位世尊的弟子。
第七位仙人,不虚伪的人;
达到三明、成就梵天的人;
已沐浴者、通晓文句者
已经获得轻安、并且了知吠陀的人
我是那位先施者、能者的
我是那位世尊的弟子。
已修习的圣者,
已证得所应证者,堪受记说者。
对于具足正念的观察者
不倾向、不远离
已证得不摇动、获得自在的人
我是那位世尊的弟子。
已善升进之禅修者,
无所随逐,清净。
无依而利乐者;
已经远离尘染、达到最高境界的人
已渡越者、正渡人者
我是那位世尊的弟子。
这位内心寂静、智慧广大的人,
具有大智慧、远离贪欲的人
如来、善逝,
无有能比,亦无与等。
彼无畏善巧之世尊,
我是那位世尊的弟子。
“ 已断除渴爱的佛陀;
已离烟尘、不再被沾染的。
应受供养的夜叉;
最上士、无与伦比者;
达到了名声顶峰的伟大者;
我是世尊的弟子。”巴利
‘‘Dhīrassa vigatamohassa, Pabhinnakhīlassa vijitavijayassa; Anīghassa susamacittassa; Vuddhasīlassa sādhupaññassa; Vesamantarassa vimalassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Akathaṃkathissa tusitassa; Vantalokāmisassa muditassa; Katasamaṇassa manujassa; Antimasārīrassa narassa; Anopamassa virajassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Asaṃsayassa kusalassa; Venayikassa sārathivarassa; Anuttarassa ruciradhammassa; Nikkaṅkhassa pabhāsakassa; Mānacchidassa vīrassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Nisabhassa appameyyassa; Gambhīrassa monappattassa; Khemaṅkarassa vedassa; Dhammaṭṭhassa saṃvutattassa; Saṅgātigassa muttassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Nāgassa pantasenassa; Khīṇasaṃyojanassa muttassa; Paṭimantakassa dhonassa; Pannaddhajassa vītarāgassa; Dantassa nippapañcassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Isisattamassa akuhassa; Tevijjassa brahmappattassa; Nhātakassa padakassa; Passaddhassa viditavedassa; Purindadassa sakkassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Ariyassa bhāvitattassa; Pattippattassa veyyākaraṇassa; Satimato vipassissa; Anabhinatassa no apanatassa; Anejassa vasippattassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Samuggatassa jhāyissa; Ananugatantarassa suddhassa; Asitassa hitassa; Pavivittassa aggappattassa; Tiṇṇassa tārayantassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Santassa bhūripaññassa; Mahāpaññassa vītalobhassa; Tathāgatassa sugatassa; Appaṭipuggalassa asamassa; Visāradassa nipuṇassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Taṇhacchidassa buddhassa; Vītadhūmassa anupalittassa; Āhuneyyassa yakkhassa; Uttamapuggalassa atulassa; Mahato yasaggappattassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmī’’ti. –
在优波离居士所说、出现于《优波离经》中的那些偈颂里,如此……巴利
Evaṃ upāligahapatinā vuttāsu upālisutte āgatagāthāsu.
“如所闻”就是“如所说”,意思是“就像巴利圣典里所记载的那样”。因为“正自觉者、无边智者、无上智者、菩提智慧者”这些名称出现在《功德篇章》里,而“智者”等名称则出现在《优波离经》的偈颂里。其中,菩提指的是一切知智,由于他是以这个智来了知的,所以他具有这个智,因此称为菩提智慧者,也就是世尊。他以慧来执持,或者以慧为依靠,所以称为智者。由于彻底断尽了一切内心的障碍,所以是破障碍者。诸魔已经战胜、正在战胜、将要战胜一切凡夫,所以是胜利者。那些胜利者是谁呢?是死魔、烦恼魔和天子魔。他已经战胜了这些胜利者,所以是已战胜胜利者,也就是世尊。在这里应当看到,由于战胜了烦恼魔和死魔,行魔和蕴魔也应当被视为已经被战胜了。巴利
Yathārutamevāti yathāvuttameva, pāḷiyaṃ āgatamevāti adhippāyo. Yasmā ‘‘sammāsambuddhaṃ anantabuddhiṃ anomabuddhiṃ bodhipaññāṇa’’nti imāni vaṇṇapaṭṭhāne āgatanāmāni, ‘‘dhīra’’ntiādīni pana upāligāthāsu āgatanāmāni. Tattha bodhi vuccati sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, taṃ sañjānanahetuttā paññāṇaṃ etassāti bodhipaññāṇo, bhagavā. Dhiyā paññāya rāti gaṇhāti , sevatīti vā dhīro. Samucchinnasabbacetokhīlattā pabhinnakhīlo. Sabbaputhujjane vijiniṃsu vijayanti vijinissanti cāti vijayā. Ke te? Maccumārakilesamāradevaputtamārā. Te vijitā vijayā etenāti vijitavijayo, bhagavā. Kilesamāramaccumāravijayeneva panettha abhisaṅkhārakkhandhamārāpi vijitāva hontīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在“善说”等词中(《清净道论》1.147):由于开示了具备意义与文句、独一、完全圆满、彻底清净的梵行,所以法是善说的;又因为没有意义上的颠倒,所以是善说。譬如其他外道的法,其意义会发生颠倒:因为他们所说的“障碍法”并不真正构成障碍,所说的“导出法”也并不真正具有导出的性质,因此那些外道确实是恶说法的。但世尊的法,其意义不会发生颠倒,因为那些被说为“这些法是障碍法、这些法是导出法”的法,确实就是这样,不会偏离真实。如此,教法就是善说之法。巴利
Svākkhātantiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.147) sātthasabyañjanakevalaparipuṇṇaparisuddhabrahmacariyassa pakāsanato svākkhāto dhammo, atthavipallāsābhāvato vā suṭṭhu akkhātoti svākkhāto. Yathā hi aññatitthiyānaṃ dhammassa attho vipallāsaṃ āpajjati ‘‘antarāyikā’’ti vuttadhammānaṃ antarāyikattābhāvato, ‘‘niyyānikā’’ti ca vuttadhammānaṃ niyyānikattābhāvato, tena te aññatitthiyā durakkhātadhammāyeva honti, na tathā bhagavato dhammassa attho vipallāsaṃ āpajjati ‘‘ime dhammā antarāyikā niyyānikā’’ti evaṃ vuttadhammānaṃ tathābhāvānatikkamanatoti. Evaṃ tāva pariyattidhammo svākkhāto dhammo.
至于出世间法,因为它是依据与涅槃相应的修行实践,以及依据与修行实践相应的涅槃而宣说的,所以是善说。正如所说的:巴利
Lokuttaradhammo pana nibbānānurūpāya paṭipattiyā paṭipadānurūpassa ca nibbānassa akkhātattā svākkhāto. Yathāha –
世尊确实为弟子们善巧宣说了导向涅槃的修行之道,使涅槃与修行之道相互契合。就像恒河之水与耶牟那河之水汇合交融一样,同样地,世尊为弟子们善巧宣说了导向涅槃的修行之道,使涅槃与修行之道相互契合。巴利
‘‘Supaññattā kho pana tena bhagavatā sāvakānaṃ nibbānagāminī paṭipadā saṃsandati nibbānañca paṭipadā ca. Seyyathāpi nāma gaṅgodakaṃ yamunodakena saṃsandati sameti, evameva supaññattā tena bhagavatā sāvakānaṃ nibbānagāminī paṭipadā saṃsandati nibbānañca paṭipadā cā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.296).
在这里,圣道不落入两个极端,本身就是中道,因为被宣说为“中道”,所以是善说的。沙门果就是烦恼已止息,因为被宣说为“烦恼已止息”,所以是善说的。涅槃具有常、不死、洲、庇护等自性,因为按照常等自性而被宣说,所以是善说的。这样,出世间法也是善说的。巴利
Ariyamaggo cettha antadvayaṃ anupagamma majjhimāpaṭipadābhūtova ‘‘majjhimā paṭipadā’’ti akkhātattā svākkhāto. Sāmaññaphalāni paṭippassaddhakilesāneva ‘‘paṭippassaddhakilesānī’’ti akkhātattā svākkhātāni. Nibbānaṃ sassatāmatatāṇaleṇādisabhāvameva sassatādisabhāvavasena akkhātattā svākkhātanti evaṃ lokuttaradhammopi svākkhāto.
圣道要由圣者在自己身心相续中灭除贪等烦恼之后,亲自去看:“我的贪等已被圣道断除。”这是他自己应当以亲自证知、不靠他人引导的方式见到的,所以叫“现见”。“现见”本身就是“现见者”。
再者,九种出世间法,无论由哪位圣弟子证得,都不该再依赖对别人的信仰,而应当以亲证之智亲自见到,所以叫“现见的”。
或者,殊胜的“见”就是“现见”,因为靠现见而战胜,所以叫“现见的”。在这里,圣道依靠与它相应的现见,圣果依靠作为其因的现见,涅槃依靠作为其对象的现见,来战胜烦恼。因此,就像靠战车取胜的人叫“车士”一样,九种出世间法也是靠现见取胜,所以叫“现见的”。
或者,“见”就是看,“所见”就是“现见”,意思是显现出来。值得现见,所以叫“现见的”。因为出世间法在通过修习现观和作证现观而被看见时,就能止息轮回的怖畏。因此,就像值得拥有衣服的人叫“衣者”一样,值得现见,所以叫“现见的”。巴利
Ariyamaggo attano santāne rāgādīnaṃ abhāvaṃ karontena ariyapuggalena sāmaṃ daṭṭhabbo ‘‘ariyamaggena mama rāgādayo pahīnā’’ti sayaṃ attanā anaññaneyyena passitabboti sandiṭṭhi, sandiṭṭhi eva sandiṭṭhiko. Apica navavidho lokuttaradhammo yena yena adhigato hoti, tena tena ariyasāvakena parasaddhāya gantabbataṃ hitvā paccakkhañāṇena sayaṃ daṭṭhabboti sandiṭṭhiko. Atha vā pasatthā diṭṭhi sandiṭṭhi, sandiṭṭhiyā jayatīti sandiṭṭhiko. Tathā hettha ariyamaggo sampayuttāya, ariyaphalaṃ kāraṇabhūtāya, nibbānaṃ visayibhūtāya sandiṭṭhiyā kilese jayati, tasmā yathā rathena jayatīti rathiko, evaṃ navavidhopi lokuttaradhammo sandiṭṭhiyā jayatīti sandiṭṭhiko. Atha vā diṭṭhanti dassanaṃ vuccati, diṭṭhameva sandiṭṭhaṃ, sandassananti attho. Sandiṭṭhaṃ arahatīti sandiṭṭhiko. Lokuttaradhammo hi bhāvanābhisamayavasena sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena ca dissamānoyeva vaṭṭabhayaṃ nivatteti, tasmā yathā vatthamarahatīti vatthiko, evaṃ sandiṭṭhaṃ arahatīti sandiṭṭhiko.
就自身给予果报而言,它没有需要等待的时机,所以叫“无时”。比如世间善法,要等到“下一生”或“再下一生”等时机才给果报,确实有需要等待的时机;但此法不是这样,这就是这句话的意思。无时本身就是无时——它不是经过五天、七天等一段时间之后才给果报,而是在自身生起的紧接着的下一刻就给果报,这就是这里要说的意思。或者也可以说:在给出自己的果报方面,有一段隔得很远、很遥远的时机已经到来、已经临近,所以叫“有时”,也就是在不同时间才给果报的。那是什么?是世间善法。而此法因为是紧接着无间就给果报的,所以不是有时的,而是无时的。这里说的“无时的”,正是针对圣道而说的。巴利
Attano phaladānaṃ sandhāya nāssa āgametabbo kālo atthīti akālo. Yathā hi lokiyakusalassa upapajjaaparāpariyāyetiādinā phaladānaṃ pati āgametabbo kālo atthi, na evametassāti attho. Akāloyeva akāliko, na pañcāhasattāhādibhedaṃ kālaṃ khepetvā phalaṃ deti, attano pana pavattisamanantarameva phaladoti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā attano phalappadāne vippakaṭṭho dūro kālo patto upanīto assāti kāliko, kālantaraphaladāyī. Ko so? Lokiyo kusaladhammo. Ayaṃ pana samanantaraphaladāyakattā na kālikoti akāliko. Maggameva hi sandhāya ‘‘akāliko’’ti idaṃ vuttaṃ.
“来,看这个法!”——法值得这种“来,看”的说示规矩,所以叫“来见的”。为什么这个法值得这种规矩呢?因为它从究竟意义上说是真实存在的,而且是清净的。比如在空拳头里,就算说“里面有金或银”,也不能说“来,看这个”。为什么?因为根本不存在。又比如确实存在的粪便或尿,如果想让人心生欢喜而显示它可爱的一面,也不能说“来,看这个”,反而要用草或叶子把它盖起来。为什么?因为不清净。但这个九种出世间法,从自性上说既是真实存在的,又像无云天空中的满月、像放在淡黄毯上的天然宝石一样清净。所以,因为它真实存在而且清净,值得这种“来,看”的规矩,所以叫“来见的”。巴利
‘‘Ehi passa imaṃ dhamma’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ ehipassavidhiṃ arahatīti ehipassiko. Kasmā panesa taṃ vidhiṃ arahatīti? Paramatthato vijjamānattā parisuddhattā ca. Rittamuṭṭhiyañhi hiraññaṃ vā suvaṇṇaṃ vā atthīti vatvāpi ‘‘ehi passa ima’’nti na sakkā vattuṃ. Kasmā? Avijjamānattā. Vijjamānampi ca gūthaṃ vā muttaṃ vā manuññabhāvappakāsanena cittasampahaṃsanatthaṃ ‘‘ehi passa ima’’nti na sakkā vattuṃ, apica kho naṃ tiṇehi vā paṇṇehi vā paṭicchādetabbameva hoti. Kasmā? Aparisuddhattā. Ayaṃ pana navavidhopi lokuttaradhammo sabhāvato ca vijjamāno vigatavalāhake ca ākāse sampuṇṇacandamaṇḍalaṃ viya paṇḍukambale nikkhittajātimaṇi viya ca parisuddho, tasmā vijjamānattā parisuddhattā ca ehipassavidhiṃ arahatīti ehipassiko.
“能引导”就是“引导向涅槃的法”。这里的判定是这样的:引导就是带过去、引向;就算衣服着火了、头着火了,也值得不顾这些,以修习的力量把它引入自己的心中、让它生起,所以叫“能引导”。这个意思适用于有为的出世间法。但无为法则是以成为自心所缘的方式值得被引入,所以也叫“能引导”,意思是值得以亲证的方式依止。或者说,涅槃能引导圣者,所以圣道是“应被引导的”;果与涅槃法值得被引入、值得亲证,所以是“应被引导的”;应被引导的,就是“能引导的”。巴利
Upanetabboti opaneyyiko. Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – upanayanaṃ upanayo, ādittaṃ celaṃ vā sīsaṃ vā ajjhupekkhitvāpi bhāvanāvasena attano citte upanayanaṃ uppādanaṃ arahatīti opaneyyiko. Idaṃ saṅkhate lokuttaradhamme yujjati, asaṅkhato pana attano citte ārammaṇabhāvena upanayanaṃ arahatīti opaneyyiko, sacchikiriyāvasena allīyanaṃ arahatīti attho . Atha vā nibbānaṃ upaneti ariyapuggalanti ariyamaggo upaneyyo, sacchikātabbataṃ upanetabboti phalanibbānadhammo upaneyyo, upaneyyo eva opaneyyiko.
一切智者——也就是像“利根知者”等那样的人——都应当各自在自己内心亲自体会:“我的道已经修好了,果已经证得了,灭已经亲自证到了。”所以这是智者各自亲自了知的。因为并不是靠戒师修好的道,弟子的烦恼就能被断除;弟子也不会因为戒师的果等至而安住于安乐;戒师所证悟的涅槃,弟子也不会因此就证悟。所以,这个法不应该像别人头上的装饰品那样只是看着,而应该在自己心里亲自看到、亲自体验——这就是“智者各自了知”这句话的意思。巴利
Sabbehi ugghaṭitaññūādīhi viññūhi ‘‘bhāvito me maggo, adhigataṃ phalaṃ, sacchikato nirodho’’ti attani attani veditabboti paccattaṃ veditabbo viññūhi. Na hi upajjhāyena bhāvitena maggena saddhivihārikassa kilesā pahīyanti, na so tassa phalasamāpattiyā phāsu viharati, na tena sacchikataṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti, tasmā na esa parassa sīse ābharaṇaṃ viya daṭṭhabbo, attano pana citteyeva daṭṭhabbo, anubhavitabbo viññūhīti vuttaṃ hoti.
无为:它并非通过和合、聚集——也就是以因缘聚合为特征的和合——聚集起来之后,由相应的因缘所造作、所生起,所以叫无为。这里没有死,所以叫无死;或者说,证得这个的人,不再有死、不再有死亡,所以叫无死。虽然这里通过“我舍弃善说之法”等说法,处处显示了“法”这个词的用法,但即使不配上“法”这个词,只说同义词,也并非就不叫舍弃;因此应当知道,即使说“我舍弃善说”等,也同样是舍弃学处。而像“善说之法”等说法中配上“法”这个词,应当知道是为了表明“善说”等词是“法”的修饰语。即使单单一法蕴,也有它的名称,这里说的“第一法蕴、第二法蕴、问法蕴、答法蕴”等,应当知道就是法蕴的名称。巴利
Asaṅkhatanti saṅgamma samāgamma paccayasamodhānalakkhaṇena saṅgamena sannipatitvā anurūpehi paccayehi akataṃ anibbattitanti asaṅkhataṃ. Natthi ettha matanti amataṃ, etasmiṃ vā adhigate natthi puggalassa mataṃ maraṇanti amataṃ. Kiñcāpi ettha ‘‘svākkhātaṃ dhammaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā sabbattha dhamma-saddappayogo dassito, tathāpi dhamma-saddena ayojetvā vutte vevacane na paccakkhānaṃ nāma na hotīti ‘‘svākkhātaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā vuttepi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Svākkhātaṃ dhamma’’ntiādinā pana dhamma-saddappayogo svākkhātā-disaddānaṃ dhamma-visesanabhāvadassanatthaṃ katoti veditabbaṃ. Ekadhammakkhandhassapi nāmanti ettha ‘‘paṭhamadhammakkhandhaṃ dutiyadhammakkhandhaṃ pucchādhammakkhandhaṃ vissajjanādhammakkhandha’’ntiādinā dhammakkhandhanāmāni veditabbāni.
善行道:因为在善说的法与律中依照教导去实践,所以是善行道。因为依中道而行,不落入两个极端,并且为了断除身、语、意的歪曲、扭曲、不正之过失而行,所以是正直行道。理趣称为涅槃,因为通过圣道等而被了知、被通达、被证得,为了这个意义而行,所以是依理趣行道。如同行道者值得他人出于对功德的敬重而对他作起迎、合掌等如法礼仪,因为这样行道,所以是如仪行道。巴利
Suppaṭipannanti svākkhāte dhammavinaye yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipannattā suppaṭipannaṃ. Majjhimāya paṭipadāya antadvayaṃ anupagamma paṭipannattā kāyavacīmanovaṅkakuṭilajimhadosappahānāya paṭipannattā ca ujuppaṭipannaṃ. Ñāyo vuccati nibbānaṃ ariyamaggādīhi ñāyati paṭivijjhīyati sacchikarīyatīti katvā, tadatthāya paṭipannattā ñāyappaṭipannaṃ. Yathā paṭipannā guṇasambhāvanāya parehi kariyamānaṃ paccuṭṭhānādisāmīcikammaṃ arahanti, tathā paṭipannattā sāmīcippaṭipannaṃ.
按一对一对来算,初道住者与初果住者算一对,这样就有四对人。这里本来应该说“四对人僧”,但经文没有省略“四”这个词的格尾,而是以“四”来作说明,应当这样理解。所谓“四对人僧”,就是指其中有这四对人,所以称为僧。所谓“八人补特伽罗”,是按人补特伽罗来算:一个初道住者,一个初果住者,照这个方式算,正好有八种人补特伽罗。有这八种人补特伽罗的地方,就是八人补特伽罗僧。这里“人”和“补特伽罗”这两个词意思相同,只是为了适应所教化者的根机才这样分别说。巴利
Yugaḷavasena paṭhamamaggaṭṭho phalaṭṭhoti idamekaṃ yugaḷanti evaṃ cattāri purisayugāni honti. Ettha pana ‘‘catupurisayugaṃ saṅgha’’nti vattabbe ‘‘cattārī’’ti vibhattilopaṃ akatvā niddeso katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cattāri purisayugāni etthāti catupurisayugoti hi saṅgho vuccati. Aṭṭhapurisapuggalanti purisapuggalavasena eko paṭhamamaggaṭṭho, eko phalaṭṭhoti iminā nayena aṭṭheva purisapuggalā honti. Aṭṭha purisapuggalā etthāti aṭṭhapurisapuggalo, saṅgho. Ettha ca purisoti vā puggaloti vā ekatthānetāni padāni, veneyyavasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ.
在“应供”等说法中,拿来之后应当供养,这就叫“供物”;这同时也是应当布施给持戒者的四种资具的名称——即使要从很远的地方拿来,也是如此。僧团堪受这种供物,因为它能让供养产生大果报,所以叫“应供”。或者说,即使从很远的地方也赶来,把自己所有的一切都拿到这里来供养,所以叫“应供”;或者说,值得诸天等供养,所以叫“应供”。婆罗门们认为,他们所供奉的火才是应供者,在那里供养能得大果报。如果因为供养能得大果报就叫应供者,那么只有僧团才是应供者,因为在僧团中供养确实能得大果报。正如所说:巴利
Āhuneyyantiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.156) ānetvā hunitabbanti āhunaṃ, dūratopi ānetvā sīlavantesu dātabbānaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ āhunaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ yutto tassa mahapphalabhāvakaraṇatoti āhuneyyo, saṅgho. Atha vā dūratopi āgantvā sabbasāpateyyampi ettha hunitabbanti āhavanīyo, sakkādīnampi vā āhavanaṃ arahatīti āhavanīyo. Yo cāyaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ āhavanīyo aggi, yattha hutaṃ mahapphalanti tesaṃ laddhi. Sace hutassa mahapphalatāya āhavanīyo, saṅghova āhavanīyo. Saṅghe hutañhi mahapphalaṃ hoti. Yathāha –
“ 就算有人一百年都在树林里侍奉火,
哪怕只在一瞬间,供养一位已修心的人;
哪怕只是片刻供养一位修心的人,也胜过用一百年去行祭祀供奉。”巴利
‘‘Yo ca vassasataṃ jantu, aggiṃ paricare vane; Ekañca bhāvitattānaṃ, muhuttamapi pūjaye; Sāyeva pūjanā seyyo, yañce vassasataṃ huta’’nti. (dha. pa. 107);
在其他部派那里,“āhavanīya”这个词,和这里的“āhuneyyo”这个词,在含义上是同一个,只是在文字表达上有一点点差别而已。巴利
Tadetaṃ nikāyantare ‘‘āhavanīyo’’ti padaṃ idha ‘‘āhuneyyo’’ti iminā padena atthato ekaṃ, byañjanato panettha kiñcimattameva nānaṃ.
“应受宾客供”在这里说的是:为了从四面八方来的亲爱可意的亲戚朋友,以恭敬心准备好的待客布施,这叫作“宾客供”。就算把那些可爱的亲友等宾客放在一边,这份东西也只适合布施给僧团,只有僧团才适合接受它。因为没有任何宾客能比得上僧团。这样的宾客,要隔一个佛世才会出现,而且他始终具足能带来可爱可意的戒等功德。所以,既适合把宾客供布施给他,也适合他接受宾客供,因此称为“应受宾客供”。巴利
Pāhuneyyanti ettha pana pāhunaṃ vuccati disāvidisato āgatānaṃ piyamanāpānaṃ ñātimittānaṃ atthāya sakkārena paṭiyattaṃ āgantukadānaṃ. Tampi ṭhapetvā te tathārūpe piyamittādike pāhunake saṅghasseva dātuṃ yuttaṃ, saṅghova taṃ paṭiggahetuṃ yutto. Saṅghasadiso hi pāhunako natthi. Tathā hesa ekabuddhantare vītivatteyeva dissati, abbokiṇṇañca piyamanāpattakarehi sīlādidhammehi samannāgatoti evaṃ pāhunamassa dātuṃ yuttaṃ, pāhunañca paṭiggahetuṃ yuttoti pāhuneyyo.
众生依靠它,随各自所愿的种种成就而增长,所以叫“供养”,也就是相信他世而应当布施的施物。僧团值得接受这份供养;或者说,僧团对供养有利益——因为它能使这份供养产生大果报,从而使供养清净,所以僧团是“应供养者”。值得一切世间把双手举到头顶行礼,所以是“应合掌者”。无上福田,就是一切世间无可比拟的滋生福德之处。就像国王或大臣的稻谷、大麦生长的地方,被称为国王的稻田、麦田,同样,僧团是一切世间滋生福德的地方。因为依靠僧团,世间种种带来利益和安乐的福德才得以生长,所以僧团是世间的无上福田。在这里,“善行道僧”等说法中处处使用“僧”字,是为了表明“善行道”等词是“僧”的修饰语,因此,即使说“我舍弃善行道”等,也应当看作就是舍戒。巴利
Dakkhanti etāya sattā yathādhippetāhi sampattīhi vaḍḍhantīti dakkhiṇā, paralokaṃ saddahitvā dātabbadānaṃ. Taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ arahati, dakkhiṇāya vā hito yasmā naṃ mahapphalakaratāya visodhetīti dakkhiṇeyyo. Ubho hatthe sirasi patiṭṭhāpetvā sabbalokena kariyamānaṃ añjalikammaṃ arahatīti añjalikaraṇīyo. Anuttaraṃ puññakkhettanti sabbalokassa asadisaṃ puññaviruhanaṭṭhānaṃ . Yathā hi rañño vā amaccassa vā sālīnaṃ vā yavānaṃ vā viruhanaṭṭhānaṃ rañño sālikkhettaṃ yavakkhettanti vuccati, evaṃ saṅgho sabbalokassa puññānaṃ viruhanaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṅghaṃ nissāya hi lokassa nānappakārahitasukhasaṃvattanikāni puññāni viruhanti, tasmā saṅgho anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassa. Etthāpi ‘‘suppaṭipannaṃ saṅgha’’ntiādinā sabbattha saṅgha-saddappayogo suppaṭipannā-disaddānaṃ saṅghavisesanabhāvadassanatthaṃ kato, tasmā ‘‘suppaṭipannaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā vuttepi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
不过在戒的异名中,如果离开“戒”这个词,单说“比丘”“比丘尼”,并不成为戒的代称;所以只有说“比丘戒”“比丘尼戒”时,才会想到这个意思。而增上戒等本身就是戒,所以说“我舍增上戒”等时,也会想到这个意思。应当知道,说“初巴拉基格”等时,所指的是学处本身,而不是罪过。巴利
Sikkhāvevacanesu pana sikkhā-saddaṃ vinā kevalaṃ bhikkhu-saddo bhikkhunī-saddo ca sikkhāya adhivacanaṃ na hotīti ‘‘bhikkhusikkhaṃ bhikkhunīsikkha’’nti vutteyeva sīsaṃ eti, adhisīlādayo pana sikkhā evāti ‘‘adhisīlaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā vuttepi sīsaṃ eti. Paṭhamaṃ pārājikantiādinā sikkhāpadānaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, na āpattīnaṃ.
在“和尚”的各种称呼里,如果一个人作为和尚让人出家并受达上,那么针对他,就说“让我出家的人”等等。“以谁为根本”,就是以谁为主要原因或作为原因。所谓“以谁为根本”,就是出家与达上以他为本、为主要原因或作为原因。虽然“根本”这个词本身含有相对关系,但因为这种相对关系是恒常的,所以能够表达意义,因此应当理解为派生词的用法。巴利
Upajjhāyavevacanesu upajjhāyo hutvā yo pabbājesi ceva upasampādesi ca, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo maṃ pabbājesī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yassa mūlenāti yassa padhānabhāvena kāraṇabhāvena vā. Yassa mūlaṃ padhānabhāvo kāraṇabhāvo vā etissāti yassamūlikā, pabbajjā upasampadā ca. Mūla-saddassa sāpekkhabhāvepi niccasāpekkhatāya gamakattā taddhitavutti daṭṭhabbā.
在阿阇梨的异名中,如果有人没经过和尚(授戒师)就自己以阿阇梨的身份让人出家,又以甘马语阿阇梨的身份给人授达上,那么针对这个人,就说“令我出家者”“令我受教诫者”。通过这两个词,显示了出家阿阇梨和授达上阿阇梨。“我依止他而住”,显示的是依止阿阇梨。“我让他诵”等说法,则说的是教法阿阇梨。其中,“我让他诵”是我让他诵习经文;“我遍问”是我遍问所学经文的意思。在“共住弟子”等异名中,也应按照所说的道理来理解其含义。至于“以他为根本”,这里应理解为“在他跟前”的意思。巴利
Ācariyavevacanesu pana yo upajjhaṃ adatvā ācariyova hutvā pabbājesi, kammavācācariyo hutvā upasampādesi ca, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo maṃ pabbājesi, yo maṃ anusāvesī’’ti vuttaṃ. Imehi dvīhi vacanehi pabbajjācariyo ca upasampadācariyo ca dassito. Yāhaṃ nissāya vasāmīti nissayācariyaṃ dasseti. Yāhaṃ uddisāpemītiādinā pana dhammācariyo vutto. Tattha uddisāpemīti pāṭhaṃ uddisāpemi. Paripucchāmīti uggahitapāṭhassa atthaṃ paripucchāmi. Saddhivihārikavevacanādīsu ca vuttānusāreneva attho veditabbo. Tassa mūleti ettha pana tassa santiketi attho daṭṭhabbo.
“Okallaka”是称呼那些被饥饿、口渴等痛苦折磨,快乐已经耗尽,不洗澡也不打理身体的可怜人的说法。“Moḷibaddha”是指扎着发髻的人,或者摘下头冠的人。虽然“二语近事男”在最初成道时就已存在,但为了说明即使只是用当时能得到的名称来称呼,也会构成舍戒,所以才说“二语近事男”。这里应当看出,“二语”本身就是它的同义词。因此,即使只说“请记住我是二语者”,也会构成舍戒。其余各项也应同样理解。巴利
Okallakoti khuppipāsādidukkhaparetānaṃ khīṇasukhānaṃ nahānādisarīrapaṭijagganarahitānaṃ kapaṇamanussānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Moḷibaddhoti sikhābaddho omukkamakuṭo vā. Kiñcāpi dvevāciko upāsako paṭhamabodhiyaṃyeva sambhavati, tathāpi tadā labbhamānanāmaṃ gahetvā vuttepi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘dvevāciko upāsako’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dvevāciko’’ti idameva panettha vevacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tasmā ‘‘dvevācikoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti ettakepi vutte sīsaṃ eti. Evaṃ sesesupi.
Kumāraka 指还在孩童阶段、年纪很小的沙弥。Cellaka 指比他们大一些的小沙弥。Ceṭaka 指中等沙弥。Moḷigalla 指大沙弥。而 Samaṇuddesa 则是沙弥的通称。Nigaṇṭhupaṭṭhāka 等称呼也应看作外道弟子的别名。巴利
Kumārakoti kumārāvattho ativiya daharasāmaṇero. Cellakoti tato mahantataro khuddakasāmaṇero. Ceṭakoti majjhimo. Moḷigalloti mahāsāmaṇero. Samaṇuddesoti pana avisesato sāmaṇerādhivacanaṃ. Nigaṇṭhupaṭṭhākotiādīnipi titthiyasāvakavevacanānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
破戒者就是没有戒、远离戒的人。恶法者是因为破戒,所以志趣低劣、本性卑下。不净而令人疑念的行为,是因为身业等不清净,所以成为不净,并且他的行为让人怀疑、让人想起。破戒的人只要看到一点不合适的事,就会被别人怀疑:“这一定是某某人干的。”当他看到比丘们为了某件该办的事在商量时,就会自己疑念:“这些比丘是不是知道了我的所作所为才在商量?”他的行为就是这样让人怀疑、让人想起。隐藏行为者,是因为该感到羞耻,所以是应隐藏的行为。非沙门者,就是不是沙门。在取筹等场合,由于妄称“我也是沙门”,所以是假称沙门;由于行为不尊贵,所以是非梵行者;在伍波萨他等场合,由于妄称“我也是梵行者”,所以是假称梵行者;由于以腐臭的行为陷入戒的败坏,所以是内腐;由于六门不断漏出贪等烦恼,所以是漏泄;由于生起贪等污秽,又因应被具戒者丢弃,所以是如粪堆者。Koṇṭho是破戒者的别名。巴利
Dussīloti nissīlo sīlavirahito. Pāpadhammoti dussīlattā eva hīnajjhāsayatāya lāmakasabhāvo. Asucisaṅkassarasamācāroti aparisuddhakāyakammāditāya asuci hutvā saṅkāya saritabbasamācāro. Dussīlo hi kiñcideva asāruppaṃ disvā ‘‘idaṃ asukena kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti paresaṃ āsaṅkanīyo hoti. Kenacideva karaṇīyena mantayante bhikkhū disvā ‘‘kacci nu kho ime mayā katakammaṃ jānitvā mantentī’’ti attanoyeva saṅkāya saritabbasamācāro. Paṭicchannakammantoti lajjitabbatāya paṭicchādetabbakammanto. Assamaṇoti na samaṇo. Salākaggahaṇādīsu ‘‘ahampi samaṇo’’ti micchāpaṭiññāya samaṇapaṭiñño, aseṭṭhacāritāya abrahmacārī, uposathādīsu ‘‘ahampi brahmacārī’’ti micchāpaṭiññāya brahmacāripaṭiñño, pūtinā kammena sīlavipattiyā anto anupaviṭṭhattā antopūti, chahi dvārehi rāgādikilesānussavanena tintattā avassuto, sañjātarāgādikacavarattā sīlavantehi chaḍḍetabbattā ca kasambujāto. Koṇṭhoti dussīlādhivacanametaṃ.
“或者还有其他佛陀的同义词”等等,通过“ya”这个词所指的佛陀等同义词,就用“ta”这个词来指代,所以说“以那些形态……佛陀等的同义词”。那么,那些又怎么用形态等词来表述呢?所以说“因为同义词”等等。对有形态的佛陀等来说,用形态来说明还说得通,但对没有形态的法、学等又怎么说呢?所以说“或者正因为是舍戒之相”。因为具舍戒之相的同义词,就被称为“舍戒之相”。这里“evaṃ kho”中的“kho”是表示强调的助词,所以说“正是如此”。巴利
‘‘Yāni vā panaññānipi atthi buddhavevacanāni vā’’tiādinā yaṃ-saddaparāmaṭṭhānaṃ buddhādivevacanānaṃyeva taṃ-saddena parāmasanaṃ hotīti āha – ‘‘tehi ākārehi…pe… buddhādīnaṃ vevacanehī’’ti. Kathaṃ pana tāni ākārādisaddehi voharīyantīti āha ‘‘vevacanāni hī’’tiādi. Saṇṭhānavantānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ saṇṭhānadīpanaṃ tāva hotu, saṇṭhānarahitānaṃ pana dhammasikkhādīnaṃ kathanti āha ‘‘sikkhāpaccakkhānasaṇṭhānattā eva vā’’ti. Sikkhāpaccakkhānarūpāni hi vevacanāni ‘‘sikkhāpaccakkhānasaṇṭhānānī’’ti vuccanti. Evaṃ khoti ettha khoti avadhāraṇatthe nipātoti āha ‘‘evamevā’’ti.
54 “Mucchāpareta”的意思是被昏迷压倒。为了说明畜生也能理解词义,就举了“龙王子”等例子。“三因结生”是就大多数情况说的,因为并不是所有天神都是三因结生,也有二因结生的情况。“极速了知”是说天神的果报心相续不像人类那样迟钝,所以能极速了知。巴利
54.Mucchāparetoti mucchāya abhibhūto. Vacanatthavijānanasamatthaṃ tiracchānagataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nāgamāṇavakassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tihetukapaṭisandhikāti yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Na hi sabbāpi devatā tihetukapaṭisandhikāva honti dvihetukānampi sambhavato. Atikhippaṃ jānantīti devatānaṃ bhavaṅgaparivāsassa manussānaṃ viya adandhabhāvato vuttaṃ.
“Sabhāga”指的是男人。“Visabhāga”指的是女人。“Anariyaka”指的是摩揭陀语以外的其他方言。“Davā”是突然的意思。“Ravā”是失误、说错的意思。应当这样理解:本来想说别的话,却说出了“我舍弃佛”。或者,因为不熟悉字母的组合,或者缺乏表达能力,说不出该说的话,转而说别的话,这就叫作以“ravā”的方式说话。这两种情况,都是想说别的事却说成了别的,性质是一样的,所以说“和前一种有什么差别”。巴利
Sabhāgassāti purisassa. Visabhāgassāti mātugāmassa. Anariyakoti māgadhavohārato añño. Davāti sahasā. Ravāti virajjhitvā. Aññaṃ bhaṇissāmīti aññaṃ bhaṇanto buddhaṃ paccakkhāmīti bhaṇatīti yojetabbaṃ. Akkharasamayānabhiññatāya vā karaṇasampattiyā abhāvato vā kathetabbaṃ kathetuṃ asakkonto hutvā aññaṃ kathento ravā bhaṇati nāma. Ubhayathāpi aññaṃ bhaṇitukāmassa aññabhaṇanaṃ samānanti āha ‘‘purimena ko viseso’’ti.
“令他诵”是指自己诵出巴利圣典,或者教别人学习。“遍问”是指询问巴利圣典的含义,或者询问巴利圣典本身。“学习”是指在别人面前学习巴利圣典。“作诵习”是指诵习已经学过的巴利圣典。“称赞”是指解释巴利圣典的含义,从而赞叹巴利圣典。由于年老者对某些事一无所知,或者因为根门迟钝,所以说“像陶器形状一样”,意思是像泥土所成的某种形状。对于“重愚者”,因为心对所缘不能轻快地运作、行动迟缓,所以称为重慧者,也就是愚钝的人。“完全地”这个词,是用来显示“我要让人听到‘我舍弃学处’”这样的心念根本不生起。然而,如果没有这样的心念,无论以什么方式作出那样的语表并让人听到,都是根本不可能的,所以说“在‘我舍弃佛’等语中……作出语表却不让人听到”。巴利
Vācetīti pāḷiṃ kathento aññaṃ uggaṇhāpento vā vāceti. Paripucchatīti pāḷiyā atthaṃ paripucchanto pāḷiṃ paripucchati. Uggaṇhātīti aññassa santike pāḷiṃ uggaṇhāti. Sajjhāyaṃ karotīti uggahitapāḷiṃ sajjhāyati. Vaṇṇetīti pāḷiyā atthaṃ saṃvaṇṇento pāḷiṃ vaṇṇeti. Mahallakassa kiñci ajānanato aviditindriyatāya vā ‘‘potthakarūpasadisassā’’ti vuttaṃ, mattikāya katarūpasadisassāti attho. Garumedhassāti ārammaṇesu lahuppavattiyā abhāvato dandhagatikatāya garupaññassa, mandapaññassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sabbaso vāti iminā ‘‘idaṃ padaṃ sāvessāmi ‘sikkhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’’ti evaṃ pavattacittuppādassa abhāvaṃ dasseti. Yasmā pana asati evarūpe cittuppāde kenaci pariyāyena tathāvidhaṃ vacībhedaṃ katvā sāvanaṃ nāma neva sambhavati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmītiādīsu…pe… vacībhedaṃ katvā na sāvetī’’ti.
根本假施设的注释巴利
Mūlapaññattivaṇṇanā
55 “应当被指出”就是应当被揭示、应当被说明。“被诸烦恼”就是被无惭等烦恼。“从这里开始”就是从“粗恶”这个词开始。“那业”就是被称为行淫法的业。“见”等内容就按前面所说的方式。“那”就是指淫法。巴利
55.Niddisitabbassāti vivaritabbassa pakāsetabbassa. Kilesehīti ahirikādīhi kilesehi. Ito paṭṭhāyāti duṭṭhulla-padato paṭṭhāya. Tassa kammassāti methunadhammapaṭisevanasaṅkhātassa kammassa. Dassanantiādi vuttanayameva. Assāti methunadhammassa.
应当以两种、两种来入定,所以称为“双双入定”,因此说“因为要以两种、两种来入定”。由于达到与贪欲缠缚相似的状态,男女两者之间的这件事就叫作淫,淫本身就是法,所以叫淫法,因此说“两者染著”等等。其中,“染著”是指被淫欲之贪所染著。“深染著”是指被同样的贪欲极度染著。“漏泄”是指被因世间乐味和交友亲近而生起的淫欲之贪所浸湿。“缠缚”是指因淫欲之贪生起而心被覆盖。“相似”是指因染著等而与染著者相似。巴利
Dvīhi dvīhi samāpajjitabbā dvayaṃdvayasamāpattīti āha ‘‘dvayena dvayena samāpajjitabbato’’ti. Rāgapariyuṭṭhānena sadisabhāvappattiyā mithunānaṃ idaṃ methunaṃ, methunameva dhammo methunadhammoti āha ‘‘ubhinnaṃ rattāna’’ntiādi. Tattha rattānanti methunarāgena rattānaṃ. Sārattānanti teneva rāgena ativiya rattānaṃ. Avassutānanti lokassādamittasanthavavasena uppannamethunarāgena tintānaṃ. Pariyuṭṭhitānanti methunarāguppattiyā pariyonaddhacittānaṃ. Sadisānanti rattatādīhi sadisānaṃ.
因为“行淫”这个词在纲目里并没有,所以有人会想:“为什么把‘行淫’这个词提出来?”为了说明其中的理由,就说了“在这里,‘应行淫’……纲目中的词句”。关于“以女根”,应当像“沿道路行走”这类说法一样来理解。就像说“沿道路行走”时,可以得出“走道路,或者在路上走”这个意思,同样,说“以女根插入”时,可以得出“插入女根,或者在女根中插入”这个意思。而这也是多半为了显示男子的作用而说的。女根与男根,从意义上是一回事。所谓插入,并不是指仅仅在外面接触,因此说“在未被风触及的湿润空间中”。进入内部才叫做“插入”,并不是在外面接触。而所谓内部,是指本来完全封闭的女根中未被风触及的空间。巴利
Yasmā ‘‘paṭisevati nāmā’’ti padaṃ mātikāya natthi, tasmā ‘‘paṭisevati nāmāti kasmā uddhaṭa’’nti yo maññati, tassa kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘paṭiseveyyāti ettha…pe… mātikāpada’’nti āha. Itthiyā nimittenāti idaṃ ‘‘maggena gacchatī’’tiādi viya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā hi ‘‘maggena gacchatī’’ti vutte ‘‘maggaṃ gacchati, magge vā gacchatī’’ti ayamattho labbhati, evaṃ ‘‘itthiyā nimittena pavesetī’’ti vutte ‘‘itthiyā nimittaṃ paveseti, nimitte vā pavesetī’’ti ayamattho labbhati. Idañca yebhuyyena purisapayogadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Nimittaṃ aṅgajātanti atthato ekaṃ. Pavesanaṃ nāma na bahi chupanamattanti āha ‘‘vātena asamphuṭṭhe allokāse’’ti. Abbhantarañhi pavesento ‘‘pavesetī’’ti vuccati, na bahi chupanto. Abbhantaranti ca pakatiyā sabbaso pihitassa nimittassa vātena asamphuṭṭhokāso vuccatīti.
现在,为了彻底堵住一切漏洞,下面把女根与男根在插入时应当互相接触的各别部位分别加以说明,因此说“女根有四边”等等。所谓“插入”,是指在风吹不到的空腔内,用身体的任何一个部位先接触、再进入。所谓“中间”,就女根而言,是指它的下底面——即不接触四边而进入时,所张开的女根的下底面;至于男根,则是就顶端而说“中间”。所谓“上方”,是指从顶端往上的部位。这一段是针对从中间弯曲而进入的情况说的:相当于把手指的中节弯曲、从某处进入时,以手指中节的背面来作比;这里是就男根上方的中间部位而说的。所谓“从下方进入”,是指接触女根的下部而进入。所谓“从中间进入”,是指接触内底面而由中间进入。如果在某处不接触而进入、随后又抽出,则没有巴拉基格,只有恶作,就像断头因缘中,对鹌鹑张口而不接触、进入后又抽出一样。所谓“仅以中间接触而进入”,是指以顶端接触而进入。所谓“以中节背面弯曲手指”,这是词句上的连接关系;或者应理解为:如以弯曲的手指,从中节的背面进入。所谓“收缩”,是指以根的中段分开。所谓“以上方”,是指收缩之后的上方顶端。现在,男根在上述六处之中,随“上方”所指部位的不同,另外取四边,说明男根有十种处所的差别,于是说“其中”等等。然而前面并未另外取这四边,只是由于“四边”这一说法的共通性,取各自不同的部分,而说了六处。所谓“如秤杆一样进入”,是指笔直进入。巴利
Idāni sabbathā lesokāsapidahanatthaṃ itthinimitte purisanimitte ca labbhamānaṃ pavesakāle aññamaññaṃ phassārahaṃ padesavisesaṃ vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘itthinimitte cattāri passānī’’tiādimāha. Vātena hi asamphuṭṭhe allokāse yattha katthaci ekenapi padesena chupitvā pavesento ‘‘pavesetī’’ti vuccati. Vemajjhanti yathā cattāri passāni asamphusanto paveseti, evaṃ katavivarassa itthinimittassa heṭṭhimatalaṃ vuccati , purisanimitte pana majjhanti aggakoṭiṃ sandhāya vadati. Uparīti aggakoṭito uparibhāgappadeso. Idañca majjhena samiñjitvā pavesentassa majjhimapabbasamiñjitaṅguliṃ katthaci pavesentassa aṅguliyā majjhimapabbapiṭṭhisadisaṃ aṅgajātassa uparibhāgavemajjhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhā pavesentoti itthinimittassa heṭṭhimabhāgena chupantaṃ pavesento. Majjhena pavesentoti abbhantaratalaṃ chupitvā majjhena pavesento. Katthaci acchupantaṃ pavesetvā nīharantassa hi natthi pārājikaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ pana hoti chinnasīsavatthusmiṃ vaṭṭakate mukhe acchupantaṃ pavesetvā nīharantassa viya. Majjheneva chupantaṃ pavesentoti aggakoṭiyā chupantaṃ pavesento. Majjhimapabbapiṭṭhiyā samiñjitaṅgulinti sambandho. Atha vā samiñjitaṅguliṃ majjhimapabbapiṭṭhiyā pavesento viyāti yojetabbaṃ. Saṅkocetvāti nimittamajjhena bhinditvā. Uparibhāgenāti saṅkocitassa uparibhāgakoṭiyā. Idāni purisanimittassa heṭṭhā vuttesu chasu ṭhānesu uparīti vuttaṭṭhānantarassa vasena visuṃ cattāri passāni gahetvā purisanimitte dasadhā ṭhānabhedaṃ dassento ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha. Heṭṭhā pana visuṃ tāni aggahetvā ‘‘cattāri passānī’’ti vacanasāmaññatopi visuṃ visuṃ labbhamānāni ekaccaṃ gahetvā cha ṭhānāni vuttāni. Tulādaṇḍasadisaṃ pavesentassāti ujukaṃ pavesentassa.
在特征上生起的,就是从自己的特征生起的。皮栓,就是从特征上生起的皮本身,也有人叫它“疣块”。即使是在特征上生起的,皮栓等也仍然只是特征而已,所以说“犯巴拉基格”。不说“已损坏的身净色”,而说“已坏灭的身净色”,是为了表明它没有执受。因此说“死皮或干痂”。如果有执受,即使身净色已经损坏,也像损坏的根依处一样,仍然只是犯巴拉基格;但死皮和干痂是没有执受的,只有在有执受的情况下才犯巴拉基格,所以说“犯恶作”。并不是说这样做的人就没有犯,所以才说恶作。然而,女性的特征即使坏灭了,只要已执取还在,仍然只是犯巴拉基格。对于死尸、对于大部分已经消尽的情况,说犯巴拉基格,这是用淫欲之乐来遮止身触之贪。如果存在身触之贪,那就只是犯桑喀地谢思;种子也不属于特征的范围,所以只说恶作。因为说过“以特征入特征”。巴利
Nimitte jātanti attano nimitte jātaṃ. Cammakhīlanti nimitte uṭṭhitaṃ cammameva. ‘‘Uṇṇigaṇḍo’’tipi vadanti. Nimitte jātampi cammakhīlādi nimittamevāti āha ‘‘āpatti pārājikassā’’ti. ‘‘Upahatakāyappasāda’’nti avatvā ‘‘naṭṭhakāyappasāda’’nti vacanaṃ upādinnabhāvassa natthitādassanatthaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘matacammaṃ vā sukkhapīḷakaṃ vā’’ti. Sati hi upādinnabhāve upahatepi kāyappasāde upahatindriyavatthusmiṃ viya pārājikāpattiyeva siyā, matacammaṃ pana sukkhapīḷakañca anupādinnakaṃ upādinnakeyeva ca pārājikāpatti. Tenevāha ‘‘āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti. Na ca evaṃ karontassa anāpatti sakkā vattunti dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, itthinimittassa pana naṭṭhepi upādinnabhāve pārājikāpattiyeva. Mate akkhāyite yebhuyyena akkhāyite pārājikāpattivacanato methunassādenāti iminā kāyasaṃsaggarāgaṃ nivatteti. Sati hi kāyasaṃsaggarāge saṅghādisesova siyā, bījānipi nimittasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchantīti dukkaṭameva vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nimittena nimittaṃ pavesetī’’ti hi vuttaṃ.
现在,因为这种淫欲的谈论是不善的,为了教导“讲说和听闻这类事情的人应当这样去做”,所以说了“这叫做淫欲谈论”等话。淫欲的谈论是增长贪欲的原因,也是嬉笑的对象,为了遮止这两者,就教人致力于厌恶作意等方法。因为通过厌恶作意,贪欲会被遮止;当沙门想等现前时,嬉笑就会被遮止。“出于对众生的怜悯”,是指为了保护众生免受恶趣之苦等。“出于对世间的慈愍”,是指对有情世间的慈愍。巴利
Idāni imissā methunakathāya asabbhirūpattā ‘‘īdisaṃ ṭhānaṃ kathentehi suṇantehi ca evaṃ paṭipajjitabba’’nti anusāsanto ‘‘ayañca methunakathā nāmā’’tiādimāha. Methunakathāya rāgavuddhihetuttā hāsavisayattā ca tadubhayanivattanatthaṃ paṭikūlamanasikārādīsu niyojeti. Paṭikūlamanasikārena hi rāgo nivattati, samaṇasaññādīsu paccupaṭṭhitesu hāso nivattati. Sattānuddayāyāti sattānaṃ apāyadukkhādīhi anurakkhaṇatthaṃ. Lokānukampāyāti sattalokavisayāya anukampāya.
“遮口”的意思是掩住嘴巴。如果因为某种疏忽而偶尔露出微笑,那时就会损害对师长的恭敬。所以,在这种时候,为了不破坏恭敬的态度,应该用扇子遮住嘴巴坐着,这就是这段话的用意。另外,“遮口”就是掩住嘴巴的意思。这里的用意是:不应该用扇子遮着嘴笑而坐。“露齿”的意思是露出牙齿、张开嘴。“以热忱”的意思是不退缩,带着奋起的心。如果因为想着“我竟然说出了这样不善的话”而退缩,就无法把道理讲清楚。所以应该带着这样的热忱来说:“连那样的正自觉者都说了这样的话,何况是我呢?”这就是用意所在。“与师相应”的意思是与师相似、与师同等。巴利
Mukhaṃ apidhāyāti mukhaṃ apidahitvā, yena kenaci pamādena kadāci mandahāso bhaveyya, tadā garuttaṃ kuppeyya, tasmā tādise kāle garubhāvassa avikopanatthaṃ bījakena mukhaṃ paṭicchādetvā nisīditabbanti adhippāyo. Atha vā mukhaṃ apidhāyāti mukhaṃ pidahitvāti attho. Bījakena mukhaṃ paṭicchādetvā hasamānena na nisīditabbanti ayamettha adhippāyo. Dantavidaṃsakanti dante dassetvā vivaritvā cāti attho. Gabbhitenāti saṅkocaṃ anāpajjantena, ussāhajātenāti attho. Yadi hi ‘‘īdisaṃ nāma asabbhiṃ kathemī’’ti saṅkocaṃ āpajjeyya, atthavibhāvanaṃ na siyā, tasmā ‘‘tādisena sammāsambuddhenapi tāva īdisaṃ kathitaṃ, kimaṅgaṃ panāhaṃ kathemī’’ti evaṃ ussāhajātena kathetabbanti adhippāyo. Satthupaṭibhāgenāti satthukappena, satthusadisenāti attho.
非制的注释巴利
Anupaññattivaṇṇanā
“在畜生中投生”,意思是在畜生中出生。因为被称为畜生的众生里也有极其微小的,连在它们的通道里放进一粒芝麻那么大的东西都容不下,所以并不是所有畜生女都够得上成为巴拉基格的对象。为了界定出那些能容纳进入的畜生女,才说“这里唯有够得上巴拉基格的对象”等等。“无足者、蛇、鱼”等偈颂,是古德为了显示巴拉基格对象的下限范围而安立的。其中,“蛇”是以种类来总括一切蛇类,所以说“以蛇一词……总括长种类”。其中,贡那萨是蛇的一种,背上能看到大圆斑。“鱼”一词是水族的标志词,所以说“以鱼一词……总括水族”。正因为如此,蛙和龟虽然是有足的,但因为属于水族,也被总括在内。巴利
Tiracchānesu gatāyāti tiracchānesu uppannāya. Yasmā tiracchānagatā nāma atikhuddakāpi honti, yesaṃ maggesu tilaphalamattampi pavesanaṃ nappahoti, tasmā na sabbāva tiracchānagatitthiyo pārājikavatthubhūtāti pavesanappahonakavasena labbhamānakatiracchānagatitthiyo paricchinditvā dassento ‘‘pārājikavatthubhūtā eva cetthā’’tiādimāha. Apadānaṃ ahimacchātiādigāthā pārājikavatthūnaṃ heṭṭhimaparicchedadassanatthaṃ porāṇehi ṭhapitā. Tattha ahīti jātiniddesena sabbāpi sappajāti saṅgahitāti āha – ‘‘ahiggahaṇena…pe… dīghajāti saṅgahitā’’ti. Tattha gonasāti sappavisesā, yesaṃ piṭṭhīsu mahantāni maṇḍalāni sandissanti. Macchaggahaṇaṃ odakajātiyā upalakkhaṇapadanti āha – ‘‘macchaggahaṇena…pe… odakajāti saṅgahitā’’ti. Teneva maṇḍūkakacchapānaṃ sapādakattepi odakajātikattā saṅgaho kato.
“口形”是指嘴唇皮肤的形状。所谓“归入伤口的略摄”,就是归入伤口的分类,因为它被包含在九种伤口入口之中。关于伤口的土喇咤亚,应当依据“以非道入非道,犯土喇咤亚”这句话来理解。因为在那部经中,对于两处破裂的伤口,如果从一个伤口进入、从另一个伤口出来,就说为土喇咤亚。而且后面还会说:“依照这部经的随顺方式,在一切伤口略摄中,应当知道是土喇咤亚。”
“鸡”这个词也是一切鸟类的代表性用语,所以说“以鸡一词……总括鸟类”。“猫”这个词应当看作四足类的代表性用语,所以说“以猫一词……总括四足类”。所谓的“树狗”,也有人叫它松鼠。所谓的“獴”,就是有尾巴的动物。巴利
Mukhasaṇṭhānanti oṭṭhacammasaṇṭhānaṃ. Vaṇasaṅkhepaṃ gacchatīti vaṇasaṅgahaṃ gacchati navasu vaṇamukhesu saṅgahitattāti adhippāyo. Vaṇe thullaccayañca ‘‘amaggena amaggaṃ paveseti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti imassa vasena veditabbaṃ. Tasmiñhi sutte dvīsu sambhinnavaṇesu ekena vaṇena pavesetvā dutiyena nīharantassa thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ. Vakkhati ca ‘‘imassa suttassa anulomavasena sabbattha vaṇasaṅkhepe thullaccayaṃ veditabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.66). Kukkuṭiggahaṇampi sabbāya pakkhijātiyā upalakkhaṇapadanti āha – ‘‘kukkuṭiggahaṇena…pe… pakkhijāti saṅgahitā’’ti. Majjāriggahaṇampi catuppadajātiyā upalakkhaṇapadanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘majjāriggahaṇena…pe… catuppadajāti saṅgahitā’’ti. Rukkhasunakhā nāma kalandakātipi vadanti. Maṅgusāti naṅgulā.
巴拉基格这个词,是把前缀加以延长,再把ta音变成ka音,所以说成pārājika,因此说“pārājika就是parājita(败亡)”。《结文》里说:“有的地方指罪,比如‘以巴拉基格法不得举罪’等处(pārā. 384, 391);有的地方指学处,这要看到后自己判断。”为了说明这个词依作者(动作主体)而成立,pārājika一词既指学处也指罪,所以说“凡违越彼者”等等。为了说明这个词依受事(对象)而成立,pārājika一词则指人,所以说“人因为败亡”等等。巴利
Parājita-saddo upasaggassa vuddhiṃ katvā ta-kārassa ca ka-kāraṃ katvā pārājikoti niddiṭṭhoti āha ‘‘pārājikoti parājito’’ti. ‘‘Katthaci āpattīti ‘pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyyā’tiādīsu (pārā. 384, 391), katthaci sikkhāpadanti idaṃ pana disvā jānitabba’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Parājayatīti pārājikaṃ, pārājikāti ca kattusādhanena pārājika-saddena sikkhāpadaṃ āpatti ca vuccatīti dassento āha ‘‘yo taṃ atikkamatī’’tiādi. Puggalo pana kammasādhanena pārājika-saddena vuccatīti dassento āha ‘‘puggalo yasmā parājito’’tiādi.
正是为了说明这个含义,才说“犯了这个罪的人就是败亡者、已经陷入败亡”,就是指这个意思。因为通过“已退堕、已失败”等说法可以知道:犯了这种罪的人就是已退堕者、是败亡者、是已经陷入败亡的人——这才是所要表达的意思,而不是说这个人本身叫做“巴拉基格”。应该这样来理解。因为《附随》里的那些偈颂,也并不是为了展示“巴拉基格”一词用于指人时的词源;它们是在分别辨析词源、说明“指罪”“指学处”等用法中“巴拉基格”这类词的词源这一场合下说出的。这首《附随》偈颂的意思是:在所谓指人、指罪、指学处的巴拉基格当中,所谓指罪的巴拉基格,是说犯这个罪的人,因为成为败亡者、陷入败亡,从正法退堕、毁败、坏灭、被摒弃——只要这个人还没被驱摈出去,他就再也没有伍波萨他、自恣等类的共住资格,因此,以这个原因,这个指罪的巴拉基格就叫做巴拉基格。这里的简要含义是:因为由此而成为败亡者,所以这个叫做巴拉基格。“已退堕”是指从教法中毁坏,也就是已经退失。“已断”是指在中间被截断。巴利
Etameva hi atthaṃ sandhāyāti ‘‘taṃ āpattiṃ āpanno puggalo parājito hoti parājayamāpanno’’ti etamatthaṃ sandhāya. Cuto paraddhotiādinā hi taṃ āpattiṃ āpannapuggalo cuto hoti parājito parājayaṃ āpannoti ayamattho viññāyati, na pana puggalo pārājiko nāma hotīti etamatthaṃ sandhāyāti evamattho gahetabbo. Na hi parivārepi gāthā puggalavuttipārājikasaddanibbacanadassanatthaṃ vuttā āpattivuttīnaṃ pārājikā-disaddānaṃ nibbacanavibhāgappasaṅge vuttattā. Ayañhi parivāragāthāya attho (pari. aṭṭha. 339) – yadidaṃ puggalāpattisikkhāpadapārājikesu āpattipārājikaṃ nāma vuttaṃ, taṃ āpajjanto puggalo yasmā parājito parājayamāpanno saddhamā cuto paraddho bhaṭṭho niraṅkato ca hoti, anīhaṭe tasmiṃ puggale puna uposathapavāraṇādibhedo saṃvāso natthi, tenetaṃ iti vuccati tena kāraṇena etaṃ āpattipārājikaṃ iti vuccatīti. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yasmā parājito hoti etena, tasmā etaṃ pārājikanti vuccatīti. Paribhaṭṭhoti sāsanato bhaṭṭho, parihīnoti attho. Chinnoti antarā khaṇḍito.
“与连接一起”是指连同词语的连接。“四种僧伽业”是指以白告甘马等方式分出的四种业。“以界所限者”是指在同一个界内所摄者。“本性者”是指没有犯巴拉基格、也没有被摈除的人。“五种”也是指以因缘、诵出等方式分出的五种。正如先前的理发匠等人那样,除开特别开许的以外,其余一切学处,一切有惭比丘都不可违越,因此说“因为一切有惭比丘都应平等修学”。“同”是指一起,或者同时。“应修学”是指以不违越的方式,以及通过学习、请问等方式而应当修学。在共同学处中,不可以对他说“你不应修学这个”而把他排斥在外,所以说“没有一个人被看见在这之外”。所谓“凡彼所说”,是一个连接词。巴利
Saddhiṃ yojanāyāti padayojanāya saddhiṃ. Catubbidhaṃ saṅghakammanti apalokanādivasena catubbidhaṃ kammaṃ. Sīmāparicchinnehīti ekasīmāpariyāpannehi. Pakatattā nāma pārājikaṃ anāpannā anukkhittā ca. Pañcavidhopīti nidānuddesādivasena pañcavidhopi. Nahāpitapubbakānaṃ viya odhisaanuññātaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ sabbampi sikkhāpadaṃ sabbehipi lajjīpuggalehi anatikkamanīyattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbehipi lajjīpuggalehi samaṃ sikkhitabbabhāvato’’ti. Samanti saddhiṃ, ekappahārena vā. Sikkhitabbabhāvatoti anatikkamanavasena uggahaparipucchādinā ca sikkhitabbabhāvato. Sāmaññasikkhāpadesu ‘‘idaṃ tayā na sikkhitabba’’nti evaṃ abahikātabbato ‘‘na ekopi tato bahiddhā sandissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ taṃ vuttanti sambandho.
56 不只是以女人为根门事才是巴拉基格事——这句话是在说明:不只是以女人为根门事才是巴拉基格事,以双性人、黄门、男人的根门事也是巴拉基格事。而“不只是以人类女人”这句话,则是在说明:不只是以人类女人的根门事才是巴拉基格事,以非人女人、畜生女、非人男、双性人等的根门事也是巴拉基格事。三部《结文》中说:“‘唯事不成’,这是指由非人女人的连带关系而涉及的金、银等所造之物,予以遮止。”这看起来似乎不合理。因为在这之前,并没有提到非人女人,怎么会有那样的连带关系呢?就在刚才,才以“三种女人”等语提到了非人女人,而仅仅因为提到非人女人就连带涉及金、银等所造之物,是不合理的。实际上,通过按人、非人、畜生这三类来解说作为巴拉基格事的众生,就已经排除了对金、银等所造之物的连带关系。因为在《论母》中,并没有特别指定女人、男人等,或人类、非人等,只是笼统地说:“若行淫欲法”,仅此一句。在它的《分别》中,虽然举出《论母》的句子“行淫者”,并显示了行淫的方式:“以根门入根门,以生殖器入生殖器,乃至仅入芝麻果量者,这名为行淫”,但并没有把作为巴拉基格事的根门限定在任何特定对象上。因此,可能会产生这样的疑惑:“只有女人的根门事才是巴拉基格事,还是别人的根门事也是?”而且“根门”这个说法,在金、银等所造的形象物上也能用。正因为如此,在《调伏事》中说:“以生殖器触碰了涂彩像的根门,以生殖器触碰了木女像的根门。”所以,从“根门”这个笼统说法来看,有人可能会怀疑:“金、银等所造之物的根门,到底算不算巴拉基格事?”正因为如此,才说“在涂彩像等事上,他产生了疑惑”。因此,为了消除这种疑惑,也为了确定作为巴拉基格事的众生,世尊按生类把人、非人等分为三类,对作为巴拉基格事的众生加以分别说明。所以应当说:“‘唯事不成’这句话,是从‘根门’这个笼统说法连带引出的,它遮止了金、银等所造之物的根门。”巴利
56.Na kevalaṃ itthiyā eva nimittaṃ pārājikavatthūti iminā kevalaṃ itthiyā eva nimittaṃ pārājikavatthu na hoti, atha kho ubhatobyañjanakapaṇḍakapurisānampi nimittaṃ pārājikavatthūti dasseti. Na ca manussitthiyā evāti iminā pana manussitthiyā eva nimittaṃ pārājikavatthu na hoti, amanussitthitiracchānagatitthiamanussubhatobyañjanakādīnampi nimittaṃ pārājikavatthūti dasseti. ‘‘Vatthumeva na hotīti amanussitthipasaṅgena āgataṃ suvaṇṇarajatādimayaṃ paṭikkhipatī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ viya na dissati. Na hi ito pubbe amanussitthiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ atthi, yena tappasaṅgo siyā. Idāneva hi ‘‘tisso itthiyo’’tiādinā amanussitthiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, na ca amanussitthiggahaṇena suvaṇṇarajatādimayānaṃ pasaṅgo yutto. Manussāmanussatiracchānajātivasena tividhā katvā pārājikavatthubhūtasattānaṃ niddesena suvaṇṇarajatādimayānaṃ pasaṅgassa nivattitattā. Tathā hi itthipurisādīsu manussāmanussādīsu vā kañci anāmasitvā avisesena ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyā’’ti ettakameva mātikāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa padabhājane ca ‘‘paṭisevati nāmā’’ti mātikaṃ padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘yo nimittena nimittaṃ aṅgajātena aṅgajātaṃ antamaso tilaphalamattampi paveseti, eso paṭisevati nāmā’’ti paṭisevanākārova dassito, na pana pārājikavatthubhūtanimittanissayā manussāmanussatiracchānagatā itthipurisapaṇḍakaubhatobyañjanakā niyametvā dassitā, tasmā ‘‘itthiyā eva nu kho nimittaṃ pārājikavatthu, udāhu aññesampī’’ti evamādi sandeho siyā, nimittavohāro ca suvaṇṇarajatādimayarūpakesu ca labbhatiyeva. Teneva vinītavatthūsu (pārā. 71) ‘‘lepacittassa nimittaṃ aṅgajātena chupi, dārudhītalikāya nimittaṃ aṅgajātena chupī’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā nimittasāmaññato ‘‘suvaṇṇarajatādimayānampi nimittaṃ pārājikavatthu hoti, na hotī’’ti kassaci āsaṅkā siyā. Teneva ‘‘lepacittādivatthūsu tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā tadāsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ pārājikavatthubhūtasattaniyamanatthañca jātivasena manussāmanussādito tidhā katvā pārājikavatthubhūte satte bhagavā vibhajitvā dasseti, tasmā ‘‘vatthumeva na hotī’’ti nimittasāmaññato pasaṅgāgataṃ suvaṇṇarajatādimayānaṃ nimittaṃ paṭikkhipatīti vattabbaṃ.
“三道”是处格意义的业格,所以说“应理解为‘在三道中’”。用“如此,于一切处”这句话,也暗示“二道”应当理解为“在二道中”。巴利
Tayo maggeti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘tīsu maggesūti attho veditabbo’’ti. Evaṃ sabbatthāti iminā ‘‘dve magge’’ti etthāpi dvīsu maggesūti attho veditabboti atidissati.
第一组四法的注释巴利
Paṭhamacatukkakathāvaṇṇanā
57 “Assā”是动词词。为了说明它的含义,所以说“hoti”。不过在《结文》里,还给出了另一种理解:“以‘assā’指称人之后,显示‘hoti’是补足语的说法。”但这种理解并不更好。因为如果真的是补足语的说法,那就应该说“hoti”;正因为如此,在另一种理解中,才把“hoti”作为补足语的说法。巴利
57.Assāti ākhyātikapadanti tassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘hotī’’ti āha. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana ‘‘assāti puggalaṃ parāmasitvā hotīti vacanaseso dassito’’tipi atthavikappo dassito, na so sundarataro. Yadi hi vacanaseso adhippeto siyā, ‘‘hotī’’ti vattabbaṃ, teneva aññasmiṃ atthavikappe hotīti vacanaseso kato.
58 “正在受用者”这里,“受用”指的是生起想要去从事的心,所以说“具有从事之心的人”。《结文》中说:“‘寻求敌对者’,是指寻求那些想学戒的比丘的敌对者,也就是破戒的状态。”不过,这里应该理解为:寻求自己怨敌的某个敌对者,也就是某个敌人。因为敌对者想消灭自己的怨敌,就希望怨敌的某个敌人成为自己的盟友。由于下文要讲到国王敌对者等,为了显示与之相应的含义,所以说“比丘们本身就是敌对者,所以是比丘敌对者”。但如果表述为“比丘的敌对者是比丘敌对者”,那么比丘的敌对者,比如国王等,也会被包含在内,这样一来,国王敌对者等就不该被单独列出了。不过在别处,“比丘的敌对者是比丘敌对者”这个含义是成立的,就像“教法敌对者”一样。被嫉妒所败,就是被以不能忍受他人获得利养恭敬等为特征的嫉妒所压倒。不动摇,就是没有动摇,意思是像那样抓住,使其不能移动、翻转。令结合,就是令与大便道结合。巴利
58.Sādiyantassevāti ettha sādiyanaṃ nāma sevetukāmatācittassa upaṭṭhāpananti āha ‘‘paṭisevanacittasamaṅgissā’’ti. ‘‘Paṭipakkhaṃ atthayantīti sikkhākāmānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭipakkhaṃ dussīlabhāvaṃ atthayantī’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Attano veripuggalassa pana paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ kañci amittaṃ atthayanti gavesantīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Paccatthikā hi attano veriṃ nāsetukāmā tassa paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ kañci amittaṃ attano sahāyabhāvamupagacchantaṃ icchanti. Rājapaccatthikādīnaṃ upari vakkhamānattā tadanurūpavasena atthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhū eva paccatthikā bhikkhupaccatthikā’’ti āha. ‘‘Bhikkhussa paccatthikā bhikkhupaccatthikā’’ti evaṃ pana vuccamāne bhikkhussa paccatthikā rājādayopi ettheva saṅgayhantīti rājapaccatthikādayo visuṃ na vattabbā siyuṃ, aññattha pana bhikkhussa paccatthikā bhikkhupaccatthikāti ayamattho labbhateva ‘‘sāsanapaccatthikā’’ti yathā. Issāpakatāti paresaṃ lābhasakkārādiasahanalakkhaṇāya issāya abhibhūtā. Nipparipphandanti paripphandavirahitaṃ, yathā calituṃ parivattituṃ na sakkoti, tathā gahetvāti attho. Sampayojentīti vaccamaggena saddhiṃ yojenti.
在那刹那,也就是进入的刹那,从顶端一直到根部完全进入的那段时间,称为“进入刹那”。所谓“受用”,是指生起受用之心,所以说“使受用之心现起”。“在已进入时”,是指男根完全无余地进入适合进入的位置时。这样进入之后,从开始拔出之前,中间停留的那段时间,叫做“停留”。不过《义注》中是针对女人到了泄精、一切努力都停下来而停住的时候,说为“在泄精时”。所谓“拔出”,是指直到顶端取出时,所以说“在取出时,使受用之心现起”。“火坑”,就是火炭堆。在这样的时刻,不受用并不是所有人都做得到的,所以说“对于这样的、已开始修观者……”等等。以十一种火,就是贪、嗔、痴、生、老、死、愁、悲、苦、忧、恼这十一种火。因为贪等有燃烧之义,所以称为“火”。它们若在谁身上存在,就会烧灼谁,成为大热恼,而且难以熄灭。世尊正是想要惩治那些顽劣之人,所以说“他正在破坏那些敌对者的心愿”。“Assā”,就是指那个不受用的人,具足如前所说功德的人。巴利
Tasmiṃ khaṇeti tasmiṃ pavesanakkhaṇe, aggato yāva mūlā pavesanakālo ‘‘pavesanakkhaṇo’’ti vuccati. Sādiyanaṃ nāma sevanacittassa uppādananti āha ‘‘sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Paviṭṭhakāleti aṅgajātassa yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ pavesanārahaṃ, tattakaṃ anavasesato paviṭṭhakāle. Evaṃ paviṭṭhassa uddharaṇārambhato antarā ṭhitakālo ṭhitaṃ nāma. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mātugāmassa sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ patvā sabbathā vāyamato oramitvā ṭhitakālaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhisamaye’’ti vuttaṃ. Uddharaṇaṃ nāma yāva aggā nīharaṇakāloti āha – ‘‘nīharaṇakāle paṭisevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Aṅgārakāsunti aṅgārarāsiṃ. Evarūpe kāle asādiyanaṃ nāma na sabbesaṃ visayoti āha ‘‘imañhi evarūpaṃ āraddhavipassaka’’ntiādi . Ekādasahi aggīhīti rāgadosamohajātijarāmaraṇasokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsasaṅkhātehi ekādasahi aggīhi. Rāgādayo hi anuḍahanaṭṭhena ‘‘aggī’’ti vuccanti. Te hi yassa santi , taṃ niḍahanti, mahāpariḷāhā ca honti dunnibbāpayā ca. Bhagavatā ca dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggaho icchitoyevāti āha – ‘‘paccatthikānañcassa manorathavighātaṃ karonto’’ti. Assāti asādiyantassa yathāvuttaguṇasamaṅgissa.
二百六十九种四法论的注释巴利
Ekūnasattatidvisatacatukkakathāvaṇṇanā
59-60 未被食之相是用未被食这个词来说的,省略了后半个词,所以解释说未被狗、豺等所食之相。其相为未被食者,彼即未被食之相。因为醒觉等词没有修饰限定,所以说它们是纯粹四句。巴利
59-60. Akkhāyitanimittā akkhāyita-saddena vuttā uttarapadalopenāti āha ‘‘soṇasiṅgālādīhi akkhāyitanimitta’’nti. Akkhāyitaṃ nimittaṃ yassā sā akkhāyitanimittā. ‘‘Jāgaranti’’ntiādi visesanarahitattā ‘‘suddhikacatukkānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“同师长老”是指同一位导师门下的诵经弟子。“大怖畏”是指婆罗门帝萨的怖畏。恒河的对岸,就是“对岸恒河”。“vata re”是表示呵责的语气词。如果不舍弃,该怎么办?所以他说“应当恒常听闻”等等。通过“如此,尊重律者”这句话,说明了上面他们所说的判决应当受到尊重的原因。“遍取一切”是指毫无剩余地取尽整个巴拉基格的范围。“断流”是指在巴拉基格范围内断除违犯之流。因为未曾制定,也不合理,所以说“然而这里看不到巴拉基格的影子”。不过有些人说:“因为半食的状态难以判定,所以世尊没有在这里制定巴拉基格。”这种说法没有道理,难以判定并不是不制定的原因,因为在多分食等情况中同样存在难以判定的情形。从半食稍微多吃一点或少吃一点,如果被吃了,那也算作多分食或未食,所以像半食一样,多分食等实际上也是难以判定的。再说,如果半食在本质上就属于巴拉基格的范围,世尊绝不会因为难以判定就不制定巴拉基格。巴利
Samānācariyakā therāti ekācariyassa pāṭhakantevāsikā. Mahābhayeti brāhmaṇatissabhaye. Gaṅgāya aparabhāgo aparagaṅgaṃ. Vata reti garahatthe nipāto. Avissajjantena kiṃ kattabbanti āha ‘‘niccakālaṃ sotabba’’ntiādi. Evaṃ vinayagarukānanti iminā upari tehi vuccamānavinicchayassa garukaraṇīyatāya kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Sabbaṃ pariyādiyitvāti sabbaṃ pārājikakkhettaṃ anavasesato gahetvā. Sotaṃ chinditvāti pārājikakkhette vītikkamasotaṃ chinditvā. Apaññattabhāvato yuttiabhāvato ca ‘‘pārājikacchāyā panettha na dissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘upaḍḍhakkhāyitabhāvassa dubbinicchayattā tattha pārājikaṃ na paññapesī’’ti vadanti, taṃ akāraṇaṃ, na ca dubbinicchayatā apaññattikāraṇaṃ yebhuyyakkhāyitādīsupi dubbinicchayabhāvassa samānattā. Upaḍḍhakkhāyitato hi kiñcideva adhikaṃ ūnaṃ vā yadi khāyitaṃ siyā, tampi yebhuyyena khāyitaṃ akkhāyitanti saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti upaḍḍhakkhāyitamiva yebhuyyakkhāyitādīnipi dubbinicchayāneva. Apica upaḍḍhakkhāyitaṃ yadi sabhāvato pārājikakkhettaṃ siyā, na tattha bhagavā dubbinicchayanti pārājikaṃ na paññapeti.
现在,长老为了支持已经作出的判定,又举出别的理由,说了“再者”等话。如果相上还剩下哪怕一点点肉纹,那就是大多数已被吃掉;从此以后,如果相被完全吃尽,就只是恶作。为了说明这一点,他说“从此以后没有土喇咤亚”。或者,所谓大多数已被吃掉,应当理解为:在粪道、尿道、口这三者的四个部分中,越过两个部分,吃到第三部分末端;从此以后再越过第三部分,吃到第四部分末端,就是恶作的情形。这些只应在死尸的情况下理解,因为经文中有“死尸大多数未被吃掉”等说法。《大结品》中说:“即使相被完全吃尽等一切说法,都是针对活身而说的。”有人写道:“应当审察之后再取。”这里有什么可审察的呢?因为活身才是主要的依据,而且对于死尸所得的判定将另外说明。因此,《论母注释》中也说:巴利
Idāni therena katavinicchayameva upatthambhetvā aparampi tattha kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Nimitte appamattikāpi maṃsarāji sace avasiṭṭhā hoti, taṃ yebhuyyakkhāyitameva hoti, tato paraṃ pana sabbaso khāyite nimitte dukkaṭamevāti dassento āha ‘‘tato paraṃ thullaccayaṃ natthī’’ti. Atha vā yebhuyyena khāyitaṃ nāma vaccamaggapassāvamaggamukhānaṃ catūsu koṭṭhāsesu dve koṭṭhāse atikkamma yāva tatiyakoṭṭhāsassa pariyosānā khāditaṃ, tato paraṃ pana tatiyakoṭṭhāsaṃ atikkamma yāva catutthakoṭṭhāsassa pariyosānā khāditaṃ dukkaṭavatthūti veditabbaṃ. Matasarīrasmiṃyeva veditabbanti ‘‘mataṃ yebhuyyena akkhāyita’’ntiādivacanato. ‘‘Yadipi nimittaṃ sabbaso khāyitantiādi sabbaṃ jīvamānakasarīrameva sandhāya vutta’’nti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘taṃ vīmaṃsitvā gahetabba’’nti likhitaṃ. Kimettha vīmaṃsitabbaṃ jīvamānakasarīrasseva adhikatattā matasarīre labbhamānassa vinicchayassa visuṃ vakkhamānattā ca. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyampi (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) –
对于活着的身体,按照上面所说的方式,即使把皮肤等全部切断、一点都不剩,只要还看得出性器官的形状,那么,哪怕只是把骨头、有知觉的干疮或皮栓插进生殖器,只要有行淫的心,就犯巴拉基格;如果把没有知觉的干疮、干皮或毛插进去,就犯恶作。如果把形状也完全切掉、一点都不剩,性器官被彻底拔除,那么,因为这种努力而导致伤口收缩,就犯土喇咤亚。巴利
‘‘Jīvamānakasarīrassa vuttappakāre magge sacepi tacādīni anavasesetvā sabbaso chinne nimittasaṇṭhānamattaṃ paññāyati, tattha antamaso aṅgajāte uṭṭhikaṃ anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ pīḷakaṃ vā cammakhīlaṃ vā pavesentassapi sevanacitte sati pārājikaṃ, naṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ sukkhapīḷakaṃ vā matacammaṃ vā lomaṃ vā pavesentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace nimittasaṇṭhānamattampi anavasesetvā sabbaso maggo uppāṭito, tattha upakkamato vaṇasaṅkhepavasena thullaccaya’’nti –
针对活着的身体,才给出了上面所说的判定。巴利
Jīvamānakasarīrasmiṃyeva yathāvuttavinicchayo dassito.
“完全被吃掉了”是指:把停在标记范围内的外皮肌肉彻底割开,弄成像被狗、豺狼等吃过一样。因此说“没有皮肉”。不过,因为标记处的肉和里面的皮肉还在,所以说“标记的形状还能看出来”。因此说“有入口”。而“连标记的形状也不剩”,是指不再留下任何按标记形状存在的皮肉等。前面已经说明了活人身体上能见到的情况,现在为了说明死人身体上能见到的情况,所以说“然而在死尸上”等等。巴利
Sabbaso khāyitanti nimittappadese bahiṭṭhitaṃ chavicammaṃ sabbaso chinditvā soṇasiṅgālādīhi khāyitasadisaṃ kataṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘chavicammaṃ natthī’’ti. Nimittamaṃsassa pana abbhantare chavicammassa ca vijjamānattā ‘‘nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ paññāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘pavesanaṃ jāyatī’’ti. Nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ panaanavasesetvāti nimittākārena ṭhitaṃ chavicammamaṃsādiṃ anavasesetvā. Jīvamānakasarīre labbhamānavisesaṃ dassetvā idāni matasarīre labbhamānavisesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘matasarīre panā’’tiādi.
不过,按照“人的活着的身体”等说法,眼等部位也归入“疮”的范围,所以把疮单独作为一节,并对眼等部位也说土喇咤亚。它们属于疮的范围,应当依据“九门大疮”等经文来了知。至于畜生身上的眼疮、耳疮,则应以注释为准,判为恶作。正如在人、非人、畜生身上,粪道、尿道、口作为巴拉基格事体并无差别,同样,眼等部位作为土喇咤亚等事体也应没有差别。关于疮的土喇咤亚,是笼统地说的:“以非道入非道,犯土喇咤亚”,并没有特别限定“人”。如果对畜生身上的疮不应有土喇咤亚,那么对蝗虫口、青蛙口形状的疮合,就不应说土喇咤亚,但经中已经说了,所以在这里应以注释师为准。因为注释师是了知世尊意趣的人。因此说:“佛所说法与律,其弟子如实了知”等。这里说的“人”,是笼统地指女人、男人、黄门、二根。所谓“膀胱囊”,就是膀胱袋,即男人的生殖器囊。死尸在尚未膨胀腐烂等之前,应知为新鲜身体。因此说:“然而当身体膨胀时”等。舍巴拉基格事体和土喇咤亚事体,这里应理解为舍去巴拉基格事体性和土喇咤亚事体性。与死畜生相关联。巴利
Manussānaṃ jīvamānakasarīretiādinā pana akkhiādayopi vaṇasaṅgahaṃ gacchantīti vaṇena ekaparicchedaṃ katvā akkhiādīsupi thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ. Tesañca vaṇasaṅgaho ‘‘navadvāro mahāvaṇo’’ti (mi. pa. 2.6.1) evamādisuttānusārena veditabbo. Tiracchānagatānaṃ akkhikaṇṇavaṇesu dukkaṭaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāppamāṇena gahetabbaṃ. Yathā hi manussāmanussatiracchānagatesu vaccamaggapassāvamaggamukhānaṃ pārājikavatthubhāve nānākaraṇaṃ natthi, evaṃ akkhiādīnampi thullaccayādivatthubhāve ninnānākaraṇena bhavitabbaṃ. Vaṇe thullaccayañca ‘‘amaggena amaggaṃ paveseti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 66) sāmaññato vuttaṃ, na pana ‘‘manussāna’’nti visesanaṃ atthi. Yadi ca tiracchānagatānaṃ vaṇesu thullaccayena na bhavitabbaṃ, pataṅgamukhamaṇḍūkassa mukhasaṇṭhāne vaṇasaṅkhepato thullaccayaṃ na vattabbaṃ, vuttañca, tasmā aṭṭhakathācariyā evettha pamāṇaṃ. Bhagavato adhippāyaññuno hi aṭṭhakathācariyā. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhena dhammo vinayo ca vutto, yo tassa puttehi tatheva ñāto’’tiādi (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.). Manussānanti itthipurisapaṇḍakaubhatobyañjanakānaṃ sāmaññato vuttaṃ. Vatthikosesūti vatthipuṭesu purisānaṃ aṅgajātakosesu. Matasarīraṃ yāva uddhumātakādibhāvena kuthitaṃ na hoti, tāva allasarīranti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘yadā pana sarīraṃ uddhumātakaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Pārājikavatthuñca thullaccayavatthuñca vijahatīti ettha pārājikavatthubhāvaṃ thullaccayavatthubhāvañca vijahatīti attho veditabbo. Matānaṃ tiracchānagatānanti sambandho.
以淫欲贪把生殖器送入女根腔的,说犯土喇咤亚。所以论主说“不送入生殖器”。所谓“不送入女根”,就是不把生殖器送入女根的相状。说“不送入”,是显示没有送入的意图。但若以送入的意图而在外部触碰,因为这是行淫的前方便,就只应犯恶作。“以根触根,土喇咤亚”——这是依据“诸比丘,不应以染心触碰生殖器,若触碰者,犯土喇咤亚”这段经文而说的。在这里,为了显示某些人对意义有不同解释的方式,论主说了“然而在大注疏中……”等话。其中,虽然大注疏里说过“作大注疏之身……”,但为了显示其他注疏中没有“以淫欲贪由口……”这种说法,所以他说“然而在大注疏中……”。由于没有说“以生殖器……”,所以他说“无差别地”。巴利
Methunarāgena vatthikosaṃ pavesentassa thullaccayaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘patthikosaṃ appavesento’’ti. Itthiyā appavesentoti itthiyā nimittaṃ appavesento. Appavesentoti ca pavesanādhippāyassa abhāvaṃ dasseti. Pavesanādhippāyena bahi chupantassa pana methunassa pubbapayogattā dukkaṭeneva bhavitabbaṃ. Nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, thullaccayanti idaṃ ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252) imassa suttassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tattha ca kesañci aññathāpi atthavikappassa vidhiṃ dassento ‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘katvā mahāaṭṭhakathaṃ sarīra’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) vuttaṃ, tathāpi sesaaṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘methunarāgena mukhenā’’ti vacanassa abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ panā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Aṅgajātenā’’ti avuttattā ‘‘avisesenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
现在,为了把大注疏和巴利圣典对照起来展示,说了“首先,在大注疏中……”这一段。因为如果不是这样的话,以自然的方式触碰,就会像抓取角等例子那样,犯恶作。这样把大注疏和巴利圣典对照之后,现在为了说明有些人对这里的含义有不同理解,说了“然而有些人……”这一段。桑喀地谢思——依照身触学处,是桑喀地谢思。就是按照前面所说的方式,仅以淫欲染心。由于提到了“以标记或以自然开口”,应当知道:以淫欲染心、以自然方式触碰母畜生的尿道,犯恶作。以身触欲染犯恶作——无论是以标记,还是以自然开口,以身触欲染而触碰的,就只是犯恶作。巴利
Idāni mahāaṭṭhakathaṃ pāḷiyā saṃsanditvā dassento ‘‘yaṃ tāva mahāaṭṭhakathāya’’ntiādimāha. Itarathā hi dukkaṭaṃ siyāti pakatimukhena chupantassa visāṇādiggahaṇe viya dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Evaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathaṃ pāḷiyā saṃsanditvā idāni tattha kesañci aññathā atthavikappaṃ dassento ‘‘keci panā’’tiādimāha. Saṅghādisesoti kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadena saṅghādiseso. Vuttanayenevāti methunarāgeneva. ‘‘Nimittamukhenā’’ti vuttattā tiracchānagatitthiyā passāvamaggaṃ methunarāgena pakatimukhena chupantassa dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena dukkaṭanti nimittamukhena vā pakatimukhena vā kāyasaṃsaggarāgena chupantassa dukkaṭameva.
铺展四法分别的注释巴利
Santhatacatukkabhedakathāvaṇṇanā
61-2 “已行道者”是指已经开始修观的人。“所执取”是就身根来说的。以所执取触,意思是说被所执取所触、所碰;应当这样理解:这是依被动语态省略了ya音节的表达方式。或者也可以这样理解这里的含义:这样做的时候,不会以所执取去触碰、去碰触任何所执取之物。“将示现些许”就是他们将生起些许、将构想些许,这是所要表达的意思。以铺展等差别而分别,就是用铺展等种种限定来加以区分,也就是用铺展等四种来组合,这是所要表达的意思。巴利
61-2.Paṭipannakassāti āraddhavipassakassa. Upādinnakanti kāyindriyaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Upādinnakena phusatīti upādinnakena phusīyati ghaṭṭīyatīti evaṃ kammani ya-kāralopena attho veditabbo. Atha vā evaṃ karonto kiñci upādinnakaṃ upādinnakena na phusati na ghaṭṭetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Lesaṃ oḍḍessantīti lesaṃ samuṭṭhāpessanti, parikappessantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Santhatādibhedehi bhinditvāti santhatādivisesanehi visesetvā, santhatādīhi catūhi yojetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“已铺展”这个说法,是用部分来指代整体,就像“布被烧了”这类说法一样。比如布只有一部分被烧了,人们也会说“布被烧了”;同样,在女人的大便道等通道中,只要某一条通道被铺展了,就说这个女人是“已铺展”。所以说“已铺展者,名为……”等等。如果是把布等东西不放进内部,而是放在外面绑住,就说是“缠绕”。同样,按照用部分指代整体的说法,比丘也被称为“已铺展”,所以说“已铺展者,名为……”等等。所谓“进入多少”,是指进入大约芝麻果那么大的程度。即使在眼睛等部位铺展,也各自按照相应的部位来判定,所以说“在构成土喇咤亚的部位就犯土喇咤亚,在构成恶作的部位就只犯恶作”。巴利
Santhatāyāti ekadese samudāyavohāro ‘‘paṭo daḍḍho’’tiādīsu viya. Tathā hi paṭassa ekadesepi daḍḍhe ‘‘paṭo daḍḍho’’ti voharanti , evaṃ itthiyā vaccamaggādīsu kismiñci magge santhate itthī ‘‘santhatā’’ti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘santhatā nāmā’’tiādi. Vatthādīni anto appavesetvā bahi ṭhapetvā bandhanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘paliveṭhetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekadese samudāyavohāravaseneva bhikkhupi ‘‘santhato’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘santhato nāmā’’tiādi. Yattake paviṭṭheti tilaphalamatte paviṭṭhe. Akkhiādimhi santhatepi yathāvatthukamevāti āha ‘‘thullaccayakkhette thullaccayaṃ, dukkaṭakkhette dukkaṭameva hotī’’ti.
触碰树桩犯恶作:把树桩送入女根内部,触碰平坦的或凸出的树桩,因为并没有进入,所以犯恶作。但如果稍微进入内部,只是用男根触碰那竖立的树桩,那就犯巴拉基格。它的底面,是指竹筒等物的内部底面。在《律藏·因缘》中说:“那时,有一位比丘去到墓地,看见一个断头,就把男根送入张开的嘴里。他心生悔疑……比丘不犯巴拉基格,犯恶作。”依照这段经文随顺而说“作虚空想而送入取出,犯恶作”(《巴拉基格》73)。外部树桩,是指已经送入的竹节等物在外面突出的树桩。以淫欲染心,在根所系、非根所系的相续中,无论在哪里有所动作,都不可能无犯,所以说“唯犯恶作”。因此,在《律藏·因缘》中,对于在骨头上有所动作的,说犯恶作。巴利
Khāṇuṃ ghaṭṭentassa dukkaṭanti itthinimittassa anto khāṇuṃ pavesetvā samatalaṃ atirittaṃ vā khāṇuṃ ghaṭṭentassa dukkaṭaṃ pavesābhāvato. Sace pana īsakaṃ anto pavisitvā ṭhitaṃ khāṇukameva aṅgajātena chupati, pārājikameva. Tassa talanti veḷunaḷādikassa antotalaṃ. Vinītavatthūsu ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sīvathikaṃ gantvā chinnasīsaṃ passitvā vaṭṭakate mukhe acchupantaṃ aṅgajātaṃ pavesesi. Tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosi…pe… anāpatti bhikkhu pārājikassa, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttattā tassa suttassa anulomato ‘‘ākāsagatameva katvā pavesetvā nīharati, dukkaṭa’’nti (pārā. 73) vuttaṃ. Bahiddhā khāṇuketi antopavesitaveṇupabbādikassa bahi nikkhantakhāṇuke. Methunarāgena indriyabaddhaānindriyabaddhasantānesu yattha katthaci upakkamantassa na sakkā anāpattiyā bhavitunti ‘‘dukkaṭamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Teneva vinītavatthumhi aṭṭhikesu upakkamantassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.
王敌等四类分别的讨论注释巴利
Rājapaccatthikādicatukkabhedakathāvaṇṇanā
65 65. 为了说明共通的含义,从论书的角度作出特别的判定,所以说“恶棍,就是沉溺于淫欲嬉戏的人”等等。现在为了显示从共通名称中也能获得义理,所以说“或者是好女色者、酒恶棍等”。心,就是心脏的肉。巴利
65. Sāmaññajotanāya pakaraṇato visesavinicchayoti āha ‘‘dhuttāti methunupasaṃhitakhiḍḍāpasutā’’tiādi. Idāni sāmaññatopi atthasambhavaṃ dassento ‘‘itthidhuttasurādhuttādayo vā’’ti āha. Hadayanti hadayamaṃsaṃ.
犯戒与不犯戒的分别注释巴利
Āpattānāpattivāravaṇṇanā
66 没有认罪这回事,因为根本无从问起。毕竟,一个被指控犯戒的人,不该被这样追问:“你是以什么心态犯戒的?是知道而犯,还是不知道而犯?”就在那个地方——也就是毗舍离的大林里。遍满全身——除了头发、体毛、牙齿、指甲这些没有肉的地方,以及僵硬干燥的皮肤之外,像油滴落在水面上一样,遍满身体其余所有部分而存在。身体颤抖等——“等”字包含了眼睛发黄等表现。住在胆囊中——依靠心脏和肺之间的肝脏肉而安住,住在像大瓠瓜一样的胆囊里。被激怒时——就是从胆囊中移动出来、流到外面。巴利
66.Paṭiññākaraṇaṃnatthīti pucchitabbābhāvato. Na hi dūsako ‘‘kena cittena vītikkamaṃ akāsi, jānitvā akāsi, udāhu ajānitvā’’ti evaṃ pucchāya arahati. Tatthevāti vesāliyaṃ mahāvane eva. Sabbaṅgagatanti ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca udakamiva telabindu avasesasabbasarīraṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ. Sarīrakampādīnīti ādi-saddena akkhīnaṃ pītavaṇṇādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Pittakosake ṭhitanti hadayapapphāsānaṃ antare yakanamaṃsaṃ nissāya patiṭṭhite mahākosātakīkosasadise pittakose ṭhitaṃ. Kupiteti pittakosato calitvā bahi nikkhante.
心已散乱,是指本性已经失常。被夜叉弄到发疯,是说:据说夜叉想要搅乱某个人的心时,就会化现出白脸、蓝肚子、鲜红的手脚、巨大的头、燃烧的眼睛这样恐怖的身体给他看,或者发出恐怖的声音,或者趁他正在说话时把手伸进他嘴里,揉捏他的心脏肌肉,于是这个众生就疯了,心念散乱。因此说“或示现恐怖的所缘”等等。其中,“恐怖的”是指仅仅让人看见就能使众生产生恐惧、惊悚、汗毛竖立的东西。“恒常发疯”是针对胆汁从胆囊里涌出到体外的情况而说的。然而,如果胆汁虽然搅动但仍留在胆囊内、没有流到体外,那么他只是间或恢复知觉,并非恒常发疯,应当如此理解。“知已”是指通过获得知觉而了知。“极度”是指超过常量的程度。巴利
Vissaṭṭhacittoti vissaṭṭhapakaticitto. Yakkhummattakoti yakkhā kira yassa cittaṃ khipitukāmā honti, tassa setamukhaṃ nīlodaraṃ surattahatthapādaṃ mahāsīsaṃ pajjalitanettaṃ bheravaṃ vā attabhāvaṃ nimminitvā dassenti, bheravaṃ vā saddaṃ sāventi, kathentasseva vā mukhena hatthaṃ pakkhipitvā hadayamaṃsaṃ maddanti, tena so satto ummattako hoti khittacitto. Tenevāha ‘‘bheravāni vā ārammaṇāni dassetvā’’tiādi. Tattha bheravānīti dassanamatteneva sattānaṃ bhayaṃ chambhitattaṃ lomahaṃsaṃ uppādetuṃ samatthāni. Niccameva ummattako hotīti yassa pittakosato pittaṃ calitvā bahi nikkhantaṃ hoti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yassa pana pittaṃ calitvā pittakoseyeva ṭhitaṃ hoti bahi anikkhantaṃ, so antarantarā saññaṃ paṭilabhati, na niccameva ummattako hotīti veditabbaṃ. Ñatvāti saññāpaṭilābhena jānitvā. Adhimattāyāti adhikappamāṇāya.
杂论的注释巴利
Pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā
“杂论”是指混合的论述方式。“生起”是指产生的因缘。“行为”等只是举例,也应该包括非行为等在内。关于“受”,这是伴随关系的具格用法,意思是“与受俱的善”等。以“总摄一切”的方式,是指总摄所有学处的方式。“六种学处生起”是指身、语、身语、身心、语心、身语心这六种犯戒的生起。犯戒本身是以学处的名义来说的,因为生起等是就犯戒而言,不是就学处本身而言。在这六种生起中,前三种是无心的,后三种是有心的。其中,犯戒由一种、两种、三种、四种或六种生起而生起,不存在五种生起的犯戒。其中,单一一种生起的犯戒,由第四、第五和第六种生起而生起,不由其他生起。两种生起的犯戒,由第一与第四、第二与第五、第三与第六、第四与第六、第五与第六这些生起而生起,不由其他生起。三种生起的犯戒,由前三种和后三种生起而生起,不由其他生起。四种生起的犯戒,由第一、第三、第四、第六以及第二、第三、第五、第六这些生起而生起,不由其他生起。六种生起的犯戒,则由全部六种生起而生起。巴利
Pakiṇṇakanti vomissakanayaṃ. Samuṭṭhānanti uppattikāraṇaṃ. Kiriyātiādi nidassanamattaṃ, akiriyādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Vedanāyāti sahayoge karaṇavacanaṃ, vedanāya saha kusalañcāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sabbasaṅgāhakavasenāti sabbesaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ saṅgāhakavasena. Cha sikkhāpadasamuṭṭhānānīti kāyo vācā kāyavācā kāyacittaṃ vācācittaṃ kāyavācācittanti evaṃ vuttāni cha āpattisamuṭṭhānāni. Āpattiyeva hi sikkhāpadasīsena vuttā. Samuṭṭhānādayo hi āpattiyā honti, na sikkhāpadassa, imesu pana chasu samuṭṭhānesu purimāni tīṇi acittakāni, pacchimāni sacittakāni. Tesu ekena vā dvīhi vā tīhi vā catūhi vā chahi vā samuṭṭhānehi āpattiyo samuṭṭhahanti, pañcasamuṭṭhānā āpatti nāma natthi. Tattha ekasamuṭṭhānā catutthena ca pañcamena ca chaṭṭhena ca samuṭṭhānena samuṭṭhāti, na aññena. Dvisamuṭṭhānā paṭhamacatutthehi ca dutiyapañcamehi ca tatiyachaṭṭhehi ca catutthachaṭṭhehi ca pañcamachaṭṭhehi ca samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, na aññehi. Tisamuṭṭhānā paṭhamehi ca tīhi, pacchimehi ca tīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, na aññehi. Catusamuṭṭhānā paṭhamatatiyacatutthachaṭṭhehi ca dutiyatatiyapañcamachaṭṭhehi ca samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, na aññehi. Chasamuṭṭhānā chahipi samuṭṭhāti.
所谓“有六种生起的学处”,这里也要知道:是以学处为名来说犯戒的。正因如此,下文才说:“这一切都适用于犯戒,但在所有注释书中,是以学处为名来做解说的。”
由身等六种门径生起,或者有六种生起,就叫“六种生起”。
“有四种生起”,是指身、身语、身心、身语心这四种,或者语、身语、语心、身语心这四种,是它的生起,所以叫“四种生起”。
“有三种生起”,是指身、语、身语这三种,或者身心、语心、身语心这三种,是它的生起,所以叫“三种生起”。
为了说明两种生起和一种生起,就按生起的类别来说“有咖提那生起”等等。
生起的类别共有十三种:初巴拉基格生起、不与取生起、媒嫁生起、呵责生起、咖提那生起、羊毛生起、随句法生起、旅途生起、贼众生起、说法生起、实语生起、举贼生起、未许生起。巴利
Sikkhāpadaṃ nāma atthi chasamuṭṭhānanti etthāpi sikkhāpadasīsena āpatti vuttāti veditabbā. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘sabbañcetaṃ āpattiyaṃ yujjati, sikkhāpadasīsena pana sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu desanā āruḷhā’’ti. Kāyādīhi chahi samuṭṭhānaṃ uppatti, cha vā samuṭṭhānāni etassāti chasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthi catusamuṭṭhānanti kāyo kāyavācā kāyacittaṃ kāyavācācittanti imāni cattāri, vācā kāyavācā vācācittaṃ kāyavācācittanti imāni vā cattāri samuṭṭhānāni etassāti catusamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthi tisamuṭṭhānanti kāyo vācā kāyavācāti imāni tīṇi, kāyacittaṃ vācācittaṃ kāyavācācittanti imāni vā tīṇi samuṭṭhānāni etassāti tisamuṭṭhānaṃ. Dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānañca samuṭṭhānasīsavasena dassento ‘‘atthi kathinasamuṭṭhāna’’ntiādimāha. Terasa hi samuṭṭhānasīsāni paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānaṃ bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānaṃ corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānaṃ ananuññātasamuṭṭhānanti.
这里,“有六种生起”这句话,说的是媒嫁的生起。“有四种生起”这句话,则涵盖了旅途的生起和未获允许的生起。凡是依第一、第三、第四、第六种生起而生起的,就是旅途生起;凡是依第二、第三、第五、第六种生起而生起的,就是未获允许的生起。“有三种生起”这句话,涵盖了不与取的生起和实语生起。凡是依后三种有心的生起而生起的,就是不与取生起;凡是依前三种无心的生起而生起的,就是实语生起。至于“有咖提那生起”等说法,则是以其余生起类别来统摄两种生起和一种生起的情况。具体来说:凡是依第三、第六种生起而生起的,称为咖提那生起;凡是依第一、第四种生起而生起的,是羊毛生起;凡是仅依第六种生起而生起的,是舍责生起,也叫呵责生起。在“等”字所包含的初巴拉基格生起、随句法生起、贼众生起、说法生起、举贼生起当中:凡是依身和心而生起的,是初巴拉基格生起;凡是依第二、第五种生起而生起的,是随句法生起;凡是依第四、第六种生起而生起的,是贼众生起;凡是仅依第五种生起而生起的,是说法生起;凡是依第五、第六种生起而生起的,应当知道是举贼生起。巴利
Tattha ‘‘atthi chasamuṭṭhāna’’nti iminā sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atthi catusamuṭṭhāna’’nti iminā pana addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ ananuññātasamuṭṭhānañca saṅgahitaṃ. Yañhi paṭhamatatiyacatutthachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pana dutiyatatiyapañcamachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ ananuññātasamuṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Atthi tisamuṭṭhāna’’nti iminā adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānañca saṅgahitaṃ. Yañhi sacittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pana acittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Atthi kathinasamuṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā pana avasesasamuṭṭhānasīsena dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā hi yaṃ tatiyachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ kathinasamuṭṭhānanti vuccati. Yaṃ paṭhamacatutthehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ chaṭṭheneva samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ, samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānantipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Ādi-saddasaṅgahitesu pana paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānapadasodhammatheyyasatthadhammadesanācorivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānesu yaṃ kāyacittato samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ dutiyapañcamehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ catutthachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pañcameneva samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pañcamachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānanti veditabbaṃ.
像这样,先以生起为纲,把一切学处显示为十三种;现在再按行为方式,把它们显示为五种,于是说“其中也有某些是从行为生起的”等等。这里说的“某些”,是以学处为纲而说犯戒。因此,凡是像掘地等那样,以身或语违犯时所生起的罪,就叫作从行为生起。凡是像第一迦絺那(衣)罪那样:不以身语去作应作之事的人所生起的罪,就叫作从不行为生起。凡是像从非亲戚比丘尼手中接受衣的罪那样:做与不做的人都可能生起的罪,就叫作从行为与不行为生起。凡是像接受金银的罪那样:有时对做的人、有时对没做的人所生起的罪,就叫作有时从行为、有时从不行为生起。凡是像建造小屋的罪那样:有时对做的人、有时对做的人和没做的人都可能生起的罪,就叫作有时从行为、有时从行为与不行为生起。巴利
Evaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsena sabbasikkhāpadāni terasadhā dassetvā idāni kiriyāvasena pañcadhā dassento ‘‘tatrāpi kiñci kiriyato samuṭṭhātī’’tiādimāha. Tattha kiñcīti sikkhāpadasīsena āpattiṃ vadati. Tasmā yā kāyena vā vācāya vā pathavīkhaṇanādīsu viya vītikkamaṃ karontassa hoti, ayaṃ kiriyato samuṭṭhāti nāma. Yā kāyavācāya kattabbaṃ akarontassa hoti paṭhamakathināpatti viya, ayaṃ akiriyato samuṭṭhāti nāma. Yā karontassa ca akarontassa ca hoti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato cīvarapaṭiggahaṇāpatti viya, ayaṃ kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhāti nāma. Yā siyā karontassa ca siyā akarontassa ca hoti rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇāpatti viya, ayaṃ siyā kiriyato siyā akiriyato samuṭṭhāti nāma. Yā siyā karontassa ca siyā karontassa ca akarontassa ca hoti kuṭikārāpatti viya, ayaṃ siyā kiriyato siyā kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhāti nāma.
现在,为了把一切学处按想分成两种来显示,说了“在那里也有想解脱”等话。“想解脱”应当理解为中略复合词:因为没有想而解脱,所以叫想解脱。因为,当人由于没有违犯想而得以解脱时,这就叫作想解脱。它确实获得心支,因为它是从身、心等有心生起的状态中生起的。用“确实获得”这个强调词,是在说明并非不获得。因此,凡是获得心支的,以及不获得心支的,不获得心支者被称为“其他”,因为“其他”这个词的所指对象,正是前面所说内容的相反方面。巴利
Idāni sabbasikkhāpadāni saññāvasena dvidhā katvā dassento ‘‘tatrāpi atthi saññāvimokkha’’ntiādimāha. Saññāya abhāvena vimokkho assāti saññāvimokkhanti majjhepadalopasamāso daṭṭhabbo. Yato hi vītikkamasaññāabhāvena muccati, idaṃ saññāvimokkhanti vuccati. Cittaṅgaṃ labhatiyevāti kāyacittādisacittakasamuṭṭhāneheva samuṭṭhahanato . ‘‘Labhatiyevā’’ti avadhāraṇena no na labhatīti dasseti. Tasmā yaṃ cittaṅgaṃ labhati, na labhati ca, taṃ ‘‘itara’’nti vuttaṃ itara-saddassa vuttapaṭiyogavisayattā.
接着,为了按心把一切学处分成两类来显示,所以说“又有有心的”等等。所谓“与心一起违犯”,就是指只以有心的生起来违犯,不是以无心的生起来违犯。“没有心也”这个“也”字,是在说明与心一起也能违犯。因为,如果有时以无心的生起而生起,有时以有心的生起而生起,那就称为无心的。在这里,应当知道:想二法是从不犯的角度说的,有心二法是从犯的角度说的,这就是它们之间的差别。巴利
Puna sabbasikkhāpadāni cittavasena dvidhā dassento ‘‘puna atthi sacittaka’’ntiādimāha. Yaṃ saheva cittena āpajjatīti yaṃ sacittakeneva samuṭṭhānena āpajjati, no acittakena. Vināpīti api-saddena sahāpi cittena āpajjatīti dasseti. Yañhi kadāci acittakena, kadāci sacittakena samuṭṭhānena samuṭṭhāti, taṃ acittakanti vuccati. Ettha ca saññādukaṃ anāpattimukhena, sacittakadukaṃ āpattimukhena vuttanti idametesaṃ nānākaraṇanti veditabbaṃ.
世间罪的二法,因为前面已经说过它的特征,所以这里不再分开解释。现在,为了说明一切学处按业来分有两种,按善等和按受来分各有三种,所以说了“依业、善、受”等话。在这里,虽然按照注释书里来的方式,业二法说的是身业和语业,但只显示三法也是合适的。因为一切学处,有的要在身门犯,有的要在语门犯,有的要在身语两门犯,所以有三种。正因为这样,《本母注释》里说:“一切学处,依身业、语业以及这两者而有三种。其中,应在身门犯的,称为身业;应在语门犯的,称为语业;应在两处犯的,称为身业与语业。”也正是因此,在“不与取学处”等里面,依这两者而显示为身业与语业。巴利
Lokavajjadukassa heṭṭhā vuttalakkhaṇattā taṃ avibhajitvā idāni sabbasikkhāpadāni kammavasena duvidhāni, kusalādivasena vedanāvasena ca tividhāni hontīti dassento ‘‘kammakusalavedanāvasenā’’tiādimāha. Ettha pana kiñcāpi aṭṭhakathāsu āgatanayena kāyakammaṃ vacīkammanti kammavasena dukaṃ vuttaṃ, tikameva pana dassetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sabbameva hi sikkhāpadaṃ kāyadvāre āpajjitabbato vacīdvāre āpajjitabbato kāyavacīdvāre āpajjitabbato ca tividhaṃ hoti. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbāva kāyakammavacīkammatadubhayavasena tividhā honti. Tattha kāyadvāre āpajjitabbā kāyakammanti vuccati, vacīdvāre āpajjitabbā vacīkammanti vuccati, ubhayattha āpajjitabbā kāyakammavacīkamma’’nti. Tatoyeva ca adinnādānasikkhāpadādīsu kāyakammavacīkammanti tadubhayavasena dassitaṃ.
不过,用“有学处是善的”这类说法,是在说明:犯戒的人,可能是带着善心犯,也可能是带着不善心犯,也可能是带着无记心犯;但并不是说存在善的罪。因为确实不存在所谓善的罪,正如论中说:“罪诤可能是善,可能是不善,可能是无记,没有罪诤是善。”十种欲界唯作心,就是与生笑心、威仪路心、发语表业心一起的八种大唯作心。两种神通心能导致犯戒,这要在不了解施设的人施展神通变化等情况下理解。所谓“以善心而犯”,就是指以学处为首所摄的罪,具善心的人去犯。然而通过这句话,当罪被称为“那是善的”时,是在显示善性只是间接的说法,并不是从究竟意义上说的。因为以善心犯戒的人,犯的是称为色蕴的无记罪,它以有表或无表的方式,表现为违犯学处的行为。以其他心而犯其他罪,就是以不善、无记心所犯的,那是另一种,即不善和无记。这也是为了说明:犯戒的人可能带着不善心犯,也可能带着善心、无记心犯。即便如此,应当知道,在一切学处中,有些只是不善心,有些依善与无记而有两种心,有些依全部三种心而有三种心,能得到的差别就只有这些,没有别的。巴利
Atthi pana sikkhāpadaṃ kusalantiādinā āpattiṃ āpajjanto kusalacittasamaṅgī vā āpajjati akusalacittasamaṅgī vā abyākatacittasamaṅgī vāti dasseti, na pana kusalāpi āpatti atthīti. Na hi kusalā āpatti nāma atthi ‘‘āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ, natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti (pari. 303) vacanato. Dasa kāmāvacarakiriyacittānīti hasituppādavoṭṭhabbanehi saddhiṃ aṭṭha mahākiriyacittāni. Dvinnaṃ abhiññācittānaṃ āpattisamuṭṭhāpakattaṃ paññattiṃ ajānantassa iddhivikubbanādīsu daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ kusalacittena āpajjatīti yaṃ sikkhāpadasīsena gahitaṃ āpattiṃ kusalacittasamaṅgī āpajjati. Iminā pana vacanena taṃ kusalanti āpattiyā vuccamāno kusalabhāvo pariyāyatova, na paramatthatoti dasseti. Kusalacittena hi āpattiṃ āpajjanto saviññattikaṃ aviññattikaṃ vā sikkhāpadavītikkamākārappavattaṃ rūpakkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ abyākatāpattiṃ āpajjati. Itarehi itaranti itarehi akusalābyākatacittehi yaṃ āpajjati, taṃ itaraṃ, akusalaṃ abyākatañcāti attho. Idañca āpattiṃ āpajjanto akusalacittasamaṅgī vā āpajjati kusalābyākatacittasamaṅgī vāti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi sabbasikkhāpadesu kiñci akusalacittameva kiñci kusalābyākatavasena dvicittaṃ, kiñci sabbesaṃ vasena ticittanti ayameva pabhedo labbhati, na aññoti veditabbaṃ.
三受、二受、一受,这个说法也只是依据前面所说的受来安立的,不是依别的什么,应当这样理解。对于躺下后进入灭尽定的人,因为与他同住一处(同宿)的缘故,只有当时那种状态下生起的色蕴构成犯戒,所以也可以说“有无受”。但要知道,这是不把“有时、偶尔、随意就可能发生”的情况算进去,只是按大多数情况来说的。巴利
Tivedanaṃ dvivedanaṃ ekavedananti idañca yathāvuttavedanāvaseneva labbhati, nāññathāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nipajjitvā nirodhaṃ samāpannassa sahaseyyavasena tadākārappavattarūpakkhandhasseva āpattibhāvato ‘‘atthi avedana’’ntipi vattabbametaṃ, kadāci karahaci yadicchakaṃ sambhavatīti aggahetvā yebhuyyavasena labbhamānaṃyeva gahetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
现在,为了在这条正在注释的学处里,把前面所说的起因等内容分别加以说明,所以说了“知道这个杂项之后”等话。其中,“知道之后”应与“应当知道”这一表示后来动作的说法联系起来理解。“由行为所起”这一说法,主要是就多数情况而说的,因为当别人主动来侵犯时,接受的人属于非行为所起。“在意门中并没有犯戒”这句话,也是就多数情况而说的。不过,这里的心只是构成条件而已,因为第一条巴拉基格是从身和心生起的,所以这里的心只是犯戒的构成条件。不能依它而成立业性,意思是:由于它是依能使人知道的身门活动而生起,所以不能依这颗心而成立这条学处的意业性。因为这条学处是按前面所说的方式制定的,所以说“这一切在犯戒中都能成立”。因为前面所说的起因等内容,在制定学处时并不都能成立。巴利
Idāni yathāvuttasamuṭṭhānādīni imasmiṃ saṃvaṇṇiyamānasikkhāpade vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘imaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ viditvā’’tiādimāha. Tattha viditvāti imassa ‘‘veditabba’’nti iminā aparakālakiriyāvacanena sambandho veditabbo. Kiriyasamuṭṭhānanti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ parūpakkame sati sādiyantassa akiriyasamuṭṭhānabhāvato. ‘‘Manodvāre āpatti nāma natthīti idampi bāhullavaseneva vutta’’nti vadanti. Cittaṃ panettha aṅgamattaṃ hotīti paṭhamapārājikaṃ kāyacittato samuṭṭhātīti cittamettha āpattiyā aṅgameva hoti. Na tassa vasena kammabhāvo labbhatīti viññattijanakavasena kāyadvāre pavattattā tassa cittassa vasena imassa sikkhāpadassa manokammabhāvo na labbhatīti attho. Sikkhāpadassa heṭṭhā vuttanayena paññattibhāvato ‘‘sabbañcetaṃ āpattiyaṃ yujjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi yathāvuttasamuṭṭhānādi paññattiyaṃ yujjati.
已决断事例的注释巴利
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
他问“这是什么”,是想让人讲解。已经被判定、已经裁决过的事例,就叫“已裁决事例”。因为那些事例确实是世尊亲自裁决的,比如“比丘,你犯了巴拉基格罪。比丘,这不构成巴拉基格罪,而是桑喀地谢思罪。比丘,对不乐着的人,不构成罪”等等。所以说“由世尊亲自裁决”。“摄颂”就是总括偈,“结集偈”的意思。“事例偈”是指“那时,有一位比丘……”这类说明缘起事例的已裁决事例巴利经文本身,因为它把各个事例编排在一起,所以叫“事例偈”,并不是按韵律规则来说的。或者,这里也可以理解为“诸偈的事例,就是事例偈”。这里“此处”,是指在已裁决事例中。“第二等”,是指第二巴拉基格等。“第二等应当被裁决”,应当这样连接理解。“工匠们”,是指画师等工匠。画师等人反复观看之后,学习并制作绘画等作品,那叫作“被覆藏的形象”。巴利
Idaṃ kinti kathetukamyatāya pucchati. Vinītāni vinicchitāni vatthūni vinītavatthūni. Tāni hi ‘‘āpattiṃ tvaṃ bhikkhu āpanno pārājikaṃ. Anāpatti bhikkhu pārājikassa, āpatti saṅghādisesassa. Anāpatti bhikkhu asādiyantassā’’tiādinā bhagavatāyeva vinicchitāni . Tenāha ‘‘bhagavatā sayaṃ vinicchitāna’’nti. Uddānagāthāti uddesagāthā, saṅgahagāthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vatthugāthāti ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhū’’tiādikā nidānavatthudīpikā vinītavatthupāḷiyeva tesaṃ tesaṃ vatthūnaṃ ganthanato ‘‘vatthugāthā’’ti vuttā, na chandovicitilakkhaṇena. Gāthānaṃ vatthu vatthugāthāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Etthāti vinītavatthūsu. Dutiyādīnanti dutiyapārājikādīnaṃ. Dutiyādīni vinicchinitabbānīti yojetabbaṃ. Sippikānanti cittakārādisippikānaṃ. Yaṃ passitvā passitvā cittakārādayo cittakammādīni uggaṇhantā karonti, taṃ ‘‘paṭicchannakarūpa’’nti vuccati.
67 前两个事例,就是猕猴事例和瓦吉之子事例。这两个事例虽然是在还没有制定戒律的时候出现的,但因为它们是世尊亲自裁决的事例,所以就像在未制戒期间出现的染衣匠等事例被归入不与取等事例一样,它们也被重新收入已裁决事例中。如果这样理解,那么“他产生了疑惑”这句话就矛盾了,因为在未制戒期间,是别的比丘看见之后去指责那位比丘的。确实如此,但应该这样理解:那些比丘按照未制戒期间所说的方式指责之后,当说出“贤友,难道不是那样吗”的时候,他才产生了疑惑。而“他向世尊报告了此事”也应该这样理解:当那些比丘按照未制戒期间所说的方式向世尊报告后,世尊问:“比丘,听说你真的和母猴行了淫欲法吗?”他回答:“是的,世尊。”这样就是向世尊报告了此事。巴利
67.Purimāni dve vatthūnīti makkaṭivatthuṃ vajjiputtakavatthuñca. Tāni pana kiñcāpi anupaññattiyaṃ āgatāneva, tathāpi bhagavatā sayaṃ vinicchitavatthubhāvato adinnādānādīsu anupaññattiyaṃ āgatāni rajakādivatthūni viya puna vinītavatthūsu pakkhittāni. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosī’’ti idaṃ virujjheyya, anupaññattiyañhi aññe bhikkhū disvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ codesunti? Saccametaṃ, tehi pana bhikkhūhi anupaññattiyaṃ vuttanayena codetvā ‘‘nanu, āvuso, tatheva taṃ hotī’’ti vutte tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosīti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesī’’ti idañca tehi bhikkhūhi anupaññattiyaṃ vuttanayena bhagavato ārocite ‘‘saccaṃ kira tvaṃ bhikkhu makkaṭiyā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevī’’ti bhagavatā puṭṭho samāno ‘‘saccaṃ bhagavā’’ti bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesīti gahetabbaṃ.
关于瓦吉之子事例:有些人没有舍弃学处,也没有表明自己软弱,就行淫欲之事,然后还俗;后来他们又去阿难尊者那里,请求再次出家并受达上。针对这些人,世尊在未制戒的情况下这样说:“阿难,如来绝不可能、绝不会有这样的事:为了跋耆人或瓦吉之子的缘故,废除已为弟子们制定的巴拉基格学处。”另有一些人没有还俗,仍保持比丘身份,后来生起疑惑,就把这件事报告了世尊。针对这些人,这里才说:“比丘们,你们犯了巴拉基格罪。”可是有些人不懂这个意思,就说:“在已决断事例中出现的,是另一个猕猴事例和另一个瓦吉之子事例。”巴利
Vajjiputtakavatthumhi pana sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā vibbhamitvā ye ānandattheraṃ upasaṅkamitvā puna pabbajjaṃ upasampadañca yāciṃsu, te sandhāya ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, ānanda, anavakāso, yaṃ tathāgato vajjīnaṃ vā vajjiputtakānaṃ vā kāraṇā sāvakānaṃ pārājikaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ samūhaneyyā’’tiādi anupaññattiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Ye pana avibbhamitvā saliṅge ṭhitāyeva uppannakukkuccā bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ, te sandhāya ‘‘āpattiṃ tumhe, bhikkhave, āpannā pārājika’’nti idha vuttaṃ. Keci pana imaṃ adhippāyaṃ ajānantāva ‘‘aññameva makkaṭivatthu vajjiputtakavatthu ca vinītavatthūsu āgata’’nti vadanti.
“用茅草绑缚后”,就是用茅草绑缚起来。“以毛发”,是指用人的毛发。“那种贪染”,是指身触的贪染。“知道后”,是指自己知道后。如果这件事是由身触贪染所做的,为什么不在身触贪染学处的已决断事例中宣说,却要在这里说呢?回答说:虽然这件事是由身触贪染所做的,但那位比丘因为在巴拉基格的范围内作了努力,所以对巴拉基格产生了疑惑:“我是不是犯了巴拉基格?”因此在这里宣说。也正因如此,才说:“比丘无犯巴拉基格,犯桑喀地谢思。”巴利
Kuse ganthetvāti kusatiṇāni ganthetvā. Kesehīti manussakesehi. Taṃ rāganti kāyasaṃsaggarāgaṃ. Ñatvāti sayameva jānitvā. Yadi kāyasaṃsaggarāgena kataṃ, kāyasaṃsaggarāgasikkhāpadassa vinītavatthūsu avatvā idha kasmā vuttanti? Vuccate – kiñcāpi taṃ kāyasaṃsaggarāgena kataṃ, tassa pana bhikkhuno pārājikakkhette katupakkamattā ‘‘pārājikaṃ nu kho ahaṃ āpanno’’ti pārājikavisayaṃ kukkuccaṃ ahosīti idha vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu pārājikassa, āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti.
68 “极为好看”,是因为即使看上一整天也看不厌,所以极其值得一看。“以色相与身形之美”:这里“身形之美”说的是美好的状态;色相的美就是“色相与身形之美”,意思是以这种色相与身形之美,也就是色相的圆满。不过古德说“身形”指的是身体,“色相”就只是色相。按他们的看法,色相和身形合起来叫“色相与身形”,这两者的状态就是“色相与身形之美”,所以“以色相与身形之美”的意思是以清净的色相和身体形态的圆满。或者,“色相与身形”可以理解为“具有色相的身形”,这是省略后分、保留前分的依主释,它的状态就是“色相与身形之美”,以这种色相与身形之美,意思就是具有色相的身体状态。“他侵犯了”,意思是“他压倒了”。那么,怎么是在不被接受的情况下坐下呢?回答说:“以非正法的意图……像木桩一样”。巴利
68.Atidassanīyāti divasampi passantānaṃ atittikaraṇato ativiya dassanayoggā. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti ettha pokkharatā vuccati sundarabhāvo, vaṇṇassa pokkharatā vaṇṇapokkharatā, tāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya, vaṇṇasampattiyāti attho. Porāṇā pana pokkharanti sarīraṃ vadanti, vaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇameva. Tesaṃ matena vaṇṇañca pokkharañca vaṇṇapokkharāni, tesaṃ bhāvo vaṇṇapokkharatā, tasmā vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti parisuddhena vaṇṇena ceva sarīrasaṇṭhānasampattiyā cāti attho. Atha vā vaṇṇasampannaṃ pokkharaṃ vaṇṇapokkharanti uttarapadalopo pubbapadassa daṭṭhabbo, tassa bhāvo vaṇṇapokkharatā, tāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya, vaṇṇasampannasarīratāyāti attho. Padhaṃsesīti abhibhavīti attho. Kathaṃ pana asādiyantī nisīdīti āha – ‘‘asaddhammādhippāyena…pe… khāṇukā viyā’’ti.
不沾染,就是不附着。于诸欲中,是指在所缘欲和烦恼欲这两种欲中。这里说的是:就像荷叶上的水珠停不住,又像针尖上的芥子立不住,同样地,一个人内心对两种欲都不沾染,欲就不会停著在他身上,我称这样的人为婆罗门。巴利
Nalimpatīti na allīyati. Kāmesūti vatthukāmakilesakāmesu. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā paduminipaṇṇe udakabindu na saṇṭhāti, yathā ca sūcimukhe sāsapo na santiṭṭhati, evameva yo abbhantare duvidhenapi kāmena na limpati, tasmiṃ kāmo na saṇṭhāti, tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti.
69 男性特征消失、女性特征生起,应当通过果的消失与生起来理解,这也说明了因的消失与生起。因为当男性根坏灭时,男性特征就消失;当女性根生起时,女性特征就显现。正如《双论·根双论》中所说:“对女性根生起的人,男性根也生起吗?不是。或者,对男性根生起的人,女性根也生起吗?不是。”因为两种根不可能在同一相续中同时生起,所以在女性根显现的那一刹那之前,从第十七心识刹那开始,男性根就不再生起。在那之前已生起的男性根,连同俱生色法一起逐渐灭尽之后,女性根才在该相续中生起。此后,当以男性特征形态运转的业生色以及其他色法持续一段时间后灭尽,而以女性特征形态运转的四因色相续生起时,就说男性特征消失、女性特征显现。女性出现男性相时,也应当以同样的方式理解。巴利
69.Purisasaṇṭhānaṃ antarahitaṃ, itthisaṇṭhānaṃ uppannanti phalassa vināsuppādadassanena kāraṇassapi vināsuppādā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purisindriye hi naṭṭhe purisasaṇṭhānaṃ antaradhāyati, itthindriye samuppanne itthisaṇṭhānaṃ pātubhavati. Tathā hi ‘‘yassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa purisindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No. Yassa vā pana purisindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No’’ti yamakapakaraṇe (yama. 3. indriyayamaka.188) vuttattā indriyadvayassa ekasmiṃ santāne sahapavattiyā asambhavato yasmiṃ khaṇe itthindriyaṃ pātubhavati, tato pubbe sattarasamacittato paṭṭhāya purisindriyaṃ nuppajjati. Tato pubbe uppannesu ca purisindriyesu sahajarūpehi saddhiṃ kamena niruddhesu tasmiṃ santāne itthindriyaṃ uppajjati. Tato purisasaṇṭhānākārena pavattesu kammajarūpesu sesarūpesu ca kañci kālaṃ pavattitvā niruddhesu itthisaṇṭhānākārena ca catujarūpasantatiyā pavattāya purisasaṇṭhānaṃ antarahitaṃ, itthisaṇṭhānaṃ pātubhūtanti vuccati. Itthiyā purisaliṅgapātubhāvepi ayameva nayo veditabbo.
应当知道:说“男性相是殊胜的,女性相是低劣的”,就是借此说明男性根是殊胜的,女性根是低劣的。因为如果没有根的殊胜与低劣,那么依于根而有的性相的殊胜与低劣就不可能成立。同样,“男性相被强有力的不善业消灭”等说法,也应当理解为是在说明根的没有生起。因为当根被灭去或生起时,依于该根而有的性相也会随之消失或建立。那么,这里怎么理解“男性相被强有力的不善业消灭,女性相被微弱的善业建立”呢?回答是:在结生的时候,一个能生起男性根、能力尚未被破坏的强有力善业,会在整个寿命期间一直生起男性根。然而在生命中途,如果因为某种已成熟的因缘,比如邪淫等强有力的不善业,使这个结生善业的能力受到破坏而变弱,它就不再能生起男性根,而是按照自己剩余的能力,在转起阶段生起女性根。如果在结生那一刻,能生起男性根的能力就已经被某种已成熟的因缘,比如邪淫等强有力的不善业所破坏,那么这个已经变弱的善业就不会在结生时生起男性根,而是直接在结生时就生起女性根。因此说“男性相被强有力的不善业消灭,女性相被微弱的善业建立”。巴利
Purisaliṅgaṃ uttamaṃ, itthiliṅgaṃ hīnanti iminā ca purisindriyassa uttamabhāvo, itthindriyassa ca hīnabhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi indriyassa hīnukkaṭṭhabhāvaṃ vinā tannissayassa liṅgassa hīnukkaṭṭhatā sambhavati. Purisaliṅgaṃ balavaakusalena antaradhāyatītiādināpi indriyasseva vināsuppādā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Indriye hi vinaṭṭhe uppanne ca tannissayassa liṅgassapi antaradhānaṃ patiṭṭhānañca sambhavati. Kathaṃ panettha purisaliṅgaṃ balavaakausalena antaradhāyati, itthiliṅgaṃ dubbalakusalena patiṭṭhātīti? Vuccate – paṭisandhiyaṃ tāva purisindriyuppādakaṃ anupahatasāmatthiyaṃ balavakusalakammaṃ yāvatāyukaṃ purisindriyameva uppādeti, antarā pana kenaci laddhapaccayena pāradārikattādinā balavaakusalakammena upahatasāmatthiyaṃ tadeva paṭisandhidāyakaṃ kusalakammaṃ dubbalībhūtaṃ purisindriyaṃ anuppādetvā attano sāmatthiyānurūpaṃ itthindriyaṃ pavatte uppādeti. Yadā pana paṭisandhidānakāleyeva kenaci laddhapaccayena pāradārikattādinā balavaakusalakammena purisindriyuppādanasāmatthiyaṃ upahataṃ hoti, tadā dubbalībhūtaṃ kusalakammaṃ purisindriyaṃ anuppādetvā paṭisandhiyaṃyeva itthindriyaṃ uppādeti. Tasmā ‘‘purisaliṅgaṃ balavaakusalena antaradhāyati, itthiliṅgaṃ dubbalakusalena patiṭṭhātī’’ti vuccati.
因为邪淫等强有力的不善业会障碍男性根的生起,当这种不善业变弱时,女性相就消失了,所以说“女性相因弱力不善业而消失”。具体来说,在结生时,由于被邪淫等强有力的不善业所阻碍,那个能生起女性根的弱力善业没有能力生起男性根。到了生命运转期间,如果因为依止梵行、远离邪行,或者因为希望成为男性而造作了累积的强力善业,使它获得了能力,能够生起男性根,这时它就不再产生女性根,而是按照自身的能力生起男性根。就在这个时候,因为障碍男性根生起的强力不善业变弱了,那个女性根就消失了,所以说“女性相因弱力不善业而消失”。同样,按照上面所说的方式,由于强力善业生起了男性根,所以说“男性相因强力善业而建立”。对于先前是女性的人,在结生时就生起男性根的情况,也应当按同样的道理来理解。“两者都因不善业而消失,因善业而获得”,这是就善趣来说的;但在恶趣中,两者的生起和灭去都只是由不善业造成的,应当这样理解。巴利
Dubbalaakusalena antaradhāyatīti pāradārikattādibalavaakusalakammassa purisindriyuppādanavibandhakassa dubbalabhāve sati antaradhāyantaṃ itthiliṅgaṃ dubbalaakusalena antaradhāyatīti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi pāradārikattādinā balavaakusalakammena bāhitattā purisindriyuppādane asamatthaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ itthiyā itthindriyuppādakaṃ dubbalakusalakammaṃ yadā pavattiyaṃ brahmacariyavāsamicchācārapaṭivirativasena purisattapatthanāvasena vā katupacitabalavakusalakammena āhitasāmatthiyaṃ purisindriyuppādane samatthaṃ itthindriyaṃ anuppādetvā attano sāmatthiyānurūpaṃ purisindriyaṃ uppādeti, tadā purisindriyuppādanavibandhakassa balavaakusalakammassa dubbalabhāve sati taṃ itthindriyaṃ antarahitanti ‘‘itthiliṅgaṃ antaradhāyantaṃ dubbalaakusalena antaradhāyatī’’ti vuccati. Yathāvuttanayeneva balavatā kusalakammena purisindriyassa uppāditattā ‘‘purisaliṅgaṃ balavakusalena patiṭṭhātī’’ti vuccati. Pubbe itthibhūtassa paṭisandhiyaṃ purisindriyuppādepi ayaṃ nayo veditabbo. Ubhayampi akusalena antaradhāyati, kusalena paṭilabbhatīti idaṃ sugatibhavaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, duggatiyaṃ pana ubhinnaṃ uppatti vināso ca akusalakammenevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“两者都犯同宿罪”这句话,是因为律中这样说:“若比丘与女人同宿,犯巴吉帝亚;若比丘尼与男人同宿,犯巴吉帝亚。”所以两者都因同宿而犯巴吉帝亚罪。“苦”是指由于具备心的苦受而称为苦。“忧恼”是指因嗔恚而心败坏,或因被忧受压倒而心扭曲。说了“应当安慰”之后,为了说明安慰的方法,便说“好了,不要忧虑”等话。“无遮”就是没有被阻挡。“法”是指教法、行道、通达这三种正法。“天与道”就是天之道,或者说天的道就是天之道,也就是能成就投生天界的修行。“与比丘尼相约同行于道路时,应避免犯戒”,为了说明这一点,所以说“除了相约之外”。如果只是说“我们去某个地方”,然后说“来吧,一起走”等等,而没有事先约定,就没有犯戒。巴利
Ubhinnampisahaseyyāpatti hotīti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena sahaseyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ. Yā pana bhikkhunī purisena sahaseyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiya’’nti vuttattā ubhinnampi sahaseyyavasena pācittiyāpatti hoti. Dukkhīti cetodukkhasamaṅgitāya dukkhī. Dummanoti dosena duṭṭhamano, virūpamano vā domanassābhibhūtatāya. ‘‘Samassāsetabbo’’ti vatvā samassāsetabbavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘hotu mā cintayitthā’’tiādimāha. Anāvaṭoti avārito. Dhammoti pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhasaṅkhāto tividhopi saddhammo. Saggo ca maggo ca saggamaggo, saggassa vā maggo saggamaggo, saggūpapattisādhikā paṭipatti. Bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya addhānagamane āpatti pariharitabbāti dassento ‘‘saṃvidahanaṃ parimocetvā’’ti āha. ‘‘Mayaṃ asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ gacchāmā’’ti vatvā ‘‘ehi saddhiṃ gamissāmā’’tiādinā asaṃvidahitattā anāpatti.
村外,是指离开自己居住的村子之外。上面这些话,是把村间、河对岸、夜间、别离、僧团减员等不犯戒的情形,与“第二比丘尼已经离开”等(《巴吉帝亚》693)所说的不犯戒标准相对照而言的。能令欢喜者,是指有能力使人心欢喜的人。令她们生气,是指舍弃了她们。有惭耻者……可得:这是就摄受而说的,意思是“如果没有摄受,可能会生厌离心而还俗”。无惭耻者……可得:这是就因无惭耻而亲近非己方的人而说的。非亲族……可行:注释书中说,这是把这一点作为她独有的开许而允许的。即使在比丘身份时,是指在身为比丘的时期。僧众中的近侍者,是指成为戒师与教授师而护持僧众的人。应于他人处求取依止:是指在其门下受达上的弟子,应到其他阿阇梨处求取依止。依彼而住者,是就弟子而言。应求取依止师:为受达上而应求取依止师,即应于他人处受达上。巴利
Bahigāmeti attano vasanagāmato bahi. Gāmantaranadīpārarattivippavāsagaṇaohīyanāpattīhi anāpattīti ‘‘dutiyikā bhikkhunī pakkantā vā hotī’’tiādinā (pāci. 693) vuttaanāpattilakkhaṇehi saṃsandanato vuttaṃ. Ārādhikāti cittārādhane samatthā. Tā kopetvāti tā pariccajitvā. Lajjiniyo…pe… labbhatīti ‘‘saṅgahe asati ukkaṇṭhitvā vibbhameyyāpī’’ti saṅgahavaseneva vuttaṃ. Alajjiniyo…pe… labbhatīti alajjibhāvato asantapakkhaṃ bhajantīti vuttaṃ. Aññātikā…pe… vaṭṭatīti idaṃ pana imissā āveṇikaṃ katvā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ anuññātanti vadanti. Bhikkhubhāvepīti bhikkhukālepi. Parisāvacaroti upajjhāyo ca ācariyo ca hutvā parisupaṭṭhāko. Aññassa santike nissayo gahetabboti tassa santike upasampannehi saddhivihārikehi aññassa ācariyassa santike nissayo gahetabbo. Taṃ nissāya vasantehipīti antevāsike sandhāya vadati. Upajjhā gahetabbāti upasampadatthaṃ upajjhā gahetabbā, aññassa santike upasampajjitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“律仪业”是就代持而说的。“应重做”指应重新代持。“再次接受后,七日内可用”是为了说明:按照(《小品》421)所说“诸比丘,我允许比丘尼的储存物由比丘们接受后来受用,比丘们的储存物由比丘尼们接受后来受用”,再次接受后,即使当天含有食物的物品也可受用。“第七日”是为了说明:即使没有犯尼萨耆亚罪,也可以再次在七日内受用。然而,由于比丘尼的尼萨耆亚物对比丘可用,比丘的尼萨耆亚物对比丘尼可用,所以即使到了第八日,如果发生性别转变,不必舍弃即可在七日内受用;这是诸师所说。“本性者守护彼”意思是:未转变性别者因未失去接受而守护,因未分离所以未失去接受,这就是意旨所在。“自己取后放置”指接受后自己放置。“受用者犯戒”指:如果发生性别转变,就会失去接受,再次接受后受用者犯戒。巴利
Vinayakammanti vikappanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Puna kātabbanti puna vikappetabbaṃ. Puna paṭiggahetvā sattāhaṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, bhikkhunīnaṃ sannidhi bhikkhūhi, bhikkhūnaṃ sannidhi bhikkhunīhi paṭiggāhāpetvā paribhuñjitu’’nti (cūḷava. 421) vacanato puna paṭiggahitaṃ tadahu sāmisampi vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Sattame divaseti idaṃ tañca nissaggiyaṃ anāpajjitvāva punapi sattāhaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana bhikkhuniyā nissaggiyaṃ bhikkhussa vaṭṭati, bhikkhussa nissaggiyaṃ bhikkhuniyā vaṭṭati, tasmā aṭṭhamepi divase liṅgaparivatte sati anissajjitvāva antosattāhe paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Taṃ pakatatto rakkhatīti aparivattaliṅgo taṃ paṭiggahaṇavijahanato rakkhati, avibhattatāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahatīti adhippāyo. Sāmaṃ gahetvāna nikkhipeyyāti paṭiggahetvā sayaṃ nikkhipeyya. Paribhuñjantassaāpattīti liṅgaparivatte sati paṭiggahaṇavijahanato puna paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa āpatti.
“因还俗”是指犯巴拉基格的人成为在家者。这个说法在三部《甘提帕达》里都讲过,讲得很好。因为一个没有犯巴拉基格的人,只要没有舍弃学处,仅仅取在家相,并不会失去比丘身份。犯了巴拉基格的人如果还保持比丘相,只要他还没有承认,他的比丘身份就仍然存在,不算作未受具足戒的人。也正因如此,他即使接受共住,也不成为贼住者;不会产生同宿等罪;但在辱骂语上会产生巴吉帝亚罪。正因为这样,才说:“如果有人不清净,犯了某一条巴拉基格法,若一个持清净见的人让他开许之后,以辱骂的意图对他说,就犯辱骂语巴吉帝亚”(《巴拉基格》389)。如果没有比丘身份,那就应该是恶作;如果有比丘身份,那么说已接受的接受消失了就不合理。因此,由于比丘身份完全不存在,犯了巴拉基格之后取在家相而成为在家者,在这里才被理解为“还俗”,而不是指一个本来正常的比丘仅仅取在家相。也正因如此,有些地方因为还俗与舍戒性质相同,就不把还俗单独列出来。因为当说到以舍戒而失去接受时,犯巴拉基格的人由于成为在家者而比丘身份完全不存在,那就没有什么可再说的了。正如佛陀达塔阿阇梨在自己的《律决断》中所说:巴利
‘‘Hīnāyāvattanenāti pārājikaṃ āpannassa gihibhāvūpagamanenā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, taṃ suvuttaṃ. Na hi pārājikaṃ anāpannassa sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya ‘‘vibbhamissāmī’’ti gihiliṅgaggahaṇamattena bhikkhubhāvo vinassati. Pārājikaṃ āpanno ca bhikkhuliṅge ṭhito yāva na paṭijānāti, tāva attheva tassa bhikkhubhāvo, na so anupasampannasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tathā hi so saṃvāsaṃ sādiyantopi theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti, sahaseyyādiāpattiṃ na janeti, omasavāde pācittiyañca janeti. Teneva ‘‘asuddho hoti puggalo aññataraṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpanno, tañce suddhadiṭṭhi samāno okāsaṃ kārāpetvā akkosādhippāyo vadeti, āpatti omasavādassā’’ti (pārā. 389) omasavāde pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Asati hi bhikkhubhāve dukkaṭaṃ bhaveyya, sati ca bhikkhubhāve paṭiggahitassa paṭiggahaṇavijahanaṃ nāma ayuttaṃ, tasmā sabbaso bhikkhubhāvassa abhāvato pārājikaṃ āpajjitvā gihiliṅgaggahaṇena gihibhāvūpagamanaṃ idha ‘‘hīnāyāvattana’’nti adhippetaṃ, na pana pakatattassa gihiliṅgaggahaṇamattaṃ. Teneva katthaci sikkhāpaccakkhānena samānagatikattā hīnāyāvattanaṃ visuṃ na gaṇhanti. Sikkhāpaccakkhānena paṭiggahaṇavijahane vutte pārājikaṃ āpannassa gihibhāvūpagamanena sabbaso bhikkhubhāvassa abhāvato vattabbameva natthīti. Tathā hi buddhadattācariyena attano vinayavinicchaye –
“ 或因遭夺、被取、无顾恋而舍,
亦因弃学处、命终、转根之故。
通过布施给那个人,以及给不是比丘的人,
一切接受,终归毁灭。”巴利
‘‘Acchedagāhanirapekkhanisaggato ca, Sikkhāppahānamaraṇehi ca liṅgabhedā; Dānena tassa ca parassa abhikkhukassa, Sabbaṃ paṭiggahaṇameti vināsameva’’nti. –
就说了这么多。法吉祥也同样说:巴利
Ettakameva vuttaṃ. Tathā dhammasirittherenapi –
“ 通过舍学处、死亡与相,以及无所顾恋地舍弃;
由于强夺,或由于布施给未受具足戒者,所受持的(物品)便告失效。”巴利
‘‘Sikkhāmaraṇaliṅgehi, anapekkhavisaggato; Acchedānupasampanna-dānā gāhopasammatī’’ti. –
已说。如果对于本性者(未犯根本戒的比丘),仅仅因为取在家相就失去接受(具足戒),那些老师们也会另外单独说到这一点,但并没有这样说,由此可知:“本性者仅仅取在家相,在这里并不算是还俗。”然而比丘尼因为没有舍戒这回事,所以仅仅取在家相就会失去接受。巴利
Vuttaṃ . Yadi ca pakatattassa gihiliṅgaggahaṇamattenapi paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijaheyya, tepi ācariyā visuṃ tampi vadeyyuṃ, na vuttañca, tato viññāyati ‘‘pakatattassa gihiliṅgaggahaṇamattaṃ idha hīnāyāvattananti nādhippeta’’nti. Bhikkhuniyā pana sikkhāpaccakkhānassa abhāvato gihiliṅgaggahaṇamattenapi paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati.
“以无期待而舍”是指:还没有给其他人,因为已经不需要了,心里想“这东西对我没用了,我现在不会再用它”,于是把物品舍掉;或者对接受这件事想“我以后还会再拿回来用”,以这种无期待的方式舍掉。“以夺取而取”是指被盗贼等强行夺走而取。巴利
Anapekkhavissajjanenāti aññassa adatvāva anatthikatāya ‘‘natthi iminā kammaṃ, na idāni naṃ paribhuñjissāmī’’ti vatthūsu vā ‘‘puna paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjissāmī’’ti paṭiggahaṇe vā anapekkhavissajjanena. Acchinditvā gāhenāti corādīhi acchinditvā gahaṇena.
这里指比丘的住处。所种植的指由他种下的树木和灌木。十三种任命指:差饭食分配者、差房舍分配者、差库房管理者、差衣接受者、差分衣者、差分粥者、差分果者、差分嚼食者、差分杂物者、差授浴衣者、差授钵者、差使园民者、差使沙弥者这十三种任命。前安居和后安居的房舍分配确实都会被取消,不过前安居的房舍分配取消后,后安居时还可以去别处;后安居的房舍分配取消后,就不能去别处了。为了说明比丘们应当做的护持,先说前安居房舍分配取消的情况,然后说后安居房舍分配取消后不能去别处,接着就说了“若在后安居时取得了房舍”等话。巴利
Etthāti bhikkhuvihāre. Uparopakāti tena ropitā rukkhagacchā. Terasasu sammutīsūti bhattuddesakasenāsanapaññāpakabhaṇḍāgārikacīvarapaṭiggāhakacīvarabhājakayāgubhājakaphalabhājakakhajjabhājakaappamattakavissajjakasāṭiyaggāhāpakapattaggāhāpakaārāmikapesakasāmaṇerapesakasammutisaṅkhātāsu terasasu sammutīsu. Kāmaṃ purimikāya pacchimikāya ca senāsanaggāho paṭippassambhatiyeva, purimikāya pana senāsanaggāhe paṭippassaddhe pacchimikāya aññattha upagantuṃ sakkāti purimikāya senāsanaggāhapaṭippassaddhiṃ visuṃ dassetvā pacchimikāya senāsanaggāhe paṭippassaddhe na sakkā aññattha upagantunti tattha bhikkhūhi kattabbasaṅgahaṃ dassento ‘‘sace pacchimikāya senāsane gahite’’tiādimāha.
只应给半月敬悦,因为比丘尼即使犯了覆藏罪,也被允许只行半月敬悦。再者,只应给半月敬悦,因为在比丘时期没有行过敬悦。说“应由比丘尼作出罪甘马”,是因为在比丘时期已行敬悦,在比丘尼时期也算已行敬悦,所以这样说。如果说在不善果报……乃至……只应给六夜敬悦,这是就正在行敬悦者性别转变的论题说的。然而,如果在比丘时期,因覆藏共罪而正在行别住、或者尚未受别住的人发生了性别转变,那么他在比丘尼时期行半月敬悦时,如果不善果报已尽而性别再次转变,就先给别住;对已住别住的人,应给六夜敬悦。诸师是这样说的。巴利
Pakkhamānattameva dātabbanti bhikkhunīnaṃ paṭicchannāyapi āpattiyā mānattacārasseva anuññātattā. Puna pakkhamānattameva dātabbanti bhikkhukāle ciṇṇamānattābhāvato. Bhikkhunīhi abbhānakammaṃ kātabbanti bhikkhukāle ciṇṇamānattatāya bhikkhunīkālepi ciṇṇamānattā icceva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Sace akusalavipāke…pe… chārattaṃ mānattameva dātabbanti mānattaṃ carantassa liṅgaparivattādhikārattā vuttaṃ. Sace pana bhikkhukāle paṭicchannāya sādhāraṇāpattiyā parivasantassa asamādiṇṇaparivāsassa vā liṅgaṃ parivattati, tassa bhikkhunīkāle pakkhamānattaṃ carantassa akusalavipāke parikkhīṇe puna liṅge parivattite parivāsaṃ datvā parivutthaparivāsassa chārattaṃ mānattaṃ dātabbanti vadanti.
“媒介罪”这个说法,是为了显示这是共许的罪才说的。所谓“没有给予别住”,是因为在比丘时期没有覆藏的缘故。但在比丘尼时期,即使已经发露过的共许罪,如果在比丘时期没有发露,他们说这仍然是覆藏罪。所谓“比丘们没有给予敬悦”,是指在还没有行敬悦的情况下就发生了性别转变。即使已经处于比丘尼的身份,那些罪也早已妥善止息了——这是前后文的关联。所谓“那些先前已经止息的罪”,是指那些不共许的罪在先前还是比丘时就已止息。他们说:“犯了巴拉基格的人如果发生性别转变,由于相续是同一的,就不能再受达上;同样,还俗的比丘尼如果发生性别转变,也不能再受达上。”巴利
Sañcarittāpattīti sādhāraṇāpattidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Parivāsadānaṃ natthīti bhikkhukāle appaṭicchannabhāvato. Bhikkhunīkāle pana ārocitāpi sādhāraṇāpatti sace bhikkhukāle anārocitā, paṭicchannāva hotīti vadanti. Bhikkhūhi mānatte adinneti aciṇṇamānattāya liṅgaparivatte sati. Bhikkhunībhāve ṭhitāyapi tā suppaṭippassaddhā evāti sambandho. Yā āpattiyo pubbe paṭippassaddhāti yā asādhāraṇāpattiyo pubbe bhikkhubhāve paṭippassaddhā. ‘‘Pārājikaṃ āpannassa liṅgaparivatte sati santānassa ekattā na puna so upasampadaṃ labhati, tathā vibbhantāpi bhikkhunī liṅgaparivatte sati puna upasampadaṃ na labhatī’’ti vadanti.
71 “于无执受者”这句话,是因为此处是重点,所以对有执受者也是同样的道理——这是《小结文》和《中结文》里说的,但这种说法不对。因为对有执受的相起加行,并不见有恶作。同样,不把有执受的相纳入其中而只在外围起加行,则说是土喇咤亚,正如律藏《大品》所说:“诸比丘,不应以染心触摸生殖器,若触摸者,犯土喇咤亚。”这里应当说明的一切,在注释书中先前已经全部讨论过了。“只是恶作”是因为没有解脱欲。“同样”则暗示了“无论解脱与否”这个意思。巴利
71. ‘‘Anupādinnakesūti adhikārattā upādinnakepi eseva nayoti vutta’’nti cūḷagaṇṭhipade majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca vuttaṃ, taṃ duvuttaṃ. Na hi upādinnakesu nimitte upakkamantassa dukkaṭaṃ dissati. Tathā hi upādinnakesu nimitte appavesetvā bahi upakkamantassa thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252) vuttattā. Ettha ca yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pubbe vicāritameva. Dukkaṭamevāti mocanarāgassa abhāvato. Tathevāti muccatu vā mā vāti imamatthaṃ atidissati.
“非范围”这种说法,是因为在这样的情形下不认可,认为很难做到,才这么说的。所谓“执取女人的话”,就是执取像“我来努力,你不要努力”这类说出来的话。因为心里认定“只有双方都努力才算犯戒”,所以才说“你不要努力”。巴利
Avisayoti asādiyanaṃ nāma evarūpe ṭhāne dukkaranti katvā vuttaṃ. Mātugāmassa vacanaṃ gahetvāti ‘‘ahaṃ vāyamissāmi, tvaṃ mā vāyamī’’tiādinā vuttavacanaṃ gahetvā. Ubhayavāyāmeneva āpattīti saññāya ‘‘tvaṃ mā vāyamī’’ti vuttaṃ.
73 有人为了说明“Vaṭṭaka”(鹌鹑)这个词的含义,就说“vivaṭe”(张开)。诸师说:若有人因为害怕犯巴拉基格罪,把身体悬在虚空中,然后进行插入等动作,这时如果突然碰到上颚、胁部或生殖器,那就只是恶作罪,因为没有淫欲。这个说法要经过仔细考察之后再采纳。“Suphusitā”就是紧紧闭合。“口内没有空间”,是因为牙齿紧紧闭合,所以口内没有可以进入的空间。但如果唇肉被翻起,而他只朝牙齿本身发起加行,那就是土喇咤亚;就像蚱蜢嘴、青蛙嘴的形状那样,按照伤口简略判定的方式说是土喇咤亚。或者,依照“以淫欲对女人不进入,而以相状触碰相状,土喇咤亚”这一判定标准,因为性质相同,这里也说为土喇咤亚。对于伸出嘴外的牙齿和舌头,也是同样的道理。巴利
73.Vaṭṭakateti imassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘vivaṭe’’ti āha. ‘‘Pārājikabhayena ākāsagatameva katvā pavesanādīni karontassa sahasā tālukaṃ vā passaṃ vā aṅgajātaṃ phusati ce, dukkaṭameva methunarāgassa abhāvato’’ti vadanti, upaparikkhitvā gahetabbo. Suphusitāti suṭṭhu pihitā. Antomukhe okāso natthīti dantānaṃ supihitabhāvato antomukhe pavesetuṃ okāso natthi. Uppāṭite pana oṭṭhamaṃse dantesuyeva upakkamantassa thullaccayanti pataṅgamukhamaṇḍūkassa mukhasaṇṭhāne viya vaṇasaṅkhepavasena thullaccayaṃ. ‘‘Methunarāgena itthiyā appavesento nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, thullaccaya’’nti iminā vā lakkhaṇena samānattā idha thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ. Bahi nikkhantadantajivhāsupi eseva nayo.
“不泄而只是重罪”:因为《巴拉基格》262中说:“只是动念、起加行而不泄,就是重罪。”
“被烧渴等”:通过“等”这个字,应当知道也包含了饥饿鬼等。
“连靠近都不行”:被烧渴的众生,因为身体恒常被从毛孔生起的火焰燃烧;饥饿鬼等则因为身体极其可厌、丑陋、恐怖,只剩骨皮,恒常病弱,所以连碰触都不行。
“像天神一样享福”:这里要把属格“yāsaṃ”改成体格“yā”来连接,即“那些像天神一样享福的”。
在“见”等当中,“见”是指比丘看见她们;“执”也是指比丘执取她们的肢节;而“触摸”等则是她们的动作。其中,“触摸”只是用自己的身体碰到比丘身体表面;“触”是比触摸更用力地接触;“碰”又是比触更用力地以身体撞击身体。
“使其昏迷”:就是做到让他连已经做的加行都不知道。虽然触摸等是她的动作,但并不是因此就说无罪;而是依据“使那人昏迷后”这句话,如果未昏迷而知道并认可,那就直接是巴拉基格。
不过,比丘在见和执的时候,不存在不认可的情况,所以在见和执明显时,并没有说无罪。
但如果先在见和执时,后来使那人昏迷而行触摸等,满足自己的欲望后离开,那就没有巴拉基格。巴利
Amuccante thullaccayanti ‘‘ceteti upakkamati na muccati, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 262) vacanato. Nijjhāmataṇhikādīti ādi-saddena khuppipāsikādipetīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Allīyitumpi na sakkāti nijjhāmataṇhikānaṃ lomakūpehi samuṭṭhitaaggijālāhi niccaṃ pajjalitasarīratāya khuppipāsikādīnaṃ ativiya paṭikūlavirūpabībhacchaaṭṭhicammāvasiṭṭhaniccāturasarīratāya āmasitumpi na sakkā. Devatā viya sampattiṃ anubhontīti ettha yāsanti sāmivacanaṃ yāti paccattavacanena vipariṇāmetvā yojetabbaṃ ‘‘yā devatā viya sampattiṃ anubhontī’’ti. Dassanādīsu dassanaṃ nāma bhikkhunā tāsaṃ dassanaṃ, gahaṇampi bhikkhunāva tāsaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgagahaṇaṃ. Āmasanādīni pana tāsaṃ kiccāni. Tattha āmasanaṃ nāma attano sarīrena bhikkhuno sarīrassa upari āmasanamattaṃ, phusanaṃ tato daḷhataraṃ katvā samphusanaṃ, ghaṭṭanaṃ tatopi daḷhataraṃ katvā sarīrena sarīrassa ghaṭṭanaṃ. Visaññaṃ katvāti yathā so katampi upakkamanaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ katvā. Yadipi āmasanādi tassā kiccaṃ, tathāpi teneva anāpattiṃ avatvā ‘‘taṃ puggalaṃ visaññaṃ katvā’’ti vacanato akatavisañño jānitvā sādiyati ce, pārājikameva. Bhikkhuno pana dassanagahaṇesu sati asādiyanaṃ nāma na hotīti dassanagahaṇesu paññāyamānesu anāpatti na vuttā. Yadi pana paṭhamaṃ dassanagahaṇesu sati pacchā taṃ puggalaṃ visaññaṃ katvā āmasanādīni karontī attano manorathaṃ pūretvā gacchati, natthi pārājikaṃ.
身根受损:即使身根未损,但因为风、胆汁等的影响,使它无力生起身识,这就叫身根受损。依受用心而得罪:就像根据所铺设的相状,即使未感知已执取触,也依其受用心而得罪;同样,这里因为风、胆汁等使身根受损,即使未觉知,也依受用心而得罪。巴利
Upahatakāyappasādoti anaṭṭhepi kāyappasāde kāyaviññāṇuppādane asamatthatāpādanavasena vātapittādīhi upahatakāyappasādo. Sevanacittavasena āpattīti yathā santhatanimittavasena upādinnaphassaṃ avindantassapi sevanacittavasena āpatti, evamidhāpi pittavātādinā upahatakāyappasādattā avediyantassapi sevanacittavasena āpatti.
有人会问:既然在只是碰触的情形里,说过“我打算行淫欲法,仅仅碰触时就生起追悔”,那么淫欲的前方便就应该只是恶作罪,为什么这里又说“犯桑喀地谢思罪”呢?为了处理这个内在的责难并加以回应,才开始了“凡有淫行”等论述。其中,“头”是指以男根入女根。因为在各种加行中,它就像顶点一样,所以称为“头”,在这之后就没有别的加行了。“住立于恶作中”就是产生恶作。因为当恶作产生时,执手等加行就被称为“住立于恶作中”,这是由于它们不是以生起别的罪的方式而运作。巴利
Nanu ca chupitamattavatthusmiṃ ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevissāmīti chupitamatte vippaṭisārī ahosī’’ti vuttattā methunassa pubbapayoge dukkaṭena bhavitabbaṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti vuttanti imaṃ antolīnacodanaṃ manasikatvā taṃ pariharituṃ ‘‘yo methuna’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha sīsanti maggena maggapaṭipādanaṃ. Tañhi payogānaṃ matthakasadisattā ‘‘sīsa’’nti vuttaṃ tato paraṃ payogābhāvato. Dukkaṭe tiṭṭhantīti dukkaṭaṃ janenti. Dukkaṭañhi janentā hatthaggāhādayo payogā ‘‘dukkaṭe tiṭṭhantī’’ti vuttā aññissā āpattiyā janakavasena appavattanato.
74 素馨花丛,就是素馨花的簇团。由于繁茂,就是由于众多。在近处,就是在邻近的地方。由于那种风的支持,就是像所说的“身体各肢节被风撑得僵直”那样的风的支持。由此说明了入睡的原因。一味,就是不被转向等路心所间断。巴利
74.Jātipupphagumbānanti jātisumanagumbānaṃ. Ussannatāyāti bāhullatāya. Upacāreti āsannappadese. Tena vātupatthambhenāti ‘‘aṅgamaṅgāni vātupatthaddhāni hontī’’ti evaṃ vuttavātupatthambhena. Iminā niddokkamanassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekarasanti āvajjanādivīthicittehi abbokiṇṇaṃ.
76 像战场前线的战士那样的比丘:因为他没有被烦恼这些敌人打败,反而把他们击败了,所以比丘就像站在战场最前线的战士一样。巴利
76.Saṅgāmasīsayodhobhikkhūti yasmā kilesārīhi anabhibhūto hutvā te parājesi, tasmā saṅgāmamukhe yodhasadiso bhikkhu.
77 在淫行所依之事已经发生的情况下。“正是能转动的门”,指的是正是通过开合来左右转动的门。“木针门和刺门”,就是木针门与刺门。也可以读作“木针门、刺门”。所谓木针门,是在两边埋下木柱,在那里穿孔,中间插入两三根木针做成的门。所谓刺门,是在进出时把它移开、适合关闭的门,用一根或多根带刺的树枝做成。“装有轮子的门”,是指下面装了轮子的大门,一个人没法关上或打开。“系缚之后”,是指用绳子绑起来。“只有一扇布幔门”,这里也包含席幔门。巴利
77.Uppanne vatthusminti methunavatthusmiṃ uppanne. Parivattakadvāramevāti saṃvaraṇavivaraṇavasena ito cito ca parivattanayoggadvārameva. Rukkhasūcikaṇṭakadvāranti rukkhasūcidvāraṃ kaṇṭakadvārañca. ‘‘Rukkhasūcidvāraṃ kaṇṭakadvāra’’micceva vā pāṭho. Yaṃ ubhosu passesu rukkhathambhe nikhaṇitvā tattha vijjhitvā majjhe dve tisso rukkhasūciyo pavesetvā karonti, taṃ rukkhasūcidvāraṃ. Yaṃ pavesananikkhamanakāle apanetvā thakanayoggaṃ, ekāya bahūhi vā kaṇṭakasākhāhi kataṃ, taṃ kaṇṭakadvāraṃ. Cakkalakayuttadvāranti heṭṭhā etaṃ cakkaṃ yojetvā kataṃ mahādvāraṃ, yaṃ na sakkā ekena saṃvarituṃ vivarituñca. Gopphetvāti rajjūhi ganthetvā. Ekaṃ dussasāṇidvāramevāti ettha kilañjasāṇidvārampi saṅgahaṃ gacchati.
如果那个地方关上门后没办法躺下,为了说明这时该怎么做,就说了“如果有很多人经过的地方”等等这些话。即使是在很多人不经过的地方,向一个人请假之后躺下也是可以的。接着“比丘们……坐着”这一句,是为了表明比丘们当时在场才说的。“无论是坐着还是躺着,只要以任何一种姿势在场,就可以作意”,这三处结语里都是这么说的。不过有些人说:“因为说的是‘坐着’,所以如果是躺着就不能作意。”这种说法不对。如果因为说的是“坐着”,躺着就不能作意,那站着、经行的时候也不能作意了。其实“坐着”这个词并不是只排除躺着,它只是为了表明他们在场,并不是要排除其他姿势。话虽如此,躺着睡着了的人,因为属于不可信赖的情况,所以不适合作意,这是我们认可的。正因为属于不可信赖的情况,所以才说在隐蔽处坐着或躺着时,躺着睡着并非不犯戒。关门是为了防止比丘尼等人进来,所以说“不能向比丘尼或女人请假”。他们说“不能向女人、双性人、女黄门请假”。即使知道女人在屋里,在门口按照上面说的方法做了之后躺下,也不犯戒。“把梯子架上去”,是指把梯子架到上层、拆掉、扔到地上或者砍断之后,也可以躺下。“两扇门都要看好”,这里如果有一扇门没有门板,或者没办法按前面说的方法关上,那另一扇门不关也可以躺下。巴利
Yattha dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā nipajjituṃ na sakkā hoti, tattha kattabbavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sace bahūnaṃ vaḷañjanaṭṭhānaṃ hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bahūnaṃ avaḷañjanaṭṭhānepi ekaṃ āpucchitvā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Atha bhikkhū…pe… nisinnā hontīti idaṃ tattha bhikkhūnaṃ sannihitabhāvasandassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nisinno vā pana hotu nipanno vā, yena kenaci iriyāpathena samannāgato sace tattha sannihito hoti, ābhogaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘nisinnā hontīti vacanato sace nipannā honti, ābhogaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Yadi hi ‘‘nisinnā hontī’’ti vacanato nipanne ābhogaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, ṭhitepi caṅkamantepi ābhogaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Na hi nisinnavacanaṃ nipannaṃyeva nivatteti, tasmā ‘‘nisinnā hontī’’ti idaṃ tattha tesaṃ atthitāmattasandassanatthaṃ, na sesairiyāpathasamaṅgitānivattanatthaṃ. Evaṃ santepi nipajjitvā niddāyanto asantapakkhe ṭhitattā ābhogāraho na hotīti amhākaṃ khanti. Asantapakkhe ṭhitattāyeva hi raho nisajjāya nipajjitvā niddāyanto anāpattiṃ na karotīti vuttaṃ. Dvārasaṃvaraṇaṃ nāma bhikkhunīādīnaṃ pavesananivāraṇatthanti āha – ‘‘bhikkhuniṃ vā mātugāmaṃ vā āpucchituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti. ‘‘Itthiubhatobyañjanakaṃ itthipaṇḍakañca āpucchituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Mātugāmassa antogabbhe ṭhitabhāvaṃ jānitvāpi dvāre yathāvuttavidhiṃ katvā nipajjantassa anāpatti. Nisseṇiṃ āropetvāti uparitalaṃ āropetvā visaṅkharitvā bhūmiyaṃ pātetvā chinditvā vā nipajjitumpi vaṭṭati. Dvepi dvārāni jaggitabbānīti ettha sace ekasmiṃ dvāre kavāṭaṃ vā natthi, heṭṭhā vuttanayena saṃvarituṃ vā na sakkā, itaraṃ dvāraṃ asaṃvaritvāpi nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati.
从乞食处返回,就是结束乞食回来之后。守门人,是指站在门楼、大门口或梯子下面守护大门的人。后面那些人的担子,是就一个接一个跟着来的人而言。应理解为在门没有关上的内室中。或者在门外,是指在内室之外。即使在躺下的时候……也是可以的——关于这里,他们说:因为守护门的人从属于他,所以即使不考察他当时是否在场,也可以作意。巴利
Bhikkhācārāpaṭikkammāti bhikkhācārato nivattitvā. Dvārapālassāti dvārakoṭṭhake mahādvāre nisseṇimūle vā ṭhatvā dvārarakkhaṇakassa. Pacchimānaṃ bhāroti ekānubandhavasena āgacchante sandhāya vuttaṃ. Asaṃvutadvāre antogabbhe vāti yojetabbaṃ. Bahi vāti gabbhato bahi. Nipajjanakālepi…pe… vaṭṭatiyevāti ettha ‘‘dvārajagganakassa tadadhīnattā tadā tassa tattha sannihitāsannihitabhāvaṃ anupadhāretvāpi ābhogaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti vadanti.
“以任何方式围起来”,就是用围墙、篱笆或随便什么方式围起来。他们说:“围起来的高度标准,可以按照前面讲‘足够共宿’时所说的方式来理解。”不过,如果某个地方的围栏比所说的标准矮一些,也可以。所谓“有大院落”,就是有很大的庭院。说“像大菩提树庭院、铜殿庭院那样”,是为了说明有很多人往来、容易看见,不是为了说明区域有多大。天亮时起来,无犯:这是说以清净心躺下、正在睡觉的人,仅仅因为还在睡,天亮时无犯。醒来后又睡,有犯:这是说天亮时醒来后,即使不知道天已经亮了,也不起身,继续以躺卧的状态睡着,就有犯;在天亮前醒来后,即使不知道,只要还以躺卧的状态睡着,天亮时也同样有犯。该起来的时候就起来:就是天亮时就起身。他有犯:因为是以不清净的心躺下的,所以即使是在睡觉,天亮时也有以白天独处为根源的犯。由于说“这样躺着的人,也免不了不恭敬的恶作”,以不清净心躺下的人,不管是在天亮前起来还是不起来,在躺下的当下就已经犯了不恭敬的恶作;而以白天独处为根源的恶作,则是在天亮时才犯。巴利
Yena kenaci parikkhitteti pākārena vā vatiyā vā yena kenaci parikkhitte. ‘‘Parikkhepassa uccato pamāṇaṃ sahaseyyappahonake vuttanayena veditabba’’nti vadanti. Yadi pana ekasmiṃ padese parikkhepo vuttappamāṇato nīcataro hoti, vaṭṭati. Mahāpariveṇaṃ hotīti mahantaṃ aṅgaṇaṃ hoti. Mahābodhiyaṅgaṇalohapāsādayaṅgaṇasadisanti bahusañcāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na mahāparicchedadassanatthaṃ. Aruṇe uggate uṭṭhahati, anāpattīti suddhacittena nipannassa niddāyantasseva aruṇe uggateyeva niddāvaseneva anāpatti. Pabujjhitvā puna supati, āpattīti aruṇe uggate pabujjhitvā aruṇuggamanaṃ ajānitvāpi anuṭṭhahitvāva sayitasantānena sayantassa āpatti, purāruṇe pabujjhitvāpi ajānitvā sayitasantānena sayantassapi aruṇe uggate āpattiyeva. Yathāparicchedameva vuṭṭhātīti aruṇe uggateyeva uṭṭhahati. Tassa āpattīti asuddhacitteneva nipannattā niddāyantassapi aruṇe uggate divāpaṭisallānamūlikā āpatti. ‘‘Evaṃ nipajjanto anādariyadukkaṭāpi na muccatī’’ti vuttattā asuddhacittena nipajjanto aruṇuggamanato puretaraṃ uṭṭhahantopi anuṭṭhahantopi nipajjanakāleyeva anādariyadukkaṭaṃ āpajjati, divāpaṭisallānamūlikaṃ pana dukkaṭaṃ aruṇe uggateyeva āpajjati.
然而,对于上述三处要点中所说的内容:“夜间关门后躺下,如果到了黎明时分,即使门已经打开,仍然躺着,他就有犯,因为他是在非田地关门之后才躺下的。如果在黎明时分门已打开时,心想‘我要躺下’,而夜间是关着门躺下的,那么因为在非田地关门,所以在躺下的时候就有不恭敬的恶作;到了黎明升起时,又有以躺下为根本的恶作。夜间无论门关着还是没关而躺下的人,只有在黎明升起的那一刻,如果门本来没关而关上,或者门本来关着又打开再关上,那么因为是在田地关门,所以没有犯。”这与注疏不一致。因为注疏中显示,只有夜间没有关门而躺下的人,在黎明升起时才有犯。因此,不管关门是在田地还是非田地,在这里只有“关闭”才是标准——这是我们所认可的。巴利
Yaṃ panettha tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ ‘‘rattiṃ dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā nipanno sace aruṇuggamanavelāyaṃ dvāre vivaṭepi nipajjati, tassa āpatti akhette saṃvaritvā nipannattā. Aruṇuggamanavelāyaṃ vivaṭepi dvāre ‘‘nipajjissāmī’’ti rattiṃ dvāraṃ saṃvaritvāpi nipannassa akhette pihitattā nipajjanakāle anādariyadukkaṭaṃ, aruṇe uggate nipajjanamūladukkaṭañca hoti. Rattiṃ pihitepi apihitepi dvāre nipannassa aruṇuggamanakkhaṇeyeva apihitadvāre pihite pihitadvāre ca puna vivaritvā pihite khette pihitattā anāpattī’’ti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya na sameti. Rattiṃ dvāraṃ asaṃvaritvā nipannasseva hi aruṇuggamane āpatti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dassitā, tasmā khette vā pihitaṃ hotu akhette vā, saṃvaraṇamevettha pamāṇanti amhākaṃ khanti.
因为被睡眠压倒,所以侧身躺下,这叫“因睡眠而躺下”。但这样躺着,并不算真正的“躺下”,所以说无犯。“倚靠而睡”:是指腰和背脊之间连一点点地方都不接触地面,靠着柱子等东西睡觉。“猛然起身”:就像绊倒后猛地站起来一样。“就在那里睡而不起身”:是因为被睡眠压倒而睡着,起不来,并不是昏迷不醒。正因为如此,才没有说“因非其境域,不见有犯”。巴利
Niddāvasena nipajjatīti niddābhibhūtatāya ekapassena nipajjati, evaṃ pana nipanno nipanno nāma na hotīti anāpatti vuttā. Apassāya supantassāti kaṭiyā piṭṭhivemajjhassa ca antare appamattakampi padesaṃ bhūmiṃ aphusāpetvā thambhādiṃ apassāya supantassa. Sahasāva vuṭṭhātīti pakkhalitvā patito viya sahasā vuṭṭhāti. Tattheva sayati na vuṭṭhātīti niddābhibhūtatāya supanto na vuṭṭhāti, na mucchāpareto. Teneva ‘‘avisayattā āpatti na dissatī’’ti na vuttaṃ.
“以一侧折断而躺下”:是指把一侧折断,也就是按照前面所说的方法,脚不离开地面,只把一侧折断、弯下之后躺下。这里说的是这个意思。而在《大注疏》中,这是玛哈巴杜玛长老所说的,二者应当联系起来理解。因为他是昏迷之后倒下的,所以长老说:“由于不在他的境域内,看不到有犯戒。”但诸位老师不认为这构成无犯。他们说:就像被夜叉抓住的人、被捆绑后放倒的人,是受他力控制;同样,昏迷倒下的人并不是受他力控制,即使他还有一段时间有知觉而躺着,也不能说无犯。至于被夜叉抓住的人,以及被捆绑后放倒的人,由于这是《大注疏》说法中最后提到的情形,所以应当以它为准。因此后面会说:“在任何地方,凡是注疏的说法或长老的说法中最后说到的,就应当以它为准。”(《巴拉基格注疏》1.92)这里通过“被夜叉抓住”这一说法,就已经把失去知觉的人也包含在内了,应当这样理解。不过,以一侧折断而躺下的人,从义理上说,因为不算真正的躺下,所以仍然免除犯戒——应当知道,按照《大注疏》的说法,这一点并没有被否定。白天关门后躺下的人,即使有人把门打开,也无犯,因为他躺下的时候,门已经关上了。如果白天关门后在门附近躺下,后来自己又把门打开,这样也可以。这种犯戒既不是有心,也不是无心;既可以说是作为,也可以说是非作为。巴利
Ekabhaṅgenāti ekassa passassa bhañjanena, heṭṭhā vuttanayena pāde bhūmito amocetvāva ekaṃ passaṃ bhañjitvā nāmetvā nipannoti vuttaṃ hoti. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mahāpadumattherena vuttanti sambandho. Mucchitvā patitattā therena ‘‘avisayattā āpatti na dissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ācariyā pana yathā yakkhagahitako bandhitvā nipajjāpito ca paravaso hoti, evaṃ aparavasattā mucchitvā patito kañci kālaṃ jānitvāpi nipajjatīti anāpattiṃ na vadanti. Yo ca yakkhagahitako, yo ca bandhitvā nipajjāpitoti imassa mahāaṭṭhakathāvādassa pacchimattā soyeva pamāṇato gahetabbo. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘sabbattha yo yo aṭṭhakathāvādo vā theravādo vā pacchā vuccati, sova pamāṇato daṭṭhabbo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.92). Yakkhagahitaggahaṇeneva cettha visaññībhūtopi saṅgahitoti veditabbaṃ. Ekabhaṅgena nipanno pana atthato anipannattā muccatiyevāti mahāaṭṭhakathāvādena so appaṭikkhittova hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Divā saṃvaritvā nipannassa kenaci vivaṭepi dvāre anāpatti nipajjanakāle saṃvaritvā nipannattā. Sace divā saṃvaritvā dvārasamīpe nipanno pacchā sayameva dvāraṃ vivarati, evampi vaṭṭati. Acittakā cāyaṃ āpatti kiriyā ca akiriyā ca.
78 说了“就像在没有足迹的地方留下足迹”之后,为了再次说明这个意思,又说“就像在虚空中示现足迹”。“此为最上”,意思是这就是第一。“所谓此”,就是指这个。这里剩下的内容,文义很浅显。巴利
78.‘‘Apade padaṃ karonto viyā’’ti vatvā puna tamevatthaṃ āvikaronto ‘‘ākāse padaṃ dassento viyā’’ti āha. Etadagganti eso aggo. Yadidanti yo ayaṃ. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
关于“其中”等说法,意思和前面讲过的一样。巴利
Tatridantiādi heṭṭhā vuttatthameva.
1 2 3 4